Home

XYNERGI Post V5 Operator Manual_001 9570KB

1. a m ee D oe p ae dros p OO eenen DIDGA ABE A H IH so a MHD a e They effectively provide an extra zoom range to use on tracks of particular interest while the rest of the screen gives more contextual information The Video Scroller shows a frame by frame view of the video track centered on the current position To enable Scrollers use Setup gt General Preferences Scrollers Fairlight XYNERGI Page 50 CHANNELS November 7 2014 General Preferences x Options Audiobase Playback Video Capture m Tracks that have scrollers Scroller Settings W Video Level Mapping Silea z C Track 2 O Track 3 I Scrollers as Outline C Track 4 C Track 5 J Scrollers on full screen video D Track 6 I Scroller follows current track Q Track 7 O Track 8 O Track 9 C Track 1N z m Sample Accuracy 20 220 7 i 200 Select the tracks you wish to see Only two audio tracks and or the video track may be displayed You can also select tracks for scrollers by holding down Shift and pressing Zoom you can now release Shift and toggle scrollers on or off with the track keys You can only select an audio track if less than two are already on the screen While scrollers are displayed you can e Click at any point to locate to that position e Click and drag the scroller to move the transp
2. Right clicking in the EQ DYN or PAN sections causes display of the Zoom panels See below The Fat Channel shows a detailed display of the parameters for the currently called signal path A signal path may be a mono live or track feed a bus or a multichannel surround format link group which can be selected and modified from a single set of controls The user and system names of the signal path are displayed at the top left The input box at the left of the signal path indicates the format or element name of the path and the user name and system name of the physical input from which it is patched The input meter shows the signal level at the input of the signal path If a track feed is selected the input fader level is shown The EQ display shows a graph of the equaliser response The dynamics display shows the composite transfer function of the entire dynamics section The display also includes gain reduction signal meters for all three sections If the dynamics are switched IN the graph is highlighted if switched OUT the graph is dimmed The insert send and receive I O patching is displayed If the insert is switched IN the insert display is highlighted if switched OUT the display is dimmed The main fader level for the signal path is displayed with a numeric display of the fader gain This is an active control The direct out level pre post status and output patching is displayed If the direct out is switched ON the direct
3. If your ClipStore is to be shared on a network the Publish Media as Well checkbox should be used so that the media is placed in the appropriate folder under the ClipStore file This will allow users from anywhere on the network to audition and paste the audio Multiple users can publish at almost the same time to the same ClipStore Because the clip metadata is very small the ClipStore is only opened for Write for a short time making clashes between users relatively unlikely If a clash occurs the later publish command will be held off until the earlier one is finished which will hang the late publishing system for a short period To access audio from an open Clipstore open the Clip Search dialog in one of the following ways e Press GoTo Clip e Click View gt Clip Search In the Clip Search dialog there is a checkbox for each open Clipstores When this is checked the dialog shows all the clips in the selected Clipstores which can be auditioned previewed and pasted in the normal way Group Clips can be auditioned and pasted as well This allows the possibility of collecting complex effects into the Clipstore and reusing them at any time Dragging Directly from Windows Sometimes it is useful to place audio in Clipstores without using it in the project This can be done by dragging files from a Windows Explorer Folder window directly into a open Clipstore in the Clip Search Window The dialog that follows will allow you to choose w
4. XYNERGI is configurable with up to 192 disk recorder tracks up to 212 physical inputs and outputs It integrates recording and editing capability with a fully featured fully automated mixing engine capable of delivering multiple final mixes in any format up to 5 1 surround In addition it provides recording and basic editing of video in a variety of formats up to and including HD Signal paths may be configured in formats from mono up to 5 1 surround Tracks and Live Feeds For CC 1 systems e Upto 192 Track Feeds e Up to 48 Live Feeds For CC 2 systems e Up to 744 Playback Tracks see Chapter 2 for details e Up to 256 Full Tracks o Any number of the Full Tracks can be set up as Live Feeds Processing for Tracks and Live Feeds e 4band automated EQ Bell Shelf High amp Low Notch e 2band automated Filters High Pass and Low Pass at 12 pr 24 dB per octave e Compressor plus Limiter plus Expander Gate e Insert e Direct Out except on Playback Tracks in CC 2 systems e Track Metering e Aux Sends 12 each in any bus format up to 7 1 e Fader and Mute e Panning up to 7 1 surround Link Groups e Up to 8 members with linked parameter controls and support for advanced surround panning features Main Bus e 1x Main Bus e Formats Mono Stereo LCR 2 1 LCRS LCRSS 5 1 5 1 SMPTE 7 1 Custom e Compressor and Limiter e Insert e Direct Out e Master Fader and Mute Sub Buses e 8x Sub Buses Fairlight XYNERGI Page 6
5. Fairlight XYNERGI Page 375 HUI SLAVE MODE November 7 2014 C Program Files Fairlight FMC Data User username Where username is the log on name used on your computer The remap file takes keys coming in from the HUI device and routes them to keys on your Post V5 0 system Here is the text in one remap file CID_SW_MACKIE_STOP CID_SW_STOP CID_SW_MACKIE_REWIND CID_SW_REW CID_SW_MACKIE_FAST_FWD CID_SW_FF CID_SW_MACKIE_PLAY CID_SW_PLAY CID_SW_MACKIE_RECORD CID_SW_REC CID_SW_MACKIE_ALT CID_SW_BLUE_1 Blue key CID_SW_MACKIE_ENTER CID_SW_ENTER CID_SW_MACKIE_ZOOM CID_SW_ZOOM CID_SW_MACKIE_LEFT CID_SW_RNGE_ UMP_LEFT CID_SW_MACKIE_RIGHT CID_SW_RNGE_JUMP_RIGHT CID_SW_MACKIE_MARKER CID_SW_GAP_FROM ClD_SW_MACKIE_NUDGE CID_SW_GAP_TO CID_SW_MACKIE_SCRUB CID_SW_SHUT_ OG turns Jog on CID_JOG_MACKIE_WHEEL CID_ O_JOGGER this assigns the HUI jogger to the Post V5 0 jogger ClD_SW_MACKIE_READ CID_SW_EN_FADER_2 enables faders for automation CID_SW_MACKIE_WRITE CID_SW_EN_MUTE_2 enables mutess for automation CID_SW_MACKIE_TOUCH CID_SW_EN_PAN_1 enables pan parameters for automation CID_SW_MACKIE_TRIM CID_SW_EN_EQ GROUP enables EQ parameters for automation CID_SW_MACKIE_LATCH CID_SW_EN_DYN_GROUP enables dynamics parameters for automation CID_SW_MACKIE_GROUP CID_SW_EN_ AUX GROUP enables aux send parameters for automation Examining this line CID_SW_MACKIE_STOP CID_SW_STOP we see that the first part is the HUI stop key and the
6. Fairlight XYNERGI Page 319 PYXIS TRACK November 7 2014 The same password must be entered to unlock encrypted video media each time the project is opened Once you have entered the password you can open any files encrypted with that password The Pyxis Window To show a window displaying your video use the command Press Pyxis View in the Setup Megamode Alternatively use the menu command view Pyxis Display Layering Smart Pane Ps Pyxis Track Playback Video Source Edit Workspace y VY Locators Sort Video Locators Tracks Clip Search TimeScale Statistics Performance Background Tasks This window is resizeable as shown below i 5 15 s 30 E 50 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 Drag here to resize Pyxis window Click here to scroll video locators list Video locators Full Screen Pyxis To make Pyxis go full screen covering the Edit Screen use the command Fairlight XYNERGI Page 320 PYXIS TRACK November 7 2014 Press Pyxis Full in the Setup Megamode Alternatively double click anywhere in the Pyxis window Video Locators While the Pyxis window is displayed you may click on an empty marker at any time This will capture the current video frame and display it with a timecode number To locate to any video locator simply click it To re order the locators drag and drop t
7. If ctr1 and zoom are both held down the Jog wheel adjusts the number of tracks being displayed in the Edit screen Similarly holding down ctr1 and turning the mouse wheel makes this adjustment Picture Keys Track Track Track Track Track Track Track Track P Track Track 1 2 3 4 6d 7 9 10 11 12 m P plug p audio F play cut cop path i EQ dyn aux ke gate base menu F ai m all all fade RER pa slip Import Mi Me mute solo razor layers clip z r z 7 _ D f solo mute moe SHIFT Trk macro proj mon menu menu mark loop tail iF t Picture keys change their appearance and function according to what you are doing Their function is usually clear from the label and they can also tally on off states Some picture keys use animation to indicate warning states Bank Bank t J P Layouts A layout is a group of keys that are presented together Some layouts include all the keys and some include only a few or even one Layouts can include picture keys and fixed keys Picture Keys by Colour Different colours are used for different types of keys as shown below Fairlight XYNERGI Page 20 THE XYNERGI TACTILE CONTROLLER November 7 2014 Megamode Keys ja ga record Megamode keys are always green Megamodes are layouts that change the whole keyboard They are used for different areas of operation Each megamode includes where possible all the functions you need to perform its group of ta
8. Mono Stereo files automatically choose Make your selections and click OK File Type Select Wav BWave or AIF files BWave files will be exported with the timecode stamp from the Post V5 0 timeline Export With Select Clip EQ Clip Level and or Clip Fades to render those modifications into the exported file s Normalize Normalize will examine the level in every clip you have selected find the maximum level of all the clips then show the gain increase needed to bring it up to 0 dB Then all the clips will be amplified by this amount giving you the loudest best quality signal possible while maintaining correct balance Audio Type Select bit depth and Sample Rate for exported file s Defaults to Project sample rate and bit depth Mixdown Select Entire Project to export the entire project one file per track in Multiple Mono Mode Select Between Range to export all audio in the current range one file per track in Multiple Mono Mode Select Selected Clips to only export selected red clips always one file per clip regardless of selected Channels Check Selected Tracks Only to only export selected tracks Check Align to Video Frame Boundaries to align exported file s with the video frame edges Check Export Empty Tracks to export blank files for empty tracks if Multiple Mono files have been selected Then select the location you want the exported audio to go and hit OK Chann
9. PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT November 7 2014 Capture records the material needed by the edit list from original sources such as video tape Conform edits the source audio recorded in the capture process placing it at the destination locations indicated by the edit list Reconform re edits an existing POST V5 0 project according to a cut list usually representing a re edit of the pictures in a video project Loading an EDL The first step is to load an EDL file Step 1 At the top of the Edit Screen click File gt Import gt EDL Step 2 Navigate to the file location of an EDL file and click the Open button This will cause the display of the EDL dialog O00 ofeeieo onon 00 07 35 23 07 36 10 00 07 35 23 00 07 35 23 00 17 32 09 00 17 33 06 00 07 35 23 00 07 36 20 00 17 33 06 00 17 33 06 00 07 36 20 00 07 36 20 00 00 01 00 00 07 36 20 00 07 37 20 00 09 30 24 00 08 35 24 00 10 36 03 00 09 30 24 00 10 36 03 00 10 36 03 _18 28 16 17 c D c D E D c D Capture and Conform Capture and Conform are performed at the same time The audio for each line in the EDL is captured and immediately conformed Before starting we must set some parameters Step 1 Set up Track Mapping Fairlight XYNERGI Page 359 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT November 7 2014 Step 2 Step 3 12 1 8 3 9 12 9 16 All Audio Track in on iA oon in Track mapping chooses the tracks where you will record
10. The left Servo LED is green when the 9 Pin device has servo lock The right Servo LED is green when the 9 Pin device has sync lock For correct operation with 9 Pin devices both LEDs should be green Timecode Displays the current timecode position of the external device Status Displays the device status Offset Displays the device offset Asm Indicates the 9 Pin device is in Assembly Edit Mode Inh Indicates the 9 Pin device is in Record Inhibit mode Ref Indicates the 9 Pin device is receiving a valid external sync reference Timecode Generator The LTC and MTC generators are independent of the machines controlled from the Smart Panel The checkboxes shown below are used to turn these on and off Fairlight XYNERGI Page 368 SYNC AND MACHINE CONTROL November 7 2014 eject 00 00 00 00 The timecode generators have their own offset field shown above When the In Stop checkbox is ticked a repeated timecode frame is generated when the transport is stationary Otherwise timecode is generated only in Play MIDI Timecode is always output from the MIDI port at the rear of the SX 20 sync box Putting Machines Online Machines stay in stop and are ignored by the XYNERGI system while offline To put a machine online do one of the following e Press the mi or m2 button on the XYNERGI Center section e Select one of the Online checkboxes on the Machine Control Smart Pane re ET me oven o o
11. To display bar lines over the Edit Screen use the menu view gt Timescale Bars and Beats Point Head Tail or Sync Point of a clip on any selected track The Sync Point is placed in a clip just so you can jump there To set the sync point locate to the place in the clip where you want it and use Trim Sync softkey Enter in the Editor Megamode Point or Fade Head Tail Fade Point or Sync Point of a clip Mark stored timecode location in the Project Note Mark can be selected in addition to Point Or Point or Fade Jump Targets can also be chosen in the menu Edit Settings gt Jump to Jumping with the Mouse Use the Toolbar jumps to reach strategic places in the project Previous Previous Add Mark Next Clip Next Mark Mark Clip tiell peio A Mark is a stored timecode point in the project Click Add Mark to make a new one Click Next Mark or Previous Mark to jump to marks For more info about Marks see Using Marks below The Sync Point is placed in a clip just so you can jump there To set the sync point locate to the place in the clip where you want it select the Editor Megamode and use Trim Sync softkey gt Enter Alternatively use the menu command clip Set Sync Point Jump overrides The following key combinations extend the Jump functionality Fairlight XYNERGI Page 71 TRANSPORT November 7 2014 ctrl Jump gt jump to next or previous Mark stored timecode location in the Project Shift Ju
12. controls level or other choices Basic Operation Fader Each fader controls the channel volume level in a range from 90 dB to 10 dB To set the fader to exactly 0 dB hold down the BLUE button and touch the fader The current fader level can be read in the OLED display above more info about this below The motors work during automation playback to track the level data recorded for the channel being controlled During automation recording the motors switch off allowing new movements to be recorded The touch sensor tells the NAME software that you have touched the fader The most common use is to put the fader into automation write when you move it It is also possible to call the controlled channel to the XYNERGI Pad by touching the fader To switch this fuction on use the call menu in the Setup Megamode Mute The Mute button is used to turn the channel on and off When the channel is muted it is equivalent to having the fader pulled right down and no signal passes from the channel to its send destination Fairlight XYNERGI Page 237 MIXING November 7 2014 The Mute button always follows the fader See below how the fader can be reassigned to various functions in the channel in all cases the Mute button is reassigned to the same function Solo The Solo button has the general effect of isolating the soloed channel so it can be heard alone The OLED Display The OLED display at the top of the f
13. dog and also contains cat o means OR e g dog cat means contains dog or contains cat Fairlight XYNERGI Page 183 AUDIOBASE CLIP SEARCH CLIPSTORES QTUBE November 7 2014 Clip Search Clip Search is useful for handling clips in your current project your attached library project your project Bin and any ClipStores you can access It does not require any database setup or software Clip Search incorporates the following capabilities e Search for clips by name within the current project and attached libraries e Search within Clip Bins and ClipStores e Preview or audition found clips e Paste found clips into the project e Locate to found clips e Pop change layers of clips within the project e Export clips Accessing Clip Search Clip Search can be accessed in the following ways e Press GoTo Clip e Click View gt Clip Search E k 00 02 12 02 00 02 20 23 00 02 20 05 00 02 29 01 00 47 59 18 00 48 09 18 00 48 25 19 00 48 35 15 00 48 34 22 00 48 43 18 00 49 35 14 00 49 46 14 00 15 37 02 00 16 07 15 00 47 53 12 00 48 11 17 00 48 22 18 00 49 14 12 00 50 13 16 00 51 05 10 00 55 09 15 00 55 27 06 00 03 10 02 00 03 16 03 00 02 50 19 00 03 00 16 00 02 52 03 00 02 56 02 00 02 56 02 00 03 05 10 00 02 57 14 00 03 11 09 00 04 03 02 00 04 17 16 00 04 17 16 00 04 23 05 00 04 12 06 00 04 25 11 2 3 3 3 4 3 1 2 2 4 1 1 2 1 1 3 1 1 2 While the Clip Search dia
14. e Provide names for Multi Switch values Finding a Fleximap All Fleximap files are stored in C Program Files Fairlight FMC Data FlexiMaps Those addressing the XYNERGI pad are in a subfolder called XYNERGI while those addressing Fader strips are in the root of the Fleximaps folder A Fleximap file is a text file with an extension fsm or FSM Fairlight XYNERGI Page 287 PLUG INS REWIRE AND EXTERNAL PROCESSING November 7 2014 Fleximap Format Fleximaps contain a number of sections Part of a Fleximap from an imaginary plug in called ANYPLUG_01 is shown below ff asa Header containing VST ANYPLUG_01 fsm plug in name and Shoe en ee re ee ee pre amble VERSION 1 BEGIN_XYNERGI FADERSET CONTROL XP_MAIN 3 0 00 1 00 LIN VST ANYPLUG_01 saturation saturation CONTROL XP_MAIN 5 0 00 1 00 LIN VST ANYPLUG_01 lo cut freq lo cut freq aa CONTROL XP_MAIN 6 0 00 1 00 LIN VST ANYPLUG_01 sat emph freq sat emph fre Pad controls CONTROL XP_MAIN 7 0 00 1 00 LIN VST ANYPLUG_01 opto memory opto memory Each CONTROL CONTROL XP_MAIN 8 0 00 1 00 LIN VST ANYPLUG_01 0utput output statement must CONTROL XP_SECONDARY 1 0 00 1 00 SWITCH VST ANYPLUG_01 bypass Bypass match the control CONTROL XP_SECONDARY 2 0 00 1 00 LIN VST ANYPLUG_01 dynamic sat Dyn Saturame which CONTROL XP_SECONDARY 3 0 00 1 00 SWITCH VST ANYPLUG OT air includes the plug in CONTROL XP_SECONDARY 4 0 00 1 00 LIN VST ANYPLUG_0O1 air level air lev name in the header CO
15. Aircraft carrier genera from T1 305 Aircraft carrier genera from T2305 Alarm car car alarm go fro T118 Alarm car car alarm go fro T218 Alarm car disarm car a fro T117 Alarm car disarm car a fro T217 Alarm car set car alar from T116 Ele Alarm car set car alar from T216 askd4car from track 1 in Sa askd4car askd4car from track 2 in SA askd4car Auto 91 old cutlass from T150 Auto 91 old cutlass from T151 Auto 91 old cutlass from T152 7 F 7 Auto 91 old cutlass from T153 k T1 54 is E Auto 91 old cutlass from Pi at Sate Tike is Auto 91 old cutlass from T156 Auto 91 old cutlass from T157 Auto 91 old cutlass from T158 Auto 91 old cutlass from T159 Auto 91 old cutlass from T1 60 Auto 91 old cutlass from T161 Auto 91 old cutlass from T250 Auto 91 old cutlass from T251 Auto 91 old cutlass from T252 Auto 91 old cutlass from T253 Auto 91 old cutlass from T254 Auto 91 old cutlass from T255 8 618 8 6 S 61 6 S1 6 81 a 8 E EBGa Auto 91 old cutlass from T256 ag Suto 91 old cutlass from T257 Auto 91 old cutlass from T258 Auto 91 old cutlass from T259 Auto 91 old cutlass from T260 Auto 91 old cutlass from T261 Auto crash
16. Cut Tail Works the same way as cut head but cuts the later part of the clip Range and Head When a range is active pressing the cut head key cuts the audio from the start of the range to the cursor This will not work if the cursor is not in the range Range and cut tail work similarly together Multiple Clips and Tracks When there is no range the target for editing is all the clips on selected tracks that are touching the cursor It s easy to tell which because they are always red Fairlight XYNERGI Page 115 EDITING November 7 2014 When there is a range the target is all the clips and parts of clips on selected tracks that are inside the range Again the target clips are always red An exception with a range you can use the mouse to deselect a clip To do this hold down the ctr1 key and click with the mouse The clip will turn blue showing that it is no longer selected You can also extend the selection using ctrl mouse click ona clip This will cause the range to expand so that it includes the newly selected clip and it will preserve the existing selection as well Pasting Pasting the clipboard use the Enter key means putting a copy of it at the current position on whatever tracks are selected You can paste the clipboard contents at any time not just after a cut operation and as often as you like If there are already clips at the place where you paste the clipboard is placed on top of
17. FL_ Recorded Audio 14_a2 1GC84Z6BC437Y way 766 KB WAY Audio i FL_ Recorded Audio 15_a3 1GC8426BC43YZ wav 766KB WAY Audio FL_ Recorded Audio 16_a4 1GC84Z6BC43Y_ wav 766 KB WAY Audio FL_ Recorded Audio 17_a5 1GC8426BC4320 wav 766 KB WAY Audio Ei FL_ Recorded Audio 18_a6 1GC8426BC4321 wav 766 KB WAY Audio SSeS 2 isk free space 101 GB 4 48 MB g My Computer Ls The Media folder looks like this The WAV files are named as follows Clip Name _ Track number _ GUID wav The Clip name is the automatic name given to the clip by the system Or you may have named the clip while recording it The Track number is the one on which the audio was first recorded The GUID is a system number discussed below GUIDs XYNERGI Broadcast WAV Files are named using GUIDs A GUID is a unique ID that makes it easy for the system to locate files in a database Since GUIDs are hard to read Fairlight has created the Fairlight Shell Extension for Windows Explorer The Fairlight Shell extension is installed by default and allows users to view hidden iXML metadata in the Fairlight Broadcast WAV Files The Project Name Clip Name and Frame Rate are embedded in each WAV file by XYNERGI during recording and can be viewed with the Fairlight Shell Extension Using the Fairlight Windows Explorer Shell Extension 1 Open Windows Explorer 2 Under the View menu select Details 3 Right click a column header eg Name and select More from the
18. JIB Bk The Library page is shown above with EQ selected The EQ presets are shown in the upper left section of the window Fairlight XYNERGI Page 244 MIXING November 7 2014 Presets Equaliser A library of 100 equaliser settings is provided Each equaliser preset stores all the parameter settings of the equaliser section on the signal path currently called to the Master fader Press the Eo soft key in the Library menu to select equaliser presets Dynamics A library of 100 dynamics settings is provided Each dynamics preset stores all the parameter settings of the dynamics section on the signal path currently called to the Master fader Press the DYN soft key in the Library menu to select dynamics presets Plug in A library of 100 Plug in settings is provided Each preset stores all the parameter settings of the Plug in section on the signal path currently called to the Master fader Press the Plug In soft key in the Library menu to select dynamics presets Channel A library of 100 channel settings is provided Each channel preset stores all the parameter settings on the signal path currently called to the Master fader excluding I O patching ALL Console A library of 100 Console settings is provided Each Console preset stores all mixer parameters for all feeds and buses All patching routing and name settings are also stored Default Console Template A special Console library file named defauit is us
19. Original aspect Ratio v Original Size v Use Two Monitors if Available Bumt in Timecode x1 BITC Transparent Avid OMF View Both Fields Small View Display Both Fields Field 1 Field 2 Either V Large View Display Both Fields Field 1 Field 2 Either Pyxis Pro PAL NTSC Jog 2 Fields Field 1 Field 2 Either Compensate for Blackmagic 2 47 NTSC Driver Bug E Display Video Underun Message Show Special Video Info Auto Fades microseconds I No Media Soft Edits 1500 V Media Offline Tape Mode 1500 Video Playback Advance Delay Compensation Frames Vga Video Window Py o Decklink Output The control allows you to advance or retard playback by a number of frames While in stop or Jog the correct frame is output but in play the offset is activated You can have a separate setting for your Decklink output and your VGA output since they are likely to feed different monitors Loading Video into Pyxis Track There are two methods for loading video into Pyxis Track In both cases the video track must be visible on screen Fairlight XYNERGI Page 314 Pyxis TRACK November 7 2014 Importing a Video File Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Click here to browse for the file you want to import Make sure that a Pyxis track is displayed If not see above Click File gt gt The following dialog box is displayed AVIVAVI_Bars_PAL_8 Bit avi m M JPEG A Quickt
20. Press slip clip Jog forward by about one second and press Enter The clip moves by the distance you jogged Jog some more and press Enter again You can keep doing this Fairlight XYNERGI Page 105 EDITING November 7 2014 This time press and hold slip clip Keep holding it down Jog forward then release This is a faster way of doing the same thing Press the Sync Point soft key Now when you Jog and press Enter the audio inside the clip is slipped Editing on Multiple Tracks Overview Most editing operations work on multiple tracks at the same time All the red clips or parts of clips are affected This guide will show you how to select tracks Get Ready Press the green Editor button Operation The picture keys display 12 tracks while the Editor Megamode is active Press a Track button to toggle it in and out of the Track Selection Use Bank Up and Bank Down to access blocks of 12 tracks To select just one track double press its button To select a range of Tracks hold one Track button down and double press another To slide the current track selection up and down hold the Track Up Down button and turn the Jog Wheel To move the current track selection to a specific starting track hold the Track Up Down button and type a number on the Numpad then release Track Up Down For a wider track selection press SEL Sel Operation In SEL mode the picture keys display 48 tracks Use Bank Up and Bank Down t
21. Single Mode In this mode the first Grabbed sound will be assigned to the Assign Root Key and subsequent Grabs will add sounds to the next highest white key This provides predictability of where Samples will appear on the keyboard The set the Assign Root key see Load Grab above Split Mode If Split is selected the keyboard will automatically be divided into equal splits based on the number of Samples in the Patch and the size of keyboard as defined by the Keyboard Left and Keyboard Right parameters in Setup General Preferences SDS As more Samples are added the split points will be updated automatically Each sample is played at its grabbed pitch in the center of its split This is normally its original pitch but it may have been grabbed at a different pitch by holding down a keyboard note while grabbing Layer Mode If the Mode is set to Layer each Sample will have the entire keyboard and will play simultaneously when a key is pressed AHDSR and Modulation Both a Patch and its Samples have AHDSR envelope and filter parameters The Samples use their own individual AHDSR envelope and filter and the Patch values are global offsets to all the Sample settings Modulation is Sample based with controls for Tremelo and Vibrato Patch and Sample Modes The Patch Sample soft key toggles between Patch and Sample parameter setting When Sample is selected Fairlight XYNERGI Page 335 SAMPLING November 7 2014 e Al
22. Step 4 Change the value for Soft Edits The current value for Soft edits is shown in the Audio Options group A value of 72 samples is generally useful when the Project sample rate is 48 kHz but you may set this according to your own taste Creating Smooth Level Changes By pasting a copy of a section of a clip onto itself you are able to change the level of the copy to create a level change If the copy is cross faded with the original a smooth level transition results When using the copy and paste functions be sure to be in stop otherwise a slight movement of the jogger wheel may result in phasing during the fades The same technique can be used to fade one clip EQ setting to another within the same piece of audio Fairlight XYNERGI Page 133 EDITING November 7 2014 In the above illustration the top layer plays the same audio as the bottom layer but may have different level or EQ settings During the fade in and fade out the settings will effectively crossfade Clip Level Each clip has a volume level that you can set This is a quick and easy alternative to fader automation for many situations To set the level of a clip Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Select a track and move a clip under the cursor Press the clip level button if not already on Press the clip Set soft key A dialog in Edit screen shows the current clip level Change it using the Jog whee1 not if the transport is in Jog mode o
23. The Frequency and Gain values can directly be chosen and changed with the mouse by dragging the red dots in the graph area There is no limit to the frequency Range for each band so you can have your low frequency higher than your high frequency if you want When you are using a Range it is possible to change one or more bands for the entire Range while leaving other bands as they were So for example the clips might have different settings for LOW EQ but the same setting for HIGH EQ Applying the Changes To apply your changes click the Apply button Only the bands whose Enable checkboxes are selected will be applied To escape without applying your changes click the Esc button New or Old Whilst adjusting an EQ parameter it is possible to toggle between the new and old settings using the New or Old radio buttons until you apply the changes In or Out Toggle the EQ on and off with the In and out radio buttons Copying an EQ The EQ parameters of a clip can be copied to another clip or Range of clips Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 5 Step 6 Locate the cursor over the source clip Click the copy button on the screen The enable checkboxes allow you to choose which of the bands are pasted into your target clip s Locate the cursor over the destination clip or define a Range of clips Click the App1y button Fairlight XYNERGI Page 163 EDITING November 7 2014 EQ In Out Use the EQ In out Soft key
24. Track Clip Colour Each track also has a colour given to new clips that are recorded or imported to that track To do this Step 1 Select tracks whose clip colour you want to change Step 2 Use the menu Tracks Set Track Clip Colour When you choose a new track clip colour all clips on the track that currently have its old colour are given its new colour Clips coloured differently from the old track clip colour are not affected this could happen if you coloured the clip individually see below or copied it from another track with a different clip colour Fairlight XYNERGI Page 38 CHANNELS November 7 2014 Track Height By default all tracks have the same height but you can change this ii Drag track border up and down to change height Flecorded Audio 2 To change a track s height drag the lower border up or down with the mouse Alternatively use the Xynergi controller as follows e Select the tracks whose heights you wish to change e Press or hold down the button e Press the or button to decrease or increase the heights of the selected tracks or e Press the or button to reset the heights of the selected tracks to normal Track heights are calculated so that when you change the height of one or more tracks the total number of displayed tracks remains the same So increasing some heights will change the normal height for that number of displayed tracks Similarly if you change the number of displ
25. e Buttons on the controller can be mapped to Post V5 0 functions Setup Install HUI device Your HUI device will come with its own installer cables and instructions Follow these and make sure the HUI device is working correctly INI File The file C Program Files Fairlight FMC FMC ini must contain the line HUI n Where nis the number of faders on the HUI device default 8 Just doing this will result in faders mutes pans solos and selects from your HUI device working correctly on the XYNERGI system That is to say they will act and will also tally the changes MIDI Devices For HUI to work the XYNERGI system must know which MIDI devices to expect These are written into the file HUISetup txt which is normally found here C Program Files Fairlight FMC Data Open the HUISetup txt file It already contains the necessary setup for three HUI devices a Roland Edirol interface a MOTU Microlite 4 port MIDI interface and a Tranzport controller this is for wireless control of basic functions only If you want to make life easy for yourself buy an Edirol or a MOTU Microlite and just enable it by removing the hashes in front of the lines in HUISetup The following procedure assumes you have some other kind of HUI controller Your task now is to find out the names of its MIDI ports and write them into the HUISetup file in the same way as the existing entries If this sounds too complicated get your Fairlight service provider to
26. e Click an Arm button on the XYNERGI Mixer Screen The same click and drag move can be used to arm or disarm multiple tracks but this time using horizontal dragging If the track has no input the system will display the error message No input patched to Track To fix this go to the Patch page as described above in Patching Inputs and give it an input Once a track is armed use the Play and Record keys to punch into record Play Stop REW FF or Jog to punch out Arm or Disarm All Tracks To arm all tracks press the All Tracks button in the Record Megamode Only tracks with patched inputs will be armed To disarm all tracks e Hold down ctri and press the arm button in the Record Megamode e Press the disarm a11 button in the Record Megamode Record Monitoring When a track is armed you can choose whether to listen to its input signal its playback signal REPRO a switched combination or nothing Overview Press the green Record Megamode button to access recording functions The Arm menu will be automatically selected Fairlight XYNERGI Page 81 RECORDING November 7 2014 To hear the effects of the monitoring changes you will need to have a track armed with an audible input connected to it If you wish to use the Oscillator as a source press the patch button then select the Oscillator at lower left Choose osc comms 2 for the oscillator or Noise for the noise generator Now select one or
27. nu B rote Bet Set ot est DB 14 59 29 gt Ctrl CID _SW_MACKIE_ DB 14 59 30 F1 gt 0 gt Error nm Sho DB 14 59 32 gt Ctrl _F1li gt 1 DB 14 59 32 gt Ctrl CID sw MACKIE gt 0 DB 14 59 33 gt Ctrl CID_SW_MACKIE_F2 gt 1 DB 14 59 33 gt Ctrl CID_SW_MACKIE_F2 gt 0 DB 14 59 34 gt Error from ShortMsg 5 Stopped F Ready Packets Tx 197 7 In the example shown the keys CID_SW_MACKIE_F1 and CID_SW_MACKIE_F2 have been pressed and released hence two events per key Fairlight XYNERGI Page 378 HUI SLAVE MODE November 7 2014 Advanced using Scripted Macros In XYNERGI a number of the HUI keys have been used to trigger scripted macros as follows CID_SW_MACKIE_BANK_DOWN decrement_fader_set ClID_SW_MACKIE_BANK_UP increment_fader_set CID_SW_MACKIE_CHANNEL_DOWN decrement4_fader_set jump by four fader sets ClD_SW_MACKIE_CHANNEL_UP increment4_fader_set jump by four fader sets ClD_SW_MACKIE_UP EQUAL less_tracks show fewer tracks on the edit screen ClD_SW_MACKIE_DOWN EQUAL more_tracks show more tracks on the edit screen If you wish to release one of the HUI keys for other functions you must edit the Events txt file in C Program Files Fairlight FMC Data Usen XYNERGI_ For example to liberate CID_SW_MACKIE_BANK_DOWN add a hash in front of the line CONTROL CID_SW_MACKIE_BANK_DOWN EQUAL 1 decrement_fader_set like this CONTROL CID_SW_MACKIE_BANK_DOWN EQ
28. 0o M 3 Ag ATS o w 3 fata ai oO A Lan aa aa aa aa om ow I om om basis oO a aa k 96 SFX 09 Teak 85 TaK 86 Tra Tra k 88 Mak 89 Track 90 Tra f 91 Trak 92 Tra TaK 94 Tak 95 Trai a 2 SFX 06 3 fa Ao i a y SpA a AKTMI om B2 2 B2 Be z B2 2 B2 B2 SFX 01 SFX 02 SFX 03 SFX 04 SFX 05 SFX 07 SFX 07 SFX 08 SFX 08 SFX 09 SFX 10 SFX 10 SFX 11 SFX 11 SFX 12 SFX 12 SFX 13 SFX 13 SFX 14 SFX 14 SFX 15 SFX 15 M SFX 30 E Bg SFX 16 SFX 16 SFX 17 SFX 17 SFX 18 SFX 19 SFX 20 SFX 21 SFX 22 SFX 23 SFX 24 SFX 25 SFX 25 SFX 26 SFX 26 SFX 27 SFX 27 SFX 28 SFX 28 SFX 29 SFX 29 SFX 30 3 M PO Select a destination bus at the bottom of the screen in the picture Sub 1 is selected Each path already assigned to that bus is highlighted tracks 88 to 90 are highlighted Each path shows the buses to which it is currently assigned all Aux Buses and Sub Buses can now be assigned to Main bus Ml M M M m SFX 17 SFX 18 SFX 19 SFX 20 SFX 21 M B1 MBL mi M M SFX 26 SFX 27 SFX 27 SFX 28 SFX 28 Sub E Click any path to toggle its assignment to the destination bus Fairlight XYNERGI Page 206 MIXING November 7 2014 To toggle multiple paths click and drag the mouse over them Use Page Up and Page Down to reach more paths Sub Buses are at the bottom of the second page They are grayed out unless Main is the selected destination Assigning Subs to Main this picture is
29. 12 MMC Remote slk r E 00 00 00 00 Editing with Machine Control All the transport controls and locating methods operate with a 9 pin remote machine online The following procedure is used to place new recordings or previously used clips to picture Press the M1 key to toggle the 9 pin machine on or off XYNERGI s transport will locate to the timecode from the 9 pin machine The system defaults to M1 controlling 9 pin Port A Placing Sound to Picture Step 1 With M1 online locate the video at the desired frame Step 2 Take M1 offline Step 3 Locate the transport so the cursor lies on the sync point of the clip Step 4 cuT or copy the clip to the clipboard Step 5 Place M1 online the transport will relocate to the video at the desired frame Step 6 Press lt Enter gt to paste the clip Fairlight XYNERGI Page 369 SYNC AND MACHINE CONTROL November 7 2014 Timecode Setup Introduction The Setup Menu is used to configure the Project s synchronisation setup Step 1 Press the Setup key or click View gt Smart Pane Sync Setup Step 2 The following dialog is displayed Sample Rate This value can only be set when creating a new project Frame Rate Can be changed at any time Normally it is best to choose the frame rate of the Master video device in your system or of the timecode being chased if any Changing frame rate is an undoable event so you can undo it in the usual ways Record Bit Dep
30. Cached Records an audio loop on the disk whose length you can control For example if you set the length to 10 minutes the recording always contains the last 10 minutes of source audio User Interface To control background recording open the Background Recorder using the following command Setup gt Background Recorder Background Recorder Options Destination Displays the holding tank folder where background recordings will be temporarily stored Click the button to browse to the folder you want to use Click the Reveai button to open the destination folder in Windows Explorer Cache Length Controls the amount of storage used when in Cached mode see above Armed Tracks Slider Fairlight XYNERGI Page 91 RECORDING November 7 2014 Choose the number of armed tracks you want to record in the background If you choose a number higher than the actual number of armed tracks the system will record the number of files shown in the Armed Tracks box The actual armed tracks will occupy as many of these recordings as they need and the other recordings will record zeroes but are ready for you to arm at any time whereupon their inputs will be switched into the recording tracks If you choose a number lower than the actual number of armed tracks the system will record the lowest numbered armed tracks You can change the number of tracks to be recorded while a recording is in progress To do this move the slider
31. External Monitor Display If you have a Decklink card installed it will feed an external monitor directly It is also possible to output to an external monitor directly from your PC graphics card To do this click Setup gt General Preferences gt Playhack Scrolers Metes 3DAW Audio Plugins Options Media Libraries Display Playback Projects Display Options ere Original aspect Ratio iretaced M Original Size V Bumt in Timecode xi v BITC Transparent V Avid OMF View Both Fields J Small View Display Both Fields Field 1 Field 2 Either V Large View Display Both Fields Field 1 Field 2 Either Pyxis Pro PAL NTSC Jog 2 Fields Field 1 Field 2 Either Display Video Underrun Message Video on second monitor F H oe 2 dentify Show Special Video Info Auto Fades microseconds Select Display Video on Second Monitor then choose which monitor to use Click Identify to see the monitor numbers in place not necessarily the same as Windows numbering Video Track Display Offset When using a monitor with an inbuilt display such as an LCD or plasma screen the picture may be one or two frames late at play speed You can adjust for this using the General Preferences dialog To do this click Setup gt General Preferences gt Playhack Fairlight XYNERGI Page 313 PYXIS TRACK November 7 2014 dh es Seals P
32. PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT November 7 2014 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Handles you can capture more audio than indicated by the EDL event This can be very useful for adding fades or capturing ambience around the event for use in smoothing Preroll sets the time that the source machine will run up to the recording Set this value to suit the type of source machine being used Typically tape based machines require at least 3 seconds to lock properly Postroll sets the time that the source machine will keep running after the recording Set up Patching Connect the source machine outputs to some of your POST V5 0 inputs and use the Patch I O page to patch them through to the recording tracks The Patch I O page is discussed in detail in Patching Signal Paths on Page 61 Set up Destination tracks for Conform The Destination tracks are those to which the audio will be copied to match the Rec Start time for the EDL events You need only specify the first destination track the software uses the following tracks to place audio for events requiring more tracks Click the Capture button The EDL Capture and Conform will now go ahead The software will request the first source reel to be loaded on to the source machine CT ST YD Please load reel ANIMAL_L Is this reel loaded It will then capture all the audio needed from that reel optimizing to reduce the amount of shuttle time The software will then request the next
33. Step 2 Step 3 Press the green Mon Megamode button Press the Format Setup button Select any of the formats shown on the soft keys The system immediately switches to that format Note choosing a format wider than your current Speaker Set has no effect You cannot fold up to a higher format Choose any other mode to leave the Format Setup menu Note Stereo and Mono compatibility are immediately available as toggles on the stereo Comp and Mono Comp switches unless the current speaker set already has this format Configure Monitor Sources Overview The standard source for monitoring is the MAIN system bus You can choose many other sources including other system buses or External Source Sets which are used for your CD player video machine etc External Sources come directly from physical inputs to the system The system remembers the last non standard source you chose and calls it the Alternative Source This can be toggled using ALT SOURCE in the Mon layout press Mon then ALT SOURCE This guide shows you how to choose an alternative monitor source and configure External Sources Step 1 Press the green Mon Megamode button Step 2 Press the Mon Setup button if it s not already lit Fairlight XYNERGI Page 300 MONITORING AND TALKBACK November 7 2014 Step 3 Step 4 System buses and existing defined External Sources can be chosen for immediate listening on the picture keys To define or red
34. The Aux Panel Track 21 jin Processing Order the Path Menu Overview The Path Menu allows you to change the order of the Equaliser Dynamics and Insert Point in any Track or Live Feed To use this Overview The Path Order Menu allows you to change the order of the Equaliser Dynamics and Insert Point in any Track or Live Feed To use this Step 1 Press the green Mixer button Step 2 Press the Path Copy button Step 3 Select the source path Step 4 Press one of the soft keys to set the processing order The FMC2 screen changes to show the order Fairlight XYNERGI Page 232 MIXING November 7 2014 Path Order I gt E gt D Path Order D gt E gt 1 Path Order D gt I gt E Path Copy Overview Path Copy allows you to copy all or part of the settings from one path to another It works by first copying the all the settings from a source path into a clipboard then pasting the desired parts into a destination path To use Path Copy Step 1 Press the green Mixer button Step 2 Press the Path Copy button Step 3 Select the source path Step 4 Press the copy soft key Step 5 Select the destination path Press one of the Paste soft keys Inserts Overview There are two types of inserts available in the NAME software The first is a physical insert where a signal exits a channel undergoes some external treatment then comes back into the same channel The second is a Plug in where
35. Uncompressed JDV25 MIpeq The following file types can be imported using this method Quicktime mov Avi avi Windows media format wmv Mpeg4 files mp4 Mpeg 1 or 2 mpg m2v mvf dv25 dv or dif Bitmap bmp or Cineon cin sequence of images in sequentially numbered files 1 frame per file Final Cut Pro XML project note that nested sequences are not imported jpeg also any Post V5 0 native files which are uncompressed vmu Fairlight XYNERGI Page 315 PYXIS TRACK November 7 2014 e dv25 dif e mjpeg vmj e lossless Huffman compression vmh Import by Drag and Drop A quick way to import video files is to use Drag and Drop as follows Step 1 Make sure that a Pyxis track is displayed If not see above Step 2 Open Windows Explorer or My Computer and find the video file you wish to import Step 3 Drag the video file from the Windows Explorer window and drop it on the video track in the XYNERGI Edit Screen The following file types can be imported using drag and drop e Quicktime mov any more than 2 accompanying audio tracks must be imported the system will prompt if this is necessary e Avi avi e Windows media format wmv e Mped 4 files mp4 e Mpeg 1 or 2 mpg m2v mvf e dv25 dv or dif e MXF mxf containing dv25 dv50 dv100 DVCPro HD or IMX mpeg compressed video e Omf video files omf containing mjpeg dv25 or uncompre
36. as follows Step 1 Open the DR2 Project Step 2 Open the folder in Windows Explorer that contains this project Open its Media folder Step 3 Identify the WAVs that are missing from the project These will normally be the most recent ones i e the ones with the latest modification date Step 4 Drag the missing WAV files from their folder to the POST V5 0 track display and drop them there Step 5 For each WAV file that you have dropped select it and notice the track number embedded in its name Place it on that track Step 6 For each WAV file select it by moving the transport until it is underneath the play head then issue the command Edit gt Resync to Record Time This will place the clip at the time where it was originally recorded Open Project Like Last One There is an option in the New Project dialog called Retain attributes of Existing Project If selected the new project is created using the last project as a template which means the new project retains the track count rates and the track names from the last project Waveform Profiles Post V5 0 stores waveform profiles for all the media in your projects allowing it to display full screen waveforms at any zoom range The waveform profiles are extracted and stored in the background during and after any recording or import function or whenever a piece of media does not have a profile If a number of clips have no profiles selected ones are given preference during calcu
37. audio before second Bend Point is retimed Tail of clip is not retimed but has been slipped later While the ClipBender sub menu is shown on the Pad the upper part of the Edit Screen displays a ClipBender Smart Pane Fairlight XYNERGI Page 175 TIME DOMAIN PROCESSING November 7 2014 You may display the ClipBender Smart Pane by clicking View gt Smart Pane gt Clip Bender Add Bend Auto Detect Remove Bend a lt lt Use the fields in this dialog to set a Pitch offset for the selected clip s This offset will be applied in real time along with the rest of the ClipBender parameters As different clips are selected this Smart Pane updates to show the current Pitch offset of the newly selected clip Auto Detect Auto Detect is a way of search automatically for transients in the selected clip To use it Press the Auto Detect Soft key Alternatively Click Process ClipBender gt Detect Audio Transients Auto detection of transients is not guaranteed to work for all audio but to increase accuracy you may adjust two settings Threshold and Sensitivity To access these settings e Press the Settings Soft key or e Click Process gt ClipBender gt Detection Settings Threshold the audio level at which the transient detector starts looking Audio below this level is ignored Sensitivity the energy level change in dB which marks a transient A value of 1 0dB for example means that if the signal energy increa
38. e Both types of track have the full complement of processing options namely native EQ Dynamics and Delay plus up to 6 VST plug ins and can feed into all the system buses COND Live Feed A signal path channel fed from a live real time signal that has been brought from a physical input and can be processed and routed to mix buses and monitoring Bus Destination of a mixing operation Feeds are usually routed to buses via a multiformat surround panner Buses may be configured with various multichannel formats such as stereo LCRS or 5 1 Multitrack buses provide bus paths for summing feeds to be recorded to disk or other I O Bus Element One component signal of a bus e g left right centre or surround Bus elements are automatically allocated to individual buses as they are created Each system has a finite number of bus elements which will limit the format of buses as they are created A full sized XYNERGI has 72 available bus elements allowing for example 1 X 5 1 main bus 4 x 5 1 sub buses 2 X 5 1 auxes 12 X stereo auxes and 3 multi track buses Anything Missing If you find there s some aspect of XYNERGI that is not explained or Xplained adequately please let us know You can email documentation fairlight com au With new releases of software you ll sometimes get a new version of this manual that adds more information You can also download the latest version from Fairlight s website www fairlightau com The Xp
39. hold down Shift and Ctrl while clicking then the clips will be ignored Note that you will also create a range if your dragging also has a horizontal component Ctrl clicking in the body of a track will add it to the existing selection this is useful for working with non contiguous ranges of tracks Shift Ctrl clicking also works and is useful in case the track has a clip where you want to Click Solo Mute and Arm On Tactile Controller Press the solo button in the Editor or Mixer Megamode to toggle solo on the current path Fairlight XYNERGI Page 45 CHANNELS November 7 2014 Hold down the button in the Editor or Mixer Megamode for a couple of seconds It will display 24 paths that you can choose while the button is held down then released to go back to your current menu While it is held down you can bank up and down to access other paths Release without choosing a path to display the Solo Menu with 48 signal paths that you can select after releasing Solo Press button in the Editor or Mixer Megamode to toggle the whole selection of soloed signal paths on and off The button does the same thing Press the button in the Editor or Mixer Megamode to toggle mute on the current path Hold down the button in the Editor or Mixer Megamode for a couple of seconds to display the Mute Menu with 48 signal paths that you can select after releasing Mute Press button in the Editor or Mixer Megamode to toggle the whole selection of
40. the tail or both Step 3 Set the Duration value using the Jogger Wheel press Stop if it is jogging the transport by typing numbers in the Numeric keypad or using the QWERTY keyboard Step 4 Press the Enter key to apply the fade duration s Trimming Fade Duration Fade durations can be trimmed from their current values This is particularly useful because it can be applied to a range of clips with one command Step 1 Press the trim dur soft key Turn off the shape soft key if you do not wish to apply the Smart Panel fade shape to the selected clips Step 2 Press the fade head fade tail or fade clip key This determines whether the duration you trim will apply to the head the tail or both Step 3 Set the Trim value using the Jog Wheel press Stop if it is jogging the transport by typing numbers in the Numeric keypad or using the QWERTY keyboard Trim values can be positive Fairlight XYNERGI Page 124 EDITING November 7 2014 or negative Note the Numeric Keypad must not be engaged for another purpose at the time check that its colour is dull yellow Step 4 Press the Enter key to apply the fade duration s NOTE Trim values can be positive or negative To type in a value like minus twelve frames you can use the Numeric Keypad type Minus then 12 or the other way round then press Enter Using the QWERTY keyboard you can use the Down Arrow to go from zero to 1 frame then type in a value to be used
41. then click the Apply button where Go and Stop usually are Record Source Main Bus Send You may select the Cached or Linear checkbox for Main Bus Send In either case the system will be ready to record the output of the Main Bus one recording stream for each element of that bus If you select Cached the last few minutes of audio will be continuously stored on disk controlled by the Cache Length slider If you select Linear the Main Bus output will be recorded continuously from the time you press Go until the time you press Stop Armed Tracks Harvest Clipboard Paste You may select the Cached or Linear checkbox for Armed Tracks In either case the system will be ready to record the inputs to a number of armed tracks as described under Armed Tracks Slider above one recording stream for each track This is used to get access to the material stored by the background recorder When you press Harvest the current contents of the destination holding tank are moved to the project s media folder The media folder is opened so you can see the new recordings From there you can drag them into the project or just leave them for later use If background recording was in progress when you clicked Harvest the current recording is terminated to allow its media to be moved and a new recording started immediately Note Harvest is NOT available when recording into MT files only DR2 files This is the same as Harvest excep
42. will now display the first of a list of plug ins that you have installed Step 4 Using the jog wheel scroll through the list of plug ins Step 5 When the desired plug in is displayed press the add soft key The plug in popup will now appear on the Editor display where the mouse can be used to change its parameters Step 6 Press the Plug ins button to toggle the plug in popup and fleximap on off Step 7 To remove the plug in press the Remove Plugin soft key on the LCD screen After some time the plug in will be loaded This may take a minute or so if the plug in is dongled Dream II v1 11 3 0 New Project8 lt 48 tracks gt 1 KBN BMD 4H z 3 Sao 2 22 b g ajaja kelele aaa Elele JE aa a Bgl Eleele Jel i gaa alfe lile z aa lelle LIe EE G E LE lelle aja Be ajaa oE ala ele oc ale a J e z a The plug in popup will now appear on the Editor display where the mouse can be used to change its parameters It will also appear on the XYNERGI Pad controls or Faders see Controlling Plug ins on the Surface page 284 Fairlight XYNERGI Page 280 PLUG INS REWIRE AND EXTERNAL PROCESSING November 7 2014 Removing a Plug in Step 1 Select the track Step 2 Press the Insert Config button in the Setup or Mixer Megamode Step 3 If there is more than one plug in and you need to select the right one press the Padlock button
43. 226 Processing Order the Path Menu 232 Path COPY aaa a A a a AE 233 NSE Sana aa aa aa aa 233 Direct OUtDUtS cceeeceeeeeeeceteeeeteeeeeneeees 234 Eal Ea PERE EE A AET E E ETE 235 Noise Generator cceccceeeeeeeeeseeeeeneeteeeeees 235 Using XE 6 Faders s in 235 TING LID Lary eeit eee R eE a EAE ESEESE 244 AUTOMATION nsssnsssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnna 247 Introduction ooo cece cece eeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeetteeeeeeeeeeee 247 Automation Basics 247 How to Use Automation 248 Enabling Mix Items cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 251 Mix ltem Status ceceeeceeesssseesesseneeees 253 TOUCH Write erreneren aeee ea ea ereina 257 Programmed Automation sseseeeeeeeeeeenen 258 Saving and Loading Mixes 0 eee 259 MIX UNA ss sscchstect aaa a a arnai 260 System Mix Save function ceeeees 261 The Mix Me Nnu c cccecssccecessseeeeeesseeeeeenaees 261 PrevieW misini saute aed lee eens 263 The Utils Menu cccceceeeesseeeeeestteeeeessaes 265 Automation with Link Groups 00e 265 MIXCEGILING soi cc ctieinete aezicdesctindeazeseentieceundela ee 265 Copy Project Segment ccceeeeeeees 266 Import Automation from Another Project 267 Automation On Screen 268 Automation Curves 268 Data Storage c cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeseeeeeneeeeaes 273 Mix THINNING eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeteeeeeeeeaeeeeneeees 273 Using the Pad to write Auto
44. Automation The Auto button puts a track in and out of Automation Record This is only available if Automation is switched on use the Mix On screen button or surface button The Mix On screen button The Graph button allows you to choose an Automation curve for each track out of Fader Mute and Pan Other choices are available in the Automation software see Automation chapter Fader automation chosen for graph display Mute automation chosen for graph display Pan automation chosen for graph display Zooming The track display represents a 24 hour continuous loop The timescale can be zoomed from a few samples across the screen to eight hours The Zoom number and screen width are shown at the bottom left of the screen To change zoom range Step 1 Hold down the zoom button Step 2 Turn the jogger wheel to zoom in and out Alternatively Step 1 Hold down the zoom button Step 2 Type a Number from 1 to 22 on the Numeric Keypad Alternatively Fairlight XYNERGI Page 47 CHANNELS November 7 2014 Step 1 Hold down the zoom button Step 2 Press the or key The Mouse wheel can also be used to zoom the display click on the Edit Screen first to put it in focus Float the mouse over the track display while turning the wheel Track display selection and zooming is possible whilst playing and recording Timescale display Timecode positions can be displayed in whole frames frames with subframes frames w
45. Display Active Theme Step 3 Choose one of the themes from the list The Solo and Evo themes are dark grey while the Classic theme is light grey blue and white It is possible to build your own theme If you wish to do this contact Fairlight in Australia Fairlight XYNERGI Page 11 SELECTION AND CALLING November 7 2014 Selection and Calling Selection Types There are four kinds of selection in the XYNERGI system Edit Selection One or more tracks When a track is selected for editing it becomes a target for editing commands like cut clip and fade head Mix Selection One or more Tracks Lives and or Buses collectively known as paths or channels When a path is selected for mixing it becomes a target for mixing automation commands like IN and OUT and is available for Touch Write Current Track One track only the last one that was selected for Editing It becomes the target for some special edit commands that can be performed on only one track Called Channel One path i e Track Live Bus Group or Monitors Also known as the Current Channel The Current Channel is the target of all signal processing commands like changes in panning and EQ It appears in the XYNERGI Pad and the ILP Channel layout if fitted How to Select Edit To select for editing do one of the following e Press a XYNERGI track button in the Editor Megamode e Click a track number in the Edit
46. Edit the contents of MIDI clips Setup A registry entry is required for MIDI commands to be visible Your Fairlight distributor should set this up for you when your licence is purchased The registry entry is as follows HKEY_CURRENT_USER Software FairlightAU Dream II Global Setup midiTracksEnabled Its value must be 1 You will need a MIDI controller keyboard or other and at least one MIDI instrument to play out These must be installed before starting Post V5 0 software File Compatibility IMPORTANT Project files containing MIDI tracks CANNOT BE LOADED by earlier software Project files created by v3 1 software that do not contain MIDI tracks can be loaded by earlier software If all MIDI tracks are converted back to audio tracks losing all MIDI data the project can be saved and then loaded into earlier software NOTE v3 0 software has a prototype version of MIDI tracks using the Add MIDI Track command in the Track Menu This is incompatible with the MIDI implementation in v3 1 and you are advised NOT TO USE IT Convert Tracks to MIDI Each non video track in the system is either audio or MIDI By default all tracks are audio You can convert from audio to MIDI or vice versa by selecting tracks in the Editor and issuing the command MIDI Convert to or From Midi Tracks If you select some audio and some MIDI tracks before issuing the command all the selected tracks will end up the same majority rules The aud
47. Fader Sets button Step 2 Press a button from 1 to 9 Step 3 While Fader Sets is latched you may choose any fader set by pressing a button from 1 to 9 Step 4 Press the Fader Sets button to unlatch it Mixer Set Mixer Set is an option that takes over some of your faders and automatically places selected channels on them As you select and de select channels they dynamically come and go from the faders This makes it very easy to mix a large number of channels with a small number of faders By default 12 faders are allocated to the Mixer Set but you can change this as explained below If you have more than 12 faders the remaining ones continue to display the contents of whichever Fader Set you have chosen So you can have some fixed allocations and some dynamic ones To turn Mixer Set on Fairlight XYNERGI Page 27 THE NUMPAD November 7 2014 Step 1 Hold down the Fader Sets button Step 2 Press the 0 button Step 3 Release the Fader Sets button The same thing in latched mode Step 1 Press the Fader Sets button Step 2 Press the 0 button Step 3 If desired press the Fader Sets button to unlatch it if you prefer you can keep the Fader Sets layout handy for more changes To choose the number of faders dedicated to Mixer Set do the following Step 1 Press the Fader Sets button Step 2 Hold down the 0 button for a couple of seconds The numbers 1 to 24 appear on the track keys The selected number corresponds to the num
48. Faders e Preset Library Busing Definitions Bus a mix destination where many channels are summed in desirable proportions Bus Format the number and order of outputs that a Bus addresses Typically the format matches that of a speaker set in the final listening environment Common format examples include Mono Stereo and 5 1 Newer 3D formats can also be addressed XYNERGI provides all the commonly used formats ready to go You can also create custom formats for special speaker sets and the NAME panning system will follow your instructions for distributing energy between the speakers XYNERGI can also be licensed to allow 3D formats In this case you would set speaker positions including a Down Up parameter for the third dimension and the system will display and enable a set of Down Up pan controls Bus Element one output from a Bus e g Left or Center Buses may have any number of elements up to 24 Note the XYNERGI Monitoring system has eight channels so buses with more than eight elements must be monitored using special control setups The system provides a fixed number of elements which depend on your operating licence and the system capability These elements are consumed by the buses according to their format e g a Stereo bus uses two elements while a 5 1 bus uses 6 Bus Types XYNERGI supports four types of buses MAIN The main mixing destination for the system often used to create the final prod
49. It s usually necessary to set a preroll for recording This allows the recording artist to get ready for the start Postroll is useful for hearing how the new recording fits into the track Set preroll and postroll using the appropriate fields in the ADR List Rehearsing a cue You may rehearse cues before recording them Is this needed in a system where all recording is non destructive Your call Step 1 Click the Rehearse button or press the REHEARSE soft key This puts the ADR system in Rehearse mode Step 2 Select a cue The transport will locate to its In Time Step 3 Click cycle or press the cycle soft key This will cause the transport to drive through the In and Out points once switching the track from repro to input simulating the record experience Click the stop button at any time to stop the take or use the Stop button in the transport controls Note When the ADR is in Rehearse mode double clicking a cue will select it and initiate a rehearsal Cycle Recording a cue Step 1 Click the Rec Playback button or press the RECORD PLAYBACK soft key until its label is RECORD This puts the ADR system in Record mode Step 2 Select a cue The transport will locate to its In Time Step 3 Click cycle This will cause the transport to drive through the In and Out points recording a take then cycle through again for playback Click the stop button at any time to stop the take or use the Stop button in the transport co
50. Lock detect Freq Insert Bypass soft eo lt Opens Plug in M release Control Box expansion Plug in Name Close Channel Name Clicking the close button makes the Plug in window disappear but does not unload it You will continue to hear its effect After closing the plug in window it can be restored to the screen by pressing another Pad Mode button Path EQ Dyn or Aux and then pressing the Plug in button again or by double clicking that plug in name in the XYNERGI Mixer Screen screen Lock Clicking the Lock icon prevents that window from disappearing it will continue to display that Plug in for that channel regardless of other selections you make until you unlock it then close or delete it Insert Bypass By default Plug ins are inserted in the channel where you instantiated load them By clicking the Insert Bypass icon you can bypass a specific plug in Note that other plug ins in the channel will remain inserted To bypass all plug ins use the channel Insert control which can be found in the Mixer Screen Plug in Control Box If more than one plug in is inserted into a channel you can change the order in which they process the audio To do this click the Plug in Control Box icon The following window is displayed Fairlight XYNERGI Page 282 PLUG INS REWIRE AND EXTERNAL PROCESSING November 7 2014 e Track 1 Insert x Insert Bypass p oe p oT Close Use the m
51. Pad gives a visual representation of the pan position and divergence A complex example is shown below Panning of 6 way Link Group showing Rotation and Divergence Basic Panning Use the L R and F B controls for basic panning If the Main Bus format does not have surround channels the F B control will still be shown but will do nothing Spread Only available when a link group is selected The spread control adjusts the perceived size of a surround mix Diverge Spreads the signal of an individual feed across more of the adjacent loudspeakers making the perceived size of the sound source larger Rotate Rotate controls the left right and front back pan control to rotate the surround mix around the centre of the room Boom Sending level to the Boom channel can be done pre or post fader Fairlight XYNERGI Page 223 MIXING November 7 2014 Equalisation Lo Pass Filter or Low Shelf Hi Shelf Parametric EQ bandpass Lo Shelf Hi Pass Filter or High Shelf EQ Type Gain Compensation EQ IN OUT The channel mixer provides four bands of parametric equalization and two filters Each parametric section can be switched in or out independently The Hi and Lo Pass filter sections can be switched to shelves using the mouse wheel The parametric bands can be switched between Bell Lo Shelf Hi Shelf and notch using the mouse wheel Their frequency ranges can also be switched between Low Low mid Hig
52. Pane above the Edit Screen This comes on automatically when you enter the clip eq menu In Clip EQ only one track is active Even if many tracks are selected only the most recently selected will be affected This track has a blue label in the Edit Screen Clip EQ does not use a range Get Ready Press the green Editor button Operation Press the clip eq button Locate the transport so that the cursor crosses the middle of at least one clip Identify the track containing that clip and double press its button to make it the only selected track If necessary use the Bank key The target clip should now be the only red clip on the screen Red means ready to edit Press the Edit EQ soft key At the top of the Edit Screen the value grid shows the EQ parameters of the red clip Range Filter Type Frequency Gain Q Factor Enables Press a number in the Numeric Keypad to access the same position in the value grid Now use the Jog Wheel to change it You can hear the changes by playing over the clip Hint while over the clip hold down BLUE and press the loop clip button When all parameters are set press the apply soft key or Enter If you want to escape without changing the Clip EQ settings press Edit again Clip EQ is explored in much more detail later in this chapter Razor Cuts Overview Normal non razor editing targets red clips but does not affect other clips This works well for video based editing where the sou
53. Tempo Expressed as beats per minute The box on the right allows you to choose the beat value used in specifying the tempo In some cases you may wish to specify beats differently from the time signature Time This is the time signature expressed in the usual way Origin Time This is the timecode where the first bar starts To set it locate to the timecode of the first bar and click the button labeled Set 1 1 1 You may move the transport earlier than the first bar which is negative bar territory Note there is no zero bar the number goes from 1 straight to 1 Snap Snap editing is used when dragging clips with the mouse You may set the snap points to any musical interval in the bar To switch snapping on click Edit gt Snap Editing Note that several types of snap may operate at the same time e g clip and beat This can lead to conflicts if two snap points are in close proximity BPM from Range The system will calculate accurate tempos based on fitting to a range To do this mark the In and Out points of the range using the From and To keys Now enter the number of bars that should fit in the range and click the button labelled BPM from Range Scrollers Audio Scrollers give you an optional close up waveform view of one or two tracks that can be useful for editing or mixing Fairlight XYNERGI Page 49 CHANNELS November 7 2014 one die mao k lt an o Ae F i a a O D e p e de
54. The From and To keys can be used to set t he In and Out points for automation punch In and Out points which are displayed at the left of the Pad The available mix memory is displayed in percent The current mix name is displayed at the right of the Pad Target Controls whether editing targets automation data When set to audio all clip editing functions affect only the audio When set to both clip editing functions like copy paste nudge and slip will affect the automation data as well as the audio clips See Automation follows editing later in this chapter Copy Mix Copies mix data in the range from the selected channels into a clipboard See details below Paste Mix Pastes the copied mix data from the clipboard to the selected channels See details below On STOP Determines what data is written after leaving automation record by pressing the stop key or pressing Mix ON Hold erases all events from the current position to the end of the project Return returns to the previously recorded value at the current location Event holds the current value until the next event is encountered Touch Auto Enable ON When a Touch mode is engaged SNAP or LATCH any enabled parameters that are touched are automatically put into Write or Trim It is not necessary to first enable the feed or Fairlight XYNERGI Page 261 AUTOMATION November 7 2014 Join Jog Mix bus oFF When a Touch mode is engaged SNAP or LATCH only
55. Tracks To use the second video track the system must be started with the 3D option To do this edit the shortcut used to start the system If you are using a desktop icon to start the system add the phrase 3D to the target field it will then look something like this C Program Files Fairlight Dream II Dream II exe 3D If you are using the XYNERGI X button to start the system you need to edit the file C Program Files Fairlight XYNERGI Layouts Dream II layout txt The first line should become APPLICATION app Fairlight Dream II Dream Il exe 3D If you are using a Decklink card you will also need to add the PRO2 to the startup string Hiding and Showing the Video Track To hide or show the video track on the Edit Screen Press Pyxis Track in the Setup Megamode Alternatively use the menu commands View gt Show Pyxis Track Show and Fairlight XYNERGI Page 312 PYXIS TRACK November 7 2014 View gt Show Pyxis Track Hide When shown the Video Track appears at the top of the track display It is not counted when choosing how many tracks to display There are two options for its appearance e t may be permanently placed above the audio tracks regardless of which numbered tracks are displayed To select this option select view Show Pyxis Track Lock e t may be placed above the audio tracks only when Track 1 is displayed To select this option deselect view gt Show Pyxis Track Lock
56. Trim key if not already on Step 3 Press the Head key and hold it down the head is extended to show the full extent of the original recording Step 4 Jog or play the transport you can listen to the audio and choose the right position Step 5 Release the Head key the head is placed at your current position Limit to Trim When extending a clip the end of the recorded audio will be reached eventually After that it is not possible to extend the clip further Tail Same as Head but the later part of the clip is trimmed Clip Trim clip changes both ends of the clip at once Its purpose is to preserve the length of the clip but access an earlier part of the recorded audio Not commonly used Range Ranges cannot be used with Trim Multiple Tracks Works as expected All the red clips will be trimmed to the same timecode point Soft Keys in Trim Mode Pressing the sync point soft key creates a sync marker within the selected clip s at the cursor position This is shown as a yellow mark in the clip and can be used to visually locate an important moment To change the sync point press sync point at the new location There is only one sync point per clip sync point Trim Edit Options Trim is usually applied to a single clip or selections across tracks range is not supported in Trim Mode all layers is not supported in Trim Mode razor s not supported in Trim Mode Slip slip mode moves clips to a new
57. XYNERGI OVERVIEW November 7 2014 e Formats Mono Stereo LCR 2 1 LCRS LCRSS 5 1 5 1 SMPTE 7 1 Custom e Compressor and Limiter e nsert e Direct Out e Master Fader and Mute Aux Buses e 12x Aux Buses e Formats Mono Stereo LCR 2 1 LCRS LCRSS 5 1 5 1 SMPTE 7 1 Custom e Compressor and Limiter e Insert e Direct Out e Master Fader and Mute e Compressor and Limiter e Insert e Master Fader and Mute Multi Track Buses e 24x Multi Track Buses e Mono Format e Master Fader and Mute Groups e 32x Group Masters also known as VCAs after Voltage Controller Amplifiers from earlier analog consoles VST Plug ins e Up to 6 instantiations per channel e Total of 96 channels Hardware Components XYNERGI is made up of five interconnected hardware devices e PC containing CC 1 or CC 2 Engine which must run the 32 bit or 64 bit version of Windows 7 respectively e Audio Interface and Sync box SX 8 SX 12 or SX 20 SX 36 e XYNERGI console with Mouse e Recorder Editor Video Monitor e Optional Mixer Video Monitor Plus additional optional components Fairlight XYNERGI Page 7 XYNERGI OVERVIEW November 7 2014 e Extra audio I O boxes SX 48s loaded with analog and or digital I Os e MADI interface cards Graphics Recorder Editor Display Features The graphical display provides status information clip and waveform display and visual feedback for editing functions A number of optional w
58. Zoom Toggles follow zoom on and off When on the gear ratio of the jog wheel is affected by the zoom setting this is the default mode Loop On Toggles the loop on and off Loop Width sets the size of the loop in milliseconds About 40 ms seems best for most things but occasionally very long loops are good for setting clip EQ or fade values Align sets the position of the loop in relation to the cursor The most common setting is pre where the loop comes up to the cursor from before it but the other values can also be useful Gear this setting affects how fast the Jog Wheel needs to be turned to achieve a particular transport speed Dim Loop Jogging is very useful but it sounds quite harsh Turning on Dim causes a drop in level whenever Loop Jog is activated Recommended Fairlight XYNERGI Page 68 TRANSPORT November 7 2014 if monitoring at high volume Mouse Jogging The mouse can also be used to move the transport Simply right click anywhere and drag horizontally to move the transport Audio is heard while this takes place IF the transport is in Jog Mode i e Jog has been pressed Shuttle To shuttle the transport hold down the BLUE key and press Jog The jogger wheel will then increase and decrease the transport velocity in forward and reverse Press the FF or REW keys to reverse the shuttle direction To shuttle at normal speed press PLAY then hold down the
59. above you can display any number and selection of tracks including discontiguous numbers There are three User Sets labelled U1 U2 and U3 which can be set and recalled at any time To create a User Set Step 1 Hold down the BLUE key Step 2 Press the 3 6 or 9 key and hold it down Step 3 Select the tracks that you want in this set Deselect tracks that you do not want in this set Step 4 Release the 3 6 or 9 key To access a User Set Step 1 Hold down the BLUE key Step 2 Press and release the 3 6 or 9 key To return to a contiguous track set simply select a normal view Notes e When auser set is displayed the last selected track may not appear on screen e Tracks that are not present in your user selection are automatically deselected and cannot be selected or edited until they are displayed again e User selections as associated with the 3 6 or 9 key are saved with the project Fairlight XYNERGI Page 35 CHANNELS November 7 2014 Automatic View of Selected Tracks Edit Set Choosing Edit Set causes the Edit Screen to display only selected tracks and this updates dynamically as you select and deselect them To turn on Edit Set Select the Editor Megamode Press the Edit set button To exit Edit Set you may do the following e Press the Edit Set button again This will leave the selection as it was but it will no longer update dynamically This can be useful for displaying a mixture of tracks you
60. an existing Bend Point Step 1 Locate to the Bend Point using the sump Keys Bend points must be selected as a J ump Target To do this click Hold down either of the sump keys and select Bend Points from the Pad or Click Edit Settings gt Jump To gt Bend Points Step 2 Press the Move Soft key Step 3 Jog to the left or right to the new desired position for the Bend Point Alternatively Step 1 Locate to the Bend Point using the Arrow keys Bend points must be selected as a J ump Target To do this click Edit Settings gt Jump To gt Bend Points Step 2 Hold down the ct ri key and drag the point to the right or left Note If some time compression has already been set up around the Bend Point you are moving the time will be changed and you will see the waveform distorting Compress Expand Time Arround Bend Points There are two ways to compress the time around a bend point called offset and warp To do this Step 1 Step 2 Step 2A Step 3 Step 4 Locate to the Bend Point using the sump Keys Bend points must be selected as a J ump Target To do this click Hold down either of the sump keys and select Bend Points from the Pad or Click Edit Settings gt Jump To gt Bend Points Press the offset Soft key to Offset the selected Bend Point or Press the warp Soft key to Warp the selected Bend Point Jog to the left or right to the new desired position for the Bend Point Press ENTER or repress the same soft key
61. an offset to the values already recorded for that mix item For example in trim mode increasing a fader level by 10dB will add 10dB to the previously recorded fader levels retaining all the relative changes in the previously recorded data In Trim mode the control continues to move as it follows the previously recorded data As soon as the control is touched it becomes stationary and any changes made to the control s position are written as Fairlight XYNERGI Page 253 AUTOMATION November 7 2014 offsets to the underlying data If the control is touched but not moved no changes are made If the control is moved then released when not in Touch Snap the system continues to playback the original moves at the offset or trimmed level If the system is in Touch Snap the system drops back into Read Isolate When mix items are Isolated the user can manually control them and the automation system does not affect them The controls have no illumination All mix items are effectively isolated until data is written for them When you turn Mix On to the off position all mix items are isolated To isolate Signal paths Step 1 Press the Iso button Step 2 Choose signal paths for isolation Note that all parameters on the isolated signal paths become isolated There is no way to pick specific parameters for isolation Preview Preview is a combination of isolation and enablement The mix items that are in preview are not controlled
62. any format selectable sources amongst any system bus and up to 16 external sources and fold up fold down facilities to manage any combination of the above Set Monitor Levels Mute and Dim Control Room and Studio level pots are available at the upper right of the Xynergi Center Section together with Mute buttons and a Dim button for the Control Room Monitors To set the amount of Dim Step 1 Hold down the Dim button The current Dim amount is shown in the Pad Step 2 Turn the Jog Wheel The Dim amount changes and you can hear the result Step 3 Release the Dim button In the Solo theme Control Room Level Mute and Dim controls are available in the upper right corner of the screen Mute h ia I lt Level Fixed Level For some applications the Control Room monitors must be set to a fixed level and afterwards not respond to monitor pots To toggle Fixed level monitoring Step 1 Hold down the BLUE key Step 2 Press the Dim button Step 3 To change the Fixed level hold down BLUE and Dim and turn the Jog whee1 The current fixed level is shown in the Pad Fairlight XYNERGI Page 297 MONITORING AND TALKBACK November 7 2014 Mute Individual Speakers Use the speaker icons to mute individual speakers By pressing the mode button you can toggle to solo mode This allows you to solo the speakers instead of muting them Toggle Main and ALT Speakers The system allows you to define many speaker sets T
63. apply default pans If you do this the number of members determines the format of the link group If default pans are selected each member of the group is panned to one element of the system bus that has the same number of elements Normally the factory bus formats are used and this works out as follows If 2 Feeds are linked they are panned L R If 3 Feeds are linked they are panned LC R If 4 Feeds are linked they are panned LC RS If 5 Feeds are linked they are panned LC RLS RS If 6 Feeds are linked they are panned LC RLS RS B If 7 Feeds are linked they are panned LC RLS CS RS B If 8 Feeds are linked they are panned L LC CRC RLS RS B It can happen however that more than one Bus Format has the same number of elements A common example is Dolby 5 1 and SMPTE 5 1 which are both useful in different contexts In this case a soft key in the Pad will allow you to make the choice See Creating a Link Group below for details Fairlight XYNERGI Page 190 GROUPING November 7 2014 Normally each member is panned hard to one Bus Element position spread is set to maximum divergence is set to minimum and rotation is set to zero This fixed pan configuration is optionally chosen when the Link Group is created and cannot be changed afterwards If fixed panning is chosen and the link group format contains a Boom channel the assignment of the corresponding member is achieved by Stem Assignment to the Boom element only of the de
64. at the current Click here to enter the Range Himecode position numengoe numencaly Sets the Range Out point at the current Click here to enter the Range nmEcode posiign Out timecode numerically Toggles the range on and off The Range panel in the upper left of the Edit Screen can be used to set precise range in and out points Move the transport to a time where you want the Range In point to be then click the From button or keyboard shortcut Move the transport to a time where you want the Range Out point to be then click the To button or keyboard shortcut t Click the Range button to toggle the range on and off or keyboard shortcut x Selecting Clips not Clips cannot be selected as such with the mouse They can be edited using their 7 points as described below included in a range with other clips or dragged to different places But selection is always and only determined by clips touching the playhead or by inclusion in the Range At this time they are shown in red and are targeted by commands from menus and from the keyboard Moving Clips Clips can be dragged horizontally and vertically with the mouse This changes the clip timecode and track respectively When there is no range simply click and drag any single clip to another time or track When there is a range click on any selected red clip or part of a clip and drag it all other red clips will also be dragged along with the one you
65. basic editing e Audio Tracks include record and playback capability plus full editing and mixing e MIDI Tracks can record and edit MIDI parts e Live Feeds bring audio straight from an input to the mix with full processing e Buses the destination for mixing Include Main Sub Buses and Aux Buses e Group Masters also known as VCAs Systems equipped with CC 2 have slightly different channel distinction They provide Full Tracks and Playback Tracks Full Tracks can be set up as Audio Tracks or as Live Feeds both mentioned above Playback Tracks have different capabilities as follows e It can play back audio files created in the Fairlight system or imported from any of the accessible file formats e It contributes to mixes in exactly the same way as an Audio Track or Live Feed with the same processing capability native EQ and Dynamics plus VST plug ins e It is not able to record or take a physical input It cannot have insert sends and returns that exit the physical system nor Direct Outputs Video and MIDI tracks are described in their own chapters This chapter describes the behaviour of Audio Tracks Set Number of Tracks in Project The number of tracks refers to both Audio and MIDI tracks For a New Project When a project is created you can specify the number of tracks To do this e Click the File New command in the menu above the Edit screen or e Press the New Proj soft key
66. be or shows its current status To find out what any soft key will do at a particular time hold down the xp1ain button while pressing the soft key Fairlight XYNERGI Page 23 THE XYNERGI TACTILE CONTROLLER November 7 2014 Megamodes Overview A megamode is a complete layout of the Xynergi picture keys There are six megamodes triggered by the green keys at the bottom of the controller mute B A solo mi Pro setup mon menu md Here is a quick outline of the Megamodes Editor This is the main platform for audio editing It contains a number of modes the most useful of which are Cut Copy Erase Trim and Fade While any of these modes are active three action keys at the left of the Jog Wheel give you the main commands needed e g cut tail trim head erase clip For details of the main editing commands see How To Editing For details of the other modes and button hold down the xp1ain key and press the button for which you would like some Xplanation Mixer This is the main platform for audio mixing and automation Automation comes alive when the Mix On button is pressed This enables all the automation modes and commands to be displayed and used For details of the main mixing commands see How To Mixing For details of the automation system see How To Automation For details of the other modes and button hold down the xp1ain key and press the button for which you would like some Xplanat
67. car approac fr T183 Auto crash car approac fr T283 Auto crash car off ram fi T1 86 Auto crash car off ram T286 n 6 Auto crash car skid an fi T1 169 n Auto crash car skid an fro T1170 a el Auto crash car skid an fro T2169 Auto crash car skid an fi T2170 Auto crash car smashes fr T1171 m Auto crash car smashes fr T2171 E Auto crash crash into fro T179 a Auto crash crash into fro T181 5 a 5 Auto crash crash into fro T182 Auto crash crash into fro T279 s in E Auto crash crash into fro T281 s I Auto crash crash into fro T282 L n w O a TT te u 3 ee 7 Auto crash head on col fro T1 84 Auto crash head on col fro T284 B o I des Aun crash head on enl frn 12 RB al a Step 1 After searching the database a list of matching clips is displayed Ensure the transport is in stop then use the Jog Wheel or the and buttons to highlight the clip you want Holding down the shift button allows you to scroll faster Step 2 Press the preview soft key or click the preview button While Preview is lit the highlighted WAV file in the list will loop repeatedly emerging directly in the Monitor output not connected to any track or bus You can use the Jog wheel or the and keys in the numpad to move the highlight up and down the list Each time you highlight a new clip it starts to prev
68. carry a track number with them Checking this option for a particular file type causes it to be placed on that track no matter where you drag it with the mouse Importing Multiple Sound Files If you select multiple files in the Windows Explorer or My Computer dialog you can drag and drop them all to the timeline By default the files will be placed head to tail along the track where you drag them If you hold down the ct ri key while dragging the files they will be placed on successive tracks at the same timecode point Individual Localisation Individual clips can be localised as follows Step 1 Select a range of clips on one or more tracks Step 2 Hold down the BLUE key and press ENTER Automatic Localisation There is an option for media to be localised as it is imported To set this option click Setup gt General Preferences Options gt Automatically localise audio on import Sample Rate Conversion Sometimes the files you import are at a different sample rate than the project When this happens Post V5 0 automatically turns on real time sample rate conversion to ensure the audio has the same pitch and duration as the original Clips subject to sample rate conversion are marked with a black sr label The quality of sample rate conversion may be varied using the dialog setup gt General Preferences gt General Fairlight XYNERGI Page 354 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT November 7 2014 Fast m Live Samp
69. change by pressing its macro trigger button Step 3 Press the group soft key a number of times Each time you press this soft key the macro background changes After ten key presses it returns to its original colour Keep pressing the soft key until you are happy with the colour There is no need to press Enter Fairlight XYNERGI Page 169 EDITING November 7 2014 Editing Macros Editing macros is definitely for technically minded people Macros are stored in a file called macros txt It is found in C Program Files Fairlight FMC Data User username where username is your login user name This assumes that you have used the default C Program Files Fairlight as your installation folder It is beyond the scope of this manual to explain in detail what all the items in this file mean If you are technically minded it is not too hard to figure out Here are a couple of clues CONTROL 16 CID_SW_CUT 1 CONTROL 16 CID_SW_CUT 0 These two items are keystrokes The one ending in 1 is the downstroke The one ending in 0 is the upstroke CONTROL 687 CID_SW_MFX4_61 1 CONTROL 16 CID_SW_MFX4_61 4 This occurs when you hold a keystroke down for a couple of seconds this might be needed to operate momentary menus for example The 1 is the downstroke and the 4 is the hold of the key Sooner or later you ll see something like CONTROL 687 CID_SW_MFX4_61 0 meaning you ve released the key As for deciphering which keys ar
70. clicked To constrain movement to only vertical or only horizontal press the Shift button after clicking with the mouse but before moving the clips Fairlight XYNERGI Page 152 EDITING November 7 2014 7 Point Editing Each clip can display 7 points that can be moved with the mouse The points are displayed when the mouse hovers over the clip Fade Out point Fade In point Fade Out Curve point Fade In Curve point Trim Tail wee point Trim Head point Clip Level point Trim Points The Trim Head and Trim Tail points can be dragged horizontally to expose or hide more of the recorded media for the clip When you first click a Trim point the clip expands to its maximum possible extent in that direction i e shows all the media at that end of the original recording After you drag the mouse to the point you want and release it the clip is trimmed to that position Fade Points Dragging a Fade In or Fade Out point horizontally lengthens or shortens the fade at that end of the clip Fade Curve Points The Fade In Curve Point and the Fade Out Curve Point can be dragged vertically to change the X Level of the fade and horizontally to change the X Point of the fade Clip Level Point The Clip Level point can be dragged vertically to change the playback level of the clip The waveform of the clip will change to reflect this new level Double Clicks e Double click on Trim point extend to maximum e Doub
71. clip Second clip Varying X point moves the Crossover earlier or later in the fade shown for clarity in a crossfade Duration the total length of the fade in frames Duration is not really part of the shape but its control is close by Example Percentage 30 Attenuation 3 dB Duration 20 This means that the fade will last for 20 frames The crossover point will be 6 frames into the fade at which time the level will be 3 dB compared with full Level Setting Fade Curve Parameters Use the x Level or x Point soft key to move focus into the corresponding field in the Smart Pane Use the Jog Wheel or Numeric Keypad to set values Press Enter to accept those values or Fade Hade Fade Tail to create a new fade using those values You can also use the Mouse click on the red dot in the Fade Curve and drag it up down to change X Level or left right to change X Point Drag red point to change X Level and X point 00 00 01 00 Quick Fade To create a Fade and set its curve quickly do the following Locate to the point where you want your Fade In to end Hold down rade Head Turn the Jog Whee1 until the Curve in the Smart Pane looks right Release Fade Head This method is not precise but it s very fast Fairlight XYNERGI Page 108 EDITING November 7 2014 Clip EQ Overview The clip eq menu allows you to add a four band equaliser to every clip The display of clip eq is shown in the Clip EQ Smart
72. control The graphical control for the plug in can be placed in the Pad area by pressing the Plug in button a second time Specific parts can be enlarged by making a marquee with the mouse hold down Zoom and click and drag a rectangle over the graphic display in the Edit Window See Graphical Display below for details Control Types Both normal and ALT controls have three types e Linear Turning the pot increases the value of the parameter being controlled Normal controls display a line which gives an idea of the parameter value ALT controls do not display this line To see the current value of the parameter look at the graphic display of the plug in e Toggle A Toggle is a switch with two positions Normal toggle controls are rotated to switch between the two positions The gearing is set high so that only a small rotation is required ALT toggle controls can be switched by simply touching them with the ALT button held down Turning the control also works Toggles can be labelled to show the two values of the parameters they affect e g On Off In Out Pre Post etc With many plug ins these values have been preset at the factory To change these or set your own values see Plug in Editor below e Multi Switch Many parameters have multiple specific values For example the release for a compressor may be given as fast medium slow instead of having a value in milliseconds In this case the appropriate control is a 3
73. displayed on the Pyxis track Fairlight XYNERGI Page 352 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT November 7 2014 Pyxis Projects these are projects created using the program Pyxis OMF Files these are files from other manufacturers ML Files these are files from older Fairlight products AES 31 Files these are files from other manufacturers AAF Files these are files from other manufacturers MXF Files these are files from other manufacturers Importing Video Files See Pyxis Track on page 311 Importing an OMF Step 1 Click on File then choose import OMF Step 2 Browse to the location of the omf and select it Press OK Step 3 The following dialog box is displayed e ee 00 00 00 00 9 z 2or00 00 00 a jo e Import Media Preview Media references the audio files from the omf this may cause slowdowns on large projects Note If the project is an MT project stuffing the fuffs will render all audio to the current project If the project is a DR2 project using the Localise command will place all the audio in a folder inside the project folder This brings all the audio used by the project into one place so that it can be easily backed up or copied Fully Import Media automatically places the audio from the omf in either your FUF or Media folder inside the folder of the current project Clip Naming Standard derives the names of clips from the omf Master Clip withi
74. distorted to save space Stem Assign Overview Sometimes it s necessary to assign a signal path to only part of a bus In a 5 1 mix for example you want to pan some effects left and right but avoid the center to keep the dialog clear To achieve this you unassign these effects from the Center Element of the bus This guide will show you how to unassign paths from selected elements of a Bus Note you must assign the paths to the Bus before using Stem Assign To use Stem Assign Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Press the green Setup button Press the Stem Assign button Select the destination bus Select some Tracks Or Live Feeds that are already assigned to that bus The speaker icons below represent the Bus Elements Press a speaker and it gets a red cross That element is no longer assigned Use Bank and Tracks Of Lives to reach more paths Note if the red crosses won t go away when you select your bus and your paths they are probably not assigned Press Exit to finish Fairlight XYNERGI Page 207 MIXING November 7 2014 Bus Params Overview Bus Params allows you to toggle pre post for a number of paths at the same time For Aux Buses pre means that the aux send goes before the channel fader send and before the channel mute button Post means the opposite For Reduction Buses pre means the send to the reduction bus is completely independent of the Main bus while post mean
75. dynamic information in between These neutral events can nonetheless add up to a lot of data With Mix Thinning turned on multiple identical events of this na ture are only identified once therefore creating less events data in the global mix The feature operates transparently If desired this functionality needs to be turned on Instructions Step 1 Quit the Post V5 0 software by clicking the Close Box in the upper right of the Edit screen Step 2 Navigate in Windows to C ProgramData Fairlight FMC Data and open the file System_Variables TXT Step 3 There is a line in that file MIX_THINNING ENABLED 0 Fairlight XYNERGI Page 273 AUTOMATION November 7 2014 Set the 0 to a 1 and save the file Restart the system and Mix Thinning will be operating Using the Pad to write Automation data Tutorial Checklist For writing automation data with the Pad e Mix On must be lit in the Mixer Megamode e Select path s the last one is shown in the Pad e Enable at least one mix parameter fader mute EQ etc e Select Write not Trim e Select your On Stop setting e Put the path into Write using the Auto Button see Touch later e Data is written while the transport is in play or record e Stop writing by stopping the transport or pressing Auto This guide takes you through this process Get Ready Press the green Mixer button Press the mix on button so that it is illuminated We will use Faders and Pans to illustrate w
76. edits button pressing and Jog Wheel turning and mouse edits menu items and toolbar button clicking This section describes tactile editing while the next one describes mouse dragging and mouse edits Editing Tutorial This section takes you through some common editing procedures Cut and Paste Overview In this menu we cut audio to the clipboard then paste it using the Enter key The cutting action is performed by the cut head cut tail and cut clip or cut range buttons Note copy and paste is performed exactly the same way as cut and paste except that you start by pressing the copy mode button instead of the cut mode button Note erase is similar to cut without the paste except that the clipboard is not used To use this tutorial item you need to load a Project containing clips The system comes with a demo project To load it consult the following Xplain item How to gt Files Load Demo Get Ready Press the green Editor Megamode button Press the cut button to access the Cut menu Press the range key to turn it OFF Fairlight XYNERGI Page 103 EDITING November 7 2014 Operation Locate the transport so that the cursor crosses the middle of at least one clip Identify the track containing that clip and double press its button to make it the only selected track If necessary use the Bank key The target clip should now be the only red clip on the screen Red means ready to edit Press and release t
77. enabled parameters signal paths Notes You can press In before or after pressing play You can also take a signal path out of record by pressing the auto button on its fader while play continues or take everything out of record by pressing the a11 read button The enabled signal paths and parameters remain enabled so you can enter automation record again at any time by pressing the In key Using Touch Snap Works on selected signal paths only unless Touch AutoEnable is toggled ON Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Press the Touch button until Snap is illuminated Enable parameter s see Enable Parameters below Select signal paths see Select Signal Paths below Press Play to move transport Touch or click and move the control of any enabled mix item it enters record and starts writing automation Fairlight XYNERGI Page 250 AUTOMATION November 7 2014 Step 6 Release the control it leaves record The mix items that will be recorded are only those you have touched and only while you were touching them Notes Only enabled mix items can be written by this method See Touch Auto Enable below for a more powerful version Using Touch Latch This is the same as Touch Snap except once a control is touched it stays in record even after you release it Use stop or other standard methods to exit all recording or press Auto to take the current signal path out of record U
78. f 411 overlap Cuts any clips lying across the ends of the range into two pieces at those range ends The fill function is used to automatically repeat a section of audio to fill a Range on a track to create background fills or buzz tracks The audio used for the fill is the clip currently on the clipboard from the last cut or copy function Multiple copies of the source may be needed in which case an overlap is used see below Reverses the audio in every second copy of the clipboard used for filling This can give a smoother effect Controls the length of overlap between pieces of audio used in the i11 command To set the overlap value Step 1 Press the Overlap soft key Step 2 Use the Numpad keys to type a number or use the Jog Wheel to increment or decrement the displayed number Step 3 Press enter The maximum value is 10 frames Setting a larger number will cause 10 frame to be selected To use the 111 function Step 1 Copy or Cut the desired audio to the clipboard The cursor s sync point will be maintained Step 2 Create a Range encompassing the area to be filled Step 3 Press the 111 soft key When multiple copies of the clipboard are needed to fill the range the Overlap value is used to determine the length of crossfade between copies If Overlap is set to zero the copies will be butt edited together Razor Soft Key Functions When razor is ON the soft keys menu change insert fill in
79. feeds or buses that have been enabled in the mix menu will be put into Write or Trim when their enabled parameters are touched Note Touch Auto Enable is selective by parameter For example if the EQ section is enabled and you touch only one control only it will go into Write or Trim The other EQ controls will remain in Read until you touch them Allows you to carry written values from one place to another Each time the system comes out of Write mode it remembers the values of all parameters that were enabled Now if you locate to any other time and press Join the system will immediately go back into Write with the remembered values set This is useful for setting a scene or section balance as follows Starting writing automation anywhere in a scene or section Adjust parameters until you are happy with the sound Now go back to the head of the scene and press J oin then Play Allows automation to be read and written in transport modes other than play As long as the transport moves forward the system will continue to write See more below Auto Curves Hold down this soft key and touch a parameter control to display its curve for the selected tracks Press and release to display the Curves menu See Automation Curves below for details Preview Menu Opens a menu with Preview commands See below for details Copy and Paste Mix The Copy Mix and Paste Mix soft keys are used for mix copying IT ALWAYS WORKS WITH A RA
80. file played by the clip e Tail Trim the last audio sample of the media file played by the clip e Clip Sync Point one of the clip s audio samples is locked to a timecode position e Fade In Point the place where the Fade In is completed e Fade Out Point the place where the Fade Out starts e Fade Curves the shape of the Fade In and Fade Out e Clip Level a single level value for the clip e Clip EQ a four band parametric equaliser for each clip Fairlight XYNERGI Page 102 EDITING November 7 2014 e Also clip Name Colour Grouping Multi channel format etc Other Clip Types Video Clips Video clips are much the same as audio clips but have fewer editable properties e Head Trim the first audio sample of the media file played by the clip e Tail Trim the last audio sample of the media file played by the clip e Clip Sync Point one of the clip s audio samples is locked to a timecode position e Fade In Point the place where the Fade In is completed e Fade Out Point the place where the Fade Out starts e Also clip Name The properties above can be edited by the same methods as audio clips and at the same time For these edits selecting a video track makes its clips into targets for editing They are fully described in the chapter Pyxis Track starting on page 311 Editing Methods There are two editing methods commands and mouse dragging Commands are further divided into tactile
81. for your cue If there is no range the cue will be created with the transport position as its In time and 5 seconds duration Step 1 Click Ada or press the add cue soft key A dialog appears for writing the text of your cue Enter the text For the ADR Step 2 Enter the text and click ox Fairlight XYNERGI Page 95 Step 3 Step 4 00 00 09 25 00 00 10 11 00 00 11 15 00 00 13 01 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 ADR November 7 2014 If necessary set the In Point of the cue locate the transport to that point and click From Your current position will be shown in a dialog You may accept this by clicking ox OR Click From type the timecode you want and click ox 00 00 11 14 00 00 15 11 00 00 13 06 00 00 15 25 If necessary set the Out Point of the ADR cue in the same way The cue is shown as below I hope you don t mind Sunrise and sunset It s always been this way The long and the short ADR Characters Your project may contain a list of characters and the cues assigned to different ones Creating characters Click in the Character box which normally shows lt Show all gt Type the name of a new character Click the Add button Filter by character To show only one character s lines use the Character drop down menu to select one character Fairlight XYNERGI Page 96 ADR November 7 2014 Sort by character To sort the list by character click the Character tab at the top o
82. from the track and either e Everything afterwards trailing clips move earlier or e Everything before leading clips move later When you paste audio the time it occupies is inserted into the track and either e Everything afterwards trailing clips move later or e Everything before leading clips move earlier Control of the direction for razor cutting is in a special soft key menu that appears in the Pad only while you hold down the Razor button Choose leading clips Of trailing clips Fairlight XYNERGI Page 116 EDITING November 7 2014 This is true even if razor was not ON when the clips were cut to the clipboard cut and paste are really independent commands each responsive to the razor setting Track Up down Button A handy device for moving between tracks is the track up down button If you hold it down and turn the Jog Wheel the whole track selection will move up or down You can also use the or keys and the Numpad with the track up down button Two Handed Editing Using two hands for cut and paste can save a lot of time The key is to hold down the action key cut head trim tail copy clip erase range etc then select the destination timecode and tracks then release the action key to paste the clipboard Example 1 Press down the cut clip key don t release it yet With your other hand jog the transport forward Release the cut clip key the clip you cut is now pasted where y
83. help it s a one time setup in most cases First you ll need to identify the MIDI devices attached to your system Connect your HUI controller via MIDI or USB To see a list of the MIDI devices seen by Post V5 0 we ll use our debugging program MSAT Start MSAT before starting FMC the Mixer program If Post V5 0 is already running stop FMC as follows Fairlight XYNERGI Page 373 HUI SLAVE MODE November 7 2014 Step 1 Click on the Mixer screen to give it focus Step 2 Type ctrl Shift Q Step 3 Type y to confirm closure of FMC Start MSAT using Start gt All Programs gt Fairlight gt FMC gt FMC Utils gt MSAT Shortly after starting it if FMC is running you ll see an error message about incompatible file versions which can be ignored x amp Version Error FMC and MSAT have incompatible UICtrlViewDefs Close MSAT and restart a compatible version Now start FMC using Start gt All Programs gt Fairlight gt FMC gt FMC Early in the boot process FMC will report on the MIDI devices When you see it click the red Stop button in the upper left of the MSAT screen to freeze the display It will look something like this Comms is ONLINE GDB 09 42 59 gt Physical Memory Available 705492K GDB 09 42 59 gt Mix Memory allocated 39062K GDB 09 42 59 gt FMC is ONLINE GDB 09 42 59 gt FMC re sync GDB 09 43 00 gt Disabling Ul Completed GDB 09 43 00 gt FaderCount 8 GDB 09 43 00 gt Mid
84. in Thru mode Trim controls the level as the channel enters the mixer For tracks this is after coming back from Disk and does not affect level being recorded Phase flips the audio phase at the input to the mixer It does not affect the signal being recorded ona track Direct Send and Insert Virtual Channel Direct In toggles the Direct Output on and off Pre toggles the Direct Output pre and post the main channel fader Level controls the level going from the channel to the Direct Output Note Direct outputs are only heard if patched to a physical output or to the input of another path This is done in the Patch I O screen press the Patch I O button Insert In controls the Insert Return only When In the channel listens to its Insert Return otherwise the Channel listens to the straight through path The Insert Send on the other hand is always active though it must be patched somewhere before it can be heard Note Insert sends and returns are only heard if patched to physical outputs inputs or to other paths Sends can be sent to the input of any path in the system and returns can come from the output or send of any path This is done in the Patch I O screen press the Patch I O button Fairlight XYNERGI Page 222 MIXING November 7 2014 Panning Post V5 0 supported surround formats are Stereo LCRS LCRSS 5 1 6 1 and 7 1 Panning IN OUT Boom send ON OFF While operating the pan controls the
85. information about the original timecode location of the audio data when recorded and the current timecode location of the displayed clip If a clip shows only a portion of the associated audio data on disk it may be trimmed to show more Fairlight XYNERGI Page 40 CHANNELS November 7 2014 This picture combines a non layered view top and the same clips with layers shown below Each view has its advantages Add Clip You can create a new clip by e Recording into the system see the chapter Recording page 78 e Importing clips from other projects see page 144 e Directly adding a clip To directly add a clip use the Track menu as follows Step1 Use the command gt The system displays the following dialog Track s J Ripple All Clips OO D Gprs _avison o cans Step2 Choose the track where you want the clip to be placed Fairlight XYNERGI Page 41 CHANNELS November 7 2014 Step3 Choose the audio file that will be played by the clip You may type in the name of the file if you know it including its full path Alternatively click the Browse button labeled and find the file in your disk storage Step4 Choose a name for the clip Step5 You may audition the clip at any stage to confirm that you have the right audio Step 6 Click OK to create the clip It will be placed at the current timecode position on the track that you chose Clip Display Information You can choose wh
86. invoked and the old bus priority mechanism used No more than 12 buses can be balanced in this way Each balanced bus uses special channels which copy the elements of the Main bus For a 5 1 Main bus 6 such channels are used stereo uses 2 There are a total of 24 special channels available for bus balancing Instantiation Inserting a Plug in on a Signal Path Method 1 via Plug in Config Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Select the path Press the Plug ins button in the Mixer Megamode You might need to press it twice Press the config soft key Press the Add Plug soft key The Plugin List appears showing all the plug ins installed in your system At the same time the Pad screen displays the first in the list Using the jog wheel scroll through the list of plug ins Alternatively you may use the mouse to select any plug in When the desired plug in is selected press the Add soft key or click the on screen Add button Method 2 via the XYNERGI Mixer Screen screen Step 1 Right click an empty slot in the Plug in area of an XYNERGI Mixer channel Right click Fairlight XYNERGI Page 279 PLUG INS REWIRE AND EXTERNAL PROCESSING November 7 2014 Step 2 Continue from Step 5 above Method 3 via the Insert Config menu Step 1 Select the track Step 2 Press the Insert Config button in the Setup or Mixer Megamode Step3 Press the Add Plugin soft key The LCD screen between the soft keys
87. is open for import is called a Library file The clips continue to reference the same media files as they did in their original project Import Clips To import clips from another project do the following Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Open the Import menu using Import in the Edit Megamode Choose a file from the Open dialog and click OK This opens a file in import mode The file is known as the current Library File This file is opened as read only so you cannot edit anything Move around the Import File and locate the clip s you want to import You can use a range or not and select one or more tracks The targeted clips will be red Press the Copy soft key This will copy the targeted clips to the clipboard and will re open your original file Locate to the position where you want to paste the copied clips and press ENTER The clips are pasted The system immediately goes back to the Import File allowing you to find and copy more clips It will continue to alternate between the Import File and your current project until you select another mode The clips will be sample rate converted on import if necessary to match your current project Fairlight XYNERGI Page 144 EDITING November 7 2014 You can go back to a Library file at any time by clicking view Edit Workspace Filename The Import Menu can also be used to import mix automation This is described in the section called Impor
88. it may be auditioned and then imported into the current open Project Creating and Maintaining Databases Refer to the AudioBase3 User Guide for details on creating and maintaining clip databases Searching for Sounds AudioBase uses a simple search interface to find clips Step 1 Press the audio base key in the Editor Megamode Alternatively click the Audio Base button in the Toolbar Audio Base Button Alternatively click view Smart Pane Audio Base The search field becomes active Step 2 Enter the text you wish to find and click the search soft key or click the on screen seach button All relevant database fields will be searched Use quotes to find whole phrases An AudioBase search can be stopped by pressing the search soft key again or by clicking the screen Search button again Fairlight XYNERGI Page 181 AUDIOBASE CLIP SEARCH CLIPSTORES QTUBE November 7 2014 Placing Sounds In A Project Dream II v0 0a35 Beta ali_48tk le lt 48 tracks gt MFX Project File ix Search For fer Clip Name fz Category soo Sample Rate pao Type fu User 1 o User 2 sss Clip Type i Sample Rate h User 3 fo User 4 fn Track os search Results 67 Deven Description Auto crash car approac from trac File Name izgaway File Tej description pirat A a a ay ein 43ACCL DCCL EXT from tra 43ACCL DCCL Ex ACCL IN BY from track 1 in ACCLINBY ACEL DECL EXT AU95127 f ACEL DECL EXT
89. key to automatically switch that bus in to the monitoring chain whenever the Faders To key is pressed Step 4 Press the exit button The OLED display names the function you are controlling with the fader Note that the Mute button always follows the fader function if that is possible For example if the fader is controlling the send level to Aux 1 the Mute button cuts that send But if the Fader is controlling Record Level for the track the Mute button has no function Fairlight XYNERGI Page 242 MIXING November 7 2014 Faders to Aux While BLUE Faders To is active any of the Aux bus selection keys may be selected and the Aux key will be illuminated All channel faders now control the level at which their signal path is sent to the selected Auxiliary bus Bus Master faders are excluded The mute key now controls the aux send ON OFF control The Panpot controls the Aux pan function if the Aux bus has larger than mono format The alternative controls may be automated and will record data for the aux bus send level pan and ON OFF parameters Use the normal enable functions to enable these parameters for automation For details see page 251 Faders to Reduction Bus While the Faders To layout is active Sub buses which are configured for bus reduction may be selected All channel faders now control the level at which their signal path is sent to the selected Sub Bus For more details about Bus Reduction see
90. list above You can find out the name of any HUI key using the following method Step 1 Start the system and load a project can be empty Step 2 Start the MSAT application Start gt All Programs Fairlight gt FMC gt FMC Utils FMC Step 3 If you see this error message at any time click OK it doesn t mean anything is wrong x X Version Error FMC and MSAT have incompatible UICtriViewDefs Close MSAT and restart a compatible version Step 4 Click buttons at the top of the MSAT screen so that Msg Gen is on Msg Sys is off and All Para is off as shown below Fairlight XYNERGI Page 377 HUI SLAVE MODE November 7 2014 Step 5 Step 6 fs MSAT_O lolx File View Help Mzg Meg All Gen Sys Para Bes is ae St VE ShortMsg ShortMsg ShortMsg ter Te Mag Msg All Filter Te i Pgra ster m Gen Sys Para Pors ster D Gib bhh A ShortMsg ShortMsg ShortMsg Type ctr1 SHIFT 0 then turn on Control message display using the Debug Switch Control dialog as shown below set the switch value to 1 Then close the dialog Debug Switch Control xj Debug Switch Control Msg display 7 Switch Value 1l Press a HUI key and observe the MSAT display It will show you the name of the key fs MSAT_O File View Help Msq Msg All Filter Te Mza Meq All Filter Te zt oa al PL gt m Ge Sa Para Pars P o a ig Para Paro oe 0 note tt tt eal z Gin
91. muted signal paths on and off After pressing you can select or to display the Solo Menu and Mute Menu mentioned above On Screen The buttons at the left of the Edit Screen can be used to set arming Mute Solo and more Link Groups The first track is master Clicking its Solo or Mute button affects the whole group Individual tracks within the group can be soloed or muted Arming any linked track will arm all of them as long as they have a patched Input Click to cycle through automation display parameters Fader Mute or Pan Click to put track into automation record Click to arm track for recording must have audio input Click and drag for fader level and pan position Click to select Video Track Double click here to collapse the Link Group to one track width Uncollapsed Stereo Link Group Click the number to select a single track or Link Group MIDI Track indication only Indicates Audio Track Collapsed 5 1 Link Group Fairlight XYNERGI Page 46 CHANNELS November 7 2014 Link Groups For arming the Link Group always behaves as a single entity so arming any member of the group arms all For mute and solo selecting the first member the Master soloes or mutes all members but the other members can be soloed or muted individually when the group is expanded Double clicking near the left edge of the tracks expands or contracts a Link Group
92. negatively Fade Shape A fade s shape includes the following parameters X Point this controls the percentage of the fade s duration when it reaches the Crossover Point X Level controls how loud the fade is compared to the full Level of the clip at the Crossover point Duration the total length of the fade in frames Duration is not really part of the shape but its control is close by Example Percentage 30 Attenuation 3 dB Duration 20 This means that the fade will last for 20 frames The crossover point will be 6 frames into the fade at which time the level will be 3 dB compared with full Level Adjusting Fade Shape To adjust the fade shape of the currently selected clip s Step 1 Press the x Leve1 soft key or the x Point soft key Step 2 Press the fade head fade tail or fade clip key to choose which end s of the clip you wish to change Step 3 Use the Jog Wheel to adjust the x Level or x Point You can see the change in the shape as well as the value you are jogging by looking at the Fade Panel in the upper part of the Editing Screen You can also type values into the x Level or x Point field using the Numeric Keypad or the QWERTY key numbers Always start with a minus when typing X Level values as they are always negative Step 2 Turn off the length soft key if you do not wish to apply the Smart Panel fade durations to the selected clips Step 3 Press the Enter key to apply the fade
93. new mixer screen by default however it can be specifically enabled or disabled from within the Themes setup dialog in Setup gt General Preferences Themes EVO Mixer Screen V Monitor Index 2 X To enable the Evo Mixer Screen ensure that its checkbox is selected and choose the desired monitor using the Monitor Index drop list The monitor can be the same as your Editing Screen but this can be inconvenient Be very careful not to choose the screen used by the XYNERGI Center Section this is awkward to reverse Use the Identify button to show the monitor numbers on the physical screens These may not be the same numbers shown in the Windows Screen Resolution dialog Now you may restart XYNERGI If you choose EVO Mixer Screen it will appear on the nominated monitor EVO Mixer Screen was originally designed to work on a 1600 x 900 monitor displaying 40 faders If your monitor is taller than 900 pixels the faders will be taller but everything else will look the same If it is narrower or wider than 1600 pixels it will display fewer or more faders Fairlight XYNERGI Page 212 MIXING November 7 2014 The EVO Mixer Screen 00 41 17 15 Automation section Bus Faders and meters Track Track Track Track Track r 0 41 42 43 44 Channel Scroll Bar The EVO Mixer Screen shows only those Live Feeds which have inputs patched plus one more ready to patch Similarly VCA Group faders are shown only for groups with m
94. of frames by typing on the Numeric Keypad using the Jog Wheel or pressing the and buttons Press ENTER to apply the displayed number You can also change the Handle size by selecting setup gt Record Settings and changing the number in the Handle group Note if the transport has not been rolling for as long as the handle before you issue the record command the system will create a shorter handle Auto Name Clips Overview Every clip is given an automatic name when you record it This name consists of a seedname anda number The seedname is applied first then a number is appended incrementing by one for each new clip Each Track has its own seedname You can change the seedname for each track and also set the starting number at any time Press the green Record Megamode button to access recording functions The Arm menu will be automatically selected Set the Seedname Select the track s whose seednames you wish to change Since you re on the Arm Menu this will also attempt to arm the tracks but this won t work unless they have patched inputs see How to Patch Inputs to Tracks for details If you want to set seednames for unarmed tracks see the section below called Using the Name Menu Press the seed name button to display the seed name dialog Using the Name Menu Press the name button to display a selection of all tracks Select the one s whose seednames you want to change Press the seedname s
95. of the console s frequently used functions If you find a key soft key or whole routine that is missing and you feel it should be included email documentation fairlightau com Recommendation If you are new to Fairlight systems it s highly recommended that you go through the Xplain How To s at least once Fairlight s user interface is quite different to most others but after learning a couple of routines it becomes quite logical and intuitive and extremely fast Fairlight XYNERGI Page 4 XYNERGI OVERVIEW November 7 2014 XYNERGI Overview Signal Flow Diagram JHA o Patch Record Edit Inputs Analog 1 3 4 Digital Live Feeds 1 i 2 a 3 3 4 4 MADI 1 a 3 4 Analog Digital MADI 1 1 1 Outputs 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 Sr Monitor Config Control Room Studio Speakers Main Main Alti Altt Alt2 Alt2 Process Mix Patch 1 I O Configuration 2 Patching connects paths in the system see page 61 3 Recording see page 78 4 Editing see page 102 5 Processing see page 208 6 Bus Assignment assigns channels to Buses see page 205 COND TACTILE ALL SOLO 7 Mixing see page 200 8 Bus Format mono stereo 5 1 etc see 201 Mix Automation see page 247 COND 9 Monitor Configuration sets up speakers for control room and studio see page 297 e Fairlight XYNERGI Page 5 XYNERGI OVERVIEW November 7 2014
96. often best to turn it off to reduce the likelihood To enable Mix Follows Edit do the following Step 1 Open the System Variables screen by typing ctrl Shift u Step 2 Click the Mix Follows Edit checkbox Step3 Click OK Call Follows It can also be useful to have call following selection It can be a big time saver On the other hand it can be annoying if you are working separately on mixing and editing tasks To control this do the following Step 1 Press the ca11 button in the Setup Megamode Step 2 Press the FoLLOW soft key one or more times to give the result you want For standalone XYNERGI systems Call Follows ALL is recommended For new users Call Follows ALL is recommended Later you ll find a working style that suits you and it may be better to change this setting Fairlight XYNERGI Page 13 THE XYNERGI TACTILE CONTROLLER November 7 2014 The Xynergi Tactile Controller Introduction This information is reprinted from the Xynergi Media Production System documentation For this reason the illustrations are those of a stand alone Xynergi system Rest assured the workings are exactly the same amp amp Monitor Section Upper Soft Keys Pad Lower S saasa EGeba0e00u a k UGB8E2GE8EE8E8a a4 oaoa B68 a Picture Kevs Monitor Section The rotary pots are used to adjust the Control Room and Studio monitor listening level The mute buttons cut the level to their r
97. page 201 The mute key now controls the bus assignment to the selected Sub Bus The panpot is inactive The mute and fader controls may be automated and will record data for the bus send level pan and assignment parameters Use the normal enable functions to enable these parameters for automation For details see page 251 The reduction bus channel fader may be configured pre or post the normal channel fader This is achieved using the Bus Params menu When set to Post the reduction channel fader defaults to OdB and provides an offset to the normal channel fader When set to Pre the reduction channel fader provides an independent mix level for the reduction Sub bus In this situation the panpot and Mute button are fully functional and independent of those on the main fader Fader To Record Level While the Faders To layout is active the Rec Level soft key may be chosen All track feed faders now control the level prior to the disk recorder This can be used to control the level going to disk during recording Note that live feed faders are inactive when Faders To Rec Level is selected This fader control cannot be automated Faders to Direct Output While the Faders To layout is active the Direct Output soft key may be chosen All channel faders now control the direct out level The Mute key toggles the direct output ON and OFF The fader control may be automated and will record data for the direct out level parameter Use
98. popup 4 Scroll down to the bottom of the list and add the desired iXML columns eg Project you wish to view 5 Click Ok Localize Localizing audio means putting the files in the same folder as the Project file Any audio which is referenced out of other folders is copied into the Media folder for the current Project file as new WAV files Once a project is localized it is much easier to move it to another system or back it up because all the media is in one place To localize files in a DR2 project select the Localize command from the Process Menu above the Editing screen The displayed dialog will ask whether you want to localize all files or just the selected ones Fairlight XYNERGI Page 343 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT November 7 2014 J Selected Clips Only Handles in Seconds Head E Tail 10 Handles Localizing only copies those sections of the original recordings that have been actually used in the project Anything that has been edited out will not be present To provide insurance for future editing you can save Handles on each piece of audio These are extra pieces of audio that can be exposed using the Trim menu Its advisable to use handles unless the edit is absolutely final Recovering Lost WAVs If a DR2 project has not been saved recently any recordings made since the last save will not appear in the project next time it is opened These recordings can be recovered and resynced
99. reel and continue in this vein until the conform is complete Events that cannot be recorded are marked E Error Reasons for this can include Bad timecode causing lost sync before the end of a recording Tape machine not locating to the pre roll point The software will continue after errors of this type and complete as much of the conform as it can Reconform Reconform uses an existing project or more than one project as the source audio for a Conform There is no Capture process as the audio is already present on hard disk but otherwise the process is very similar to Conform Each reel in the EDL may be mapped to a different audio project Step 1 Set up Track Mapping as for Capture Commonly all tracks will be involved Fairlight XYNERGI Page 361 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT November 7 2014 The Record Tracks correspond with the source tracks from the existing Source Project Step 2 Select Edits to Reconform as for Capture Step 3 Link Reels Each reel can come from a different project if required Use the Reel Linking dialog to choose the project for each reel select a reel then click the Project button and browse to the correct Project to be linked m Reel Linking G FairlightAU Projects DR_AMBIG DR_AMBIG DR2 03000 G FairlightAU Projects MT_Foreign MT_Foreign MT LIB 34000 G FairlightAU Projects 96Tracks 96Tracks DR2 LIB 32000 G Fairlight4U Projects ImportRobotsTest ImportRobots
100. shape as specified Capturing Fade Shapes To capture a fade means to extract all of its parameters making them available to apply to other clips Fairlight XYNERGI Page 125 EDITING November 7 2014 Step 1 Press the capture soft key Step 2 Press the fade head fade tail or fade clip key to capture the fade length and shape from the current clip The current clip is the clip currently touching the play head on the active track Having captured those values you can apply them to any other red clip by pressing the fade clip key Turn off shape or length if you don t want to apply it Deleting Fades Step 1 Press the delete soft key then press the fade head fade tail or fade clip key to delete fades Pressing the fade clip key affects fades at both the Head and Tail of each selected red clip while pressing head affects only fades at the head and tail affects only fades at the tail Presets Presets are used to save fade shapes only not lengths The system provides a number of Fade Presets and you can also save your own Custom presets To recall a system preset Step 1 Press the preset soft key then press keys 1 9 on the numeric keypad to choose one of the 9 factory fade presets Step 2 To apply the recalled shape to a clip turn off the length soft key and press the fade head fade tail Of fade clip key depending which part s you wish to apply To recall a custom preset Step 1 Press the Preset soft key t
101. switch A Multi Switch is defined as having a number of positions from a 3 switch to a 10 switch With normal Multi Switch controls turning the pot advances the parameter through the possible switch values showing a corresponding number in the Pad These numbers can be changed to text values by editing see below With ALT Multi Switch controls switch positions can be advanced just by touching the control with the ALT button held down Turning the control also works Control Pages Many plug ins have too many controls to fit in the Pad To handle this multiple pages of controls can be built To switch between pages press the soft keys below the Pad pages 1 to 3 and above the Pad pages 4 to 6 To select which controls go on which page use the Plug in Editor see below Fairlight XYNERGI Page 284 PLUG INS REWIRE AND EXTERNAL PROCESSING November 7 2014 Graphical Display To display Plug in graphics in the Pad area press the Plug in button a second time Repeated pressing toggles this display on and off Plug in Zoom By default the plug in graphic is shown at full size in the Pad This often means it is shrunk making it difficult to read values To zoom in on a particular section of the plug in graphic hold down the zoom button and make a marquee rectangle by clicking and dragging the mouse on the ORIGINAL graphic display in the Edit Screen not the one in the Pad A red dotted line shows on the graphic while
102. taking up To clean up the recycle bins there is a button on the dialog called Empty Recycle Bins This can be used when you are sure you do not need any media from them anymore The new recycle bins are located on each media device under the FairlightAU folder Dream T 101731 MB Local Dream II 165770 MB Local Windows Forma 28688 MB Local Windows Forma 334316 MB Shared Fairlight XYNERGI Page 350 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT November 7 2014 Note the same thing can be achieved using Process Discard Unused Media with one difference this will remove unused media from UNDO files as well so UNDO is not possible afterwards This is great for recording sessions with a lot of useless takes because only the ones used in the project survive Recovering Lost Media Orphaned Media When you UNDO a recording or erase all its resulting clips the media is still stored on the hard disk you just don t have a clip in the project referencing it You can of course find it in the Windows system and drag it back into the project but there is an easier way Note this can only be used during the session where the recording was made Once you close that project the references are gone To see a list of the media that was recorded in the current session and is now unreferenced use the mouse View Orphaned Media O Orphaned Media File FL_ Reccord Test 6 wav 1 FL_ Reccord Test 2_a2 GLTO9DLYDDO FL_ Rec
103. the enable key next to the Master fader to enable this parameter for automation Fader To Boom While the Faders To layout is active the Boom soft key may be chosen All channel faders now control the boom level The Mute key toggles the boom ON and OFF The fader control may be automated and will record data for the boom level parameter Use the enable key next to the Master fader to enable this parameter for automation Fairlight XYNERGI Page 243 MIXING November 7 2014 Faders To under Automation While Faders To is active the parameters controlled by the individual control elements Fader Panpot Mute Switch are recorded into the automation as usual The Enable buttons associated with those controls are used to enable the currently controlled parameters not the normally controlled ones The Library Introduction The Library provides storage for Equaliser Dynamics Plugins whole Channel presets or complete XYNERGI snap shots Up to 100 of each type of preset can be stored These presets can be recalled and applied to any signal path in any project To access the Library menu press the Lib button in the Mixer Megamode Select the preset type by pressing the chan EQ chan dyn all chan Of all console soft key Select the library function by pressing the Save Load or Delete keys The presets and functions are described below all chan means all the parameters in the currently selected signal path rou E
104. the Out point and press PLAY Enter Automation WRITE or TRIM manually when you are ready The automation system will return to READ when the transport moves past the Out point if active Once the transport has moved over the In or Out point they are made inactive This means you can quickly audition the changes you have just recorded using the Play Again command without having to first disable automation To perform another automation pass the In and Out points must be made active again by pressing Active In and or Active Out Link Audio and Mix Recording with PRIME The PRIME function links the automation to the audio recording controls This means that whenever you enter normal recording on the transport controls the automation system also enters recording This is particularly useful if your working method is to record your mix progressively as you go through a project because you will automatically be recording the automation moves at the same time It s also useful if you gain some facility with the recording controls including the ADR menu which offers some very sophisticated rehearsal and automatic recording features To use the PRIME function press the prime key While it is on Press the pay and Rec transport keys to drop in to record Note that the enabled Mix Items enter Write and armed tracks enter record Press stop or PLAY to drop out of record The enabled tracks return to Read NOTE It is not necessary to have an
105. the Pad Press the Select Mix soft key This will cause the names of the available Mix files to be displayed in the Pad Spin the Jog Wheel until the mix you want is displayed in the Pad Press Enter to load the displayed mix Select the tracks and the range that will be the source of your Mix copy Press the copy Mix soft key The system will now return to your original project Select the tracks where you want to paste the imported mix data Press the Paste Mix soft key The mix data will be pasted on your selected tracks at the current timecode If you want to paste the mix data at a different timecode simply locate there Note Another great way to do this if you want to copy audio as well as mix data is to use the Copy Project Segment command which is described on page 266 This depends on having the correct automation file loaded into the Library project Fairlight XYNERGI Page 267 AUTOMATION November 7 2014 Automation on Screen The controls in the upper left of the screen correspond with controls in the menus and on the console surface On Screen Automation Controls Pan in TRIM Pan in READ Pan in WRITE Fader in WRITE Fader in TRIM Fader in READ The controls in the lower right of the screen correspond with controls in the menus and on the XYNERGI picture keys The Mix On checkbox is equivalent to the Mix On button Automation Curves Automation data for Tracks Live Feeds Buses and
106. the bands are pasted into your target clip s Step 5 Locate the cursor over the destination clip or define a Range of clips Step 6 Click the Apply button or press the apply soft key or press Enter EQ In Out Use the EQ In out Soft key to toggle the EQ on or off at any time This action will affect the clip under the cursor or all clips in the Range if any The on off position of this switch is stored in the clip along with the settings of the EQ parameters Saving EQ Presets The system allows you to save the current EQ settings and later retrieve and apply them To save an EQ setting do the following Step 1 Step 2 Type a new name into the Presets field or use an old name if you want to change its settings Set the EQ values to the ones you want to save by editing or simply by picking up the values by touching an existing clip Click the Save button To retrieve an EQ setting select it from the Preset drop list It can then be applied immediately to the currently selected clip or range of clips A saved EQ setting can be deleted by first selecting it from the drop list then clicking the Delete button Fairlight XYNERGI Page 138 EDITING November 7 2014 A special preset can be created called default Whenever the Clip EQ display is opened for a clip with no EQ this preset will automatically be loaded into the display Editing on Multiple Layers Clips in Post V5 0 form layers on each track wi
107. the existing clips Only the top layer is heard unless there is a crossfade between layers more about that later The shape of the clipboard s track selection is preserved when pasting regardless of track selection at that time For example if you copy clips on tracks 1 and 3 then select only track 8 and press Enter the clipboard will be pasted on tracks 8 and 10 The first track on the clipboard is always pasted on the lowest numbered track in the selection Variations There are a few extra keys which change the functions of Cut and Paste All Layers Sometimes clips are stacked in layers Of course we only hear the top layer or crossfades between the top and second layers more about crossfades later You have the choice of cutting only the top layer or all the layers The all layers key controls this choice When it is on you will cut all the layers and they ll be placed on the clipboard ready to be pasted When it is off you will cut only the top layer Note that all layers only works with a range Hint if you want to see all the layers hold down the takes button and select the on of soft key or simply double press the takes button Razor Sometimes it is useful to cut the time out of a track not just the audio This is similar to cutting tape To cut time as well as audio turn on the razor button This will automatically turn on range and a11 layers When you cut audio the time it occupied is removed
108. the same thing happens but using software running within the original channel Toggling Inserts Both types of inserts can be switched on and off as follows Press the Insert button in the Pad Soft Keys Path display when holding down the aur button or when the Pad Lock mode is active Use the mouse to click on the Insert button in the EVO Mixer screen Fairlight XYNERGI Page 233 MIXING November 7 2014 e Use the Insert Config menu which has an Insert toggle button see below It is found in the Mixer Megamode Setting Physical Inputs and Outputs for Inserts The Insert points in any channel are available in the general patching system Patching is covered in detail in Patching Signal Paths page 61 The following describes a quicker way of patching a specific channel s Insert Send and Return Step 1 Press the green Mixer button Step 2 Select the path whose inserts you wish to configure Press the Insert Config button Step 3 To work on insert sends press the Sends Returns toggle so that the gt points to Sends For insert returns do the opposite Step 4 To set up the physical I O for a send or return press the patch soft key Operation is the same as other patching see Patching Signal Paths page 61 Note that Insert Sends and Returns may be patched to other channels within the NAME system not only sent to physical outputs Inserting Plug ins To insert a Plug In press the Add Plug In soft key then
109. the shape is applied to the head of the clip Note that the fade duration is set by the cursor position as when using the picture keys Length and Shape The Length and Shape tickboxes allow you to choose what to apply You can untick the Length tickbox if you only want to apply the shape and vice versa Fade Shape Using the mouse and screen method allows you to set the fade shape before applying it The shape includes the following parameters Percentage X Point this controls the percentage of the fade s duration when it reaches the Crossover Point Attenuation X Level controls how loud the fade is compared to the full Level of the clip at the Crossover point Duration the total length of the fade in frames Duration is not really part of the shape but its control is close by Example Percentage 30 Attenuation 3 dB Duration 20 This means that the fade will last for 20 frames The crossover point will be 6 frames into the fade at which time the level will be 3 dB compared with full Level NOTE The fade shape can be changed directly with the mouse by dragging on the red buttons in the graphs Fade Tail Same as Fade Head but the fade is applied to the end of the clip Fade Clip If both Head and Tail are selected when you click Apply both ends of the clip can be faded at the same time Fade Across a Range If a range is present when the apply key is clicked all clips that are wh
110. the the config soft key then press the Next button until the desired plug in is shown on the screen Step4 Press the Remove Plugin soft key The LCD screen between the soft keys will now display the first of a list of plug ins that you have installed Selecting Plug ins For a channel with a single plug in Step 1 Select the channel Step 2 Press the Plug in button in the Mixer Megamode This will cause the plug in GUI to become visible on the screen If the channel has multiple plug ins Step 1 Press the Plug in button a second time in the Mixer Megamode Step 2 Press the config soft key Step 3 Press the Next soft key until the desired plug is selected then delete as above Controlling Plug ins on Screen Each Plug in comes with a graphical user interface GUI designed by its manufacturer To display the GUI do one of the following e Press the Plug ins button in the Mixer Megamode This will display the current plug in for the current channel e Double click a Plug in in the XYNERGI Mixer Screen Channel Double click to display Click an indvidual plug in once to bypass it Click to bypass all plug ins Fairlight XYNERGI Page 281 PLUG INS REWIRE AND EXTERNAL PROCESSING November 7 2014 Plug in GUI controls Each plug in GUI is contained in a window including a close box and several icons 2 Track 1 Insert 1 FLOORFISH init EAE Close Button ii mM lt aie L O o RFISH expander noise gate
111. the upper 4th soft key This is labeled Layout if visible but this won t be the case when a graphic is shown in the Pad The system displays a page containing plug in parameters and commands Note the picture below has been trimmed to save space the real display is larger Fairlight XYNERGI Page 285 PLUG INS REWIRE AND EXTERNAL PROCESSING November 7 2014 Using the Plug in Editor Overview choose a parameter then touch the Pad control where you want it assigned Choosing a Parameter You may choose a parameter by clicking its tile with the mouse Alternatively you may wiggle any control or switch on the plug in s graphic display and it will be chosen by the software For a switch it is enough to toggle it For a continuous control the value must be changed Choosing the Pad Control For a normal control just touch it For an ALT control hold down the ALT button and touch the rotary control The parameter is immediately assigned and you may test that the control works WARNING Don t touch any other controls or the parameter will be moved to them The name assigned to the control will be the same as the one shown on the tile Note these names are supplied by the plug in manufacturer and do not always match what you see in the graphics display You can change the displayed name later as shown below Setting Control Type Once a parameter is assigned to a control you may choose the control type By de
112. time location Slipping the head moves the head of a clip to the cursor while maintaining the position of the tail Slipping the tail moves the tail of a clip to the cursor while maintaining the position of the head Fairlight XYNERGI Page 120 EDITING November 7 2014 slip is accessed on the same button as Trim Press it once for Trim twice for Slip You can also swap between the two modes using soft keys Slip Clip Step 1 Select a track and move a clip under the cursor Step 2 Press the trim key if not already on then press it again so that siip lights up Step 3 Press the trim clip key Step 4 Jog or play the transport Step 5 Press Enter the clip is moved by the amount you just moved the transport Two Handed Slipping This is a more powerful method which is worth learning Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Head Select a track and move a clip under the cursor Press the trim key if not already on then press it again so that slip lights up Press the slip clip key and hold it down Jog or play the transport Release the slip clip key the clip is moved by the amount you just moved the transport Can be used one handed or two handed The result when Enter is pressed or the Head key released is that the Head of the clip is slipped to the cursor position while the Tail position is preserved The clip gets shorter or longer and the sync moves by the difference in position between the Head before and af
113. to 20 dB it will rise to 15 dB the relative difference is preserved Note Setting the Master fader to 0 dB by holding down the Blue key and touching a fader will set all slave faders to 0 dB as well Pressing a switch with a toggled value e g Mute On Off will toggle the master s value and set all other members to that value For switches which cycle through a number of values pressing the switch will set all members to the next value of the Group Master Absolute If linking is absolute any move made by the Master fader knobs and switches results in immediate adoption of the same values in the slave members For example if the Master fader moves from 10 dB to 5 dB and a slave is set to 20 dB it will rise to 5 dB the relative difference is destroyed Fairlight XYNERGI Page 191 GROUPING November 7 2014 The adoption of identical values occurs when faders or knobs are moved It is also possible to set identical parameter values on creation of the Link Group See Creating a Link Group below Link Group Features Linking feeds in link groups has the following effects e Selecting one member selects the entire link group e There is only one fader for the group When the group is created the group master fader adopts the level of the first fader in the group When the fader is adjusted the members fader behaviour depends on the setting of Relative Link Groups as described above e When a group is cre
114. to one position Rotate allows a signal path or Link Group to be rotated in the Surround field Hold down the aut key for more functions Path ALT Level ON MUTE is the main channel MUTE switch Solo gt main channel solo Solo Safe gt prevents path being muted when another is soloed Insert IN gt needs physical insert send and return paths defined MAIN gt assigns or unassigns path from MAIN system bus Armed gt path must be a Track and have a patched input Fairlight XYNERGI Page 210 MIXING November 7 2014 Bus 1 4 gt extra mode where path can be assigned to Sub buses 1 to 4 on the upper soft keys Bus 5 8 gt as above for buses 5 to 8 Dyn Details There are three modes for Dynamics All three stages of Dynamics may be active at the same time except for buses which have no Expander Gate stage To switch between modes ALT lower soft keys Mode 1 Compressor Mode 2 Expander Gate To toggle between Expander and Gate ALT Dyn Type soft key Mode 3 Limiter Threshold Ratio Range and Makeup Gain controls at left and Hold Attack and Release times at right Hold down the aut key for more functions Dyn ALT For each mode the IN OUT switch is an upper soft key The three Dynamics modes are selected on the lower soft keys Aux Details There are three modes for Auxiliary send control To switch between modes ALT lower soft keys Each mode handles 4 of the Aux sends Level is show
115. underneath the Pyxis Track allowing easy placement of sounds to picture e During Audition you can use the Jog wheel when the transport is not in jog or the and keys in the numpad to move the highlight up and down the list To start auditioning the new clip toggle Audition off then on again e To hide the AudioBase3 results list simply enter another mode e g Cut Dream IT 0 0a Search For car Clip Name T2 83 Categor Type fan M User 1 User Sample Rate fan User 3 User Results 617 Preview Description Auto crash car approac from trac File Nan en DS a S Ai a ee A a j 5 E a dai k C 0 i D i 1 ar LARS Ltt r e Entering text in the Search For field causes the software to look in all the relevant fields Entering text in the more specific fields at the right like Clip Name and Description confines the search to the fields you have specified The Search For field takes precedence if you have entered text in both places e The AudioBase3 results pane can be displayed underneath the Pyxis Track allowing easy placement of sounds to picture e Wildcards can be used to aid searches These include the following o Stands for one or more characters e g dog means anything starting with dog o Stands for one character e g dog means starts with dog and contains one more character o means AND eg dog amp cat means contains
116. use the Jog Wheel to scroll through the list of available items Press the add soft key to apply The graphical controls for the Plugin will be displayed on the Edit Screen Plug ins can be organised into a list of favourites by pressing the Add to Fav soft key Press the Fave soft key to display only this list Press the Plug Ins button at any time to toggle the Plug ins editor You can select another path while the Insert Config layout is active Plug ins are described in detail in the Chapter Plugins and Rewire page 276 Direct Outputs Overview Most channels particularly Tracks and Live Feeds are assigned to buses where they are mixed with other channels A Direct Output is an additional feed of a channel signal path that can be patched anywhere you like in addition to its normal output to buses The Direct Output can be sent pre or post fader and may have its own independent level offset and mute Direct Output levels are controlled in the Path display Setting the Destination The Direct outputs in any channel are available in the general patching system Patching is covered in detail in Patching Signal Paths page 61 The following describes a quicker way of patching a specific channel s Direct Output Step 1 Press the green setup button Step 2 Select the path whose Direct Output you wish to configure Press the Direct Config button Fairlight XYNERGI Page 234 MIXING November 7 2014 Step 3 Press the Patc
117. using the mouse on the Edit Screen You can press the ALL CHANS key in the Param Enable layout to quickly enable all signal paths This feature should be used with caution Enabled paths do the following e They enter Write Trim Preview when a control is touched if Touch is set to Latch or Snap e They enter write when the In button is pressed and exit when the out button is pressed e They can be used in Auto Punch operations Item Status Mix items can be in one of five states Read Write Trim Isolate and Preview The current state of each parameter is displayed by coloured illumination of fader knobs rotary encoders and switches plus parameter values in the ILP The five parameter states are described below Read When mix items are in Read the automation system takes control of their values and the physical position of their controls Controls are illuminated Eien A mix item can be in Read whenever any automation data has been recorded for it anywhere in the project Write Trim Mix items must be explicitly placed in Write or Trim The write tTrim key is toggled to the Write or Trim position for the whole console WRITE automation is armed for record and absolute values are written for the selected mix items Indicators are illuminated red TRIM automation is armed for record and relative values are written for the selected mix items Indicators are illuminated amber In trim mode moving a control applies
118. various system video displays Master Screen Meters XYNERGI provides a set of eight Master Screen Meters To toggle them on and off e Use the Panel oN orF soft key in the Meters menu Setup Megamode e Use the Screen Meters button in the Setup Megamode e Click on the Mixer screen and type ctrl SHIFT Space These meters can be dragged by their Title Bar to any point on the Edit Screen or Mixer Screen or to a third video monitor if your system has one installed Ca Fairlight Digital Peak and RMS Meters 10 1 412 A u x Fairlight XYNERGI Page 303 METERS November 7 2014 x Choose Aux or PESK MS Meter Set for 100 100 Bin 100 les y the 12 buttons above 20 100 100 _E 100 100 E I I Shows maximum value since meters opened Shows average value since meters opened 10 10 10 Selection of metering source for the Master Screen Meters e With aux selected click Main Sub Buses B1 B2 and Aux buses Al Az to toggle them on or off the meters You can add any number of buses and the system will display meters for up to eight Bus elements starting at the top of the selected buses e With Meter Set selected select one Meter Set or a number of Main and Sub buses Meter Sets cannot be added to other sets or buses Fairlight XYNERGI Page 304 METERS November 7 2014 oo oo m ra iN J ziel AARAA BHAA meter set here ra Cho
119. way Step 3 The output right side shows all the tracks you have converted to MIDI Choose the MIDI controller MIDI Device In to be recorded on each track Normally this is the same controller for all tracks which would be your MIDI keyboard Patch the track output to any instrument you have loaded Metronome To set up a metronome use Setup Bars and Beats Setup Fairlight XYNERGI Page 327 MIDI TRACKS November 7 2014 The metronome is created by the Oscillator To hear it use the Patch 1 0 page to patch the output of the Oscillator Noise channel to an open track or live feed Track 1 I a nese suse ae sane CT CO 6 e r Recording MIDI Clips Arm the MIDI track by clicking on the record button at the left of the screen Put it in record using the normal transport commands MIDI clips can be recorded on top of each other just like audio clips As usual the top layer is heard Fades and crossfades have no effect Fairlight XYNERGI Page 328 MIDI TRACKS November 7 2014 00 00 47 21 00 00 42 00 00 00 48 00 MIDI clips show black and white notes at their relative pitches Editing MIDI Clips MIDI clips can be edited using the Cut Copy and Erase menus just like audio clips Head tail clip and range are all understood in the same way The Trim head and tail commands plus the Slip Clip command work as expected In addition the clips can be mouse dragged individually or
120. which affects panning behaviour Fairlight XYNERGI Page 194 GROUPING November 7 2014 bzvxbx 3k3 1 bzvxbx 3k3 I Library E bzvxbx3k3 I bzvxbx 3k3 Library The Spread Control Link Group with default panning Spread box is set to maximum size so Link Group members are panned as wide as possible Spread box is set to 70 so members are brought inwards Now the whole Spread box can be moved LR and FB The spread control is only available when a link group is selected The spread control adjusts the perceived size of a surround mix The spread control range is from 0 to 100 At 0 the display reads POINT meaning point source At 100 the display reads FULL meaning full surround At FULL spread Fairlight XYNERGI Page 195 GROUPING November 7 2014 the LR and FB pan controls have no effect as each member of the link group is hard panned to their respective bus elements As the spread is reduced the panning of each link group member is made to converge with the location of the link group master pan control With the spread control less than full the pan control enables the sound field to be moved to favour the location of the pan target As the spread control approaches POINT the panning of each member becomes closer to the pan location of the link group master This has the effect of mixing the signals of each link group member so that they all emerge from the same loudspeakers as deter
121. which corresponds to the place you want to paste the segment For example choose a scene change or notable event which will be easy to locate at the destination Click Edit gt Copy Project Segment This copies the specified range into the clipboard including all clips and automation Locate to the timecode event where you want to paste Paste the clipboard using any of the following Click Edit gt Paste Press Enter on the Xynergi Type ctrl v on a qwerty keyboard The audio from all tracks will be copied whether selected or not plus the automation from all signal paths and all parameters whether enabled or not Fairlight XYNERGI Page 266 AUTOMATION November 7 2014 You can also use this command to copy a project segment from an import project and paste it into the main workspace Import Automation from Another Project The Import Menu can be used to bring audio clips in from another project This is described in the section Importing Clips from Other Projects on page 144 It can also be used to import mix automation The procedure is as follows Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Open the Import menu using Import in the Edit Megamode Press the open soft key choose a file from the Open dialog and click OK This opens the Import File i e the one from which you will import Press the mix soft key This will cause a new menu to be displayed in
122. write are shown in the Xynergi Pad with a red triangle Latch and Snap Latch means that once you touch the control it stays in Write or Trim until the system goes back into Read Snap means that the parameter enters Write or Trim when you touch it and returns to Read when you release it using the Glide Out time see page 256 Fairlight XYNERGI Page 257 AUTOMATION November 7 2014 Programmed Automation The entire automation system can be punched into record at which time all enabled mix items will start to write automation data This can be done manually or automatically The Punch Menu All the commands described in this section can be found on the Punch Menu This is found in the Mixer Megamode Manual Punch In The In and out keys can be used to enter and leave automation record The keys can be pressed while the transport is in stop or PLAY to manually drop in or out of Write or Trim if selected on the enabled mix items Automatic Punch In Summary You can punch in and out of automation record at pre defined In and Out points The basic steps are Step 1 Set the In and Out points Step 2 Make them active Step 3 Perform the punch explicitly using Punch or implicitly by playing over the active points Details To set In and Out points Step 1 Select the Mixer Megamode and press the Mix on button to turn on automation Step 2 Move the transport to the required In point and press the From key to capture the
123. you are making this marquee Alternatively hold down the ct r1 and zoom buttons while making your marquee This will cause the selected area to display in 1 1 zoom which sometimes makes it easier to read If the selected area is smaller than the Pad black is shown around it If larger than the Pad it is cropped at the bottom and right to fit To toggle between zoomed and full views of the plug in graphic press the upper 5th soft key next to Macro This is labeled Zoom if visible but this won t be the case when a graphic is shown in the Pad Zoomed views can be stored with each page of the plug in fleximap See Plug in Editor below for details Plug in Editor The Plug in Editor is used to place plug in parameters on the Pad controls set the control type and rename the controls if required To access the Plug in Editor Step 1 Load a plug in Step 2 Press the Plug in button in the Editor or Mixer Megamode At this point the Pad controls should display parameters from the plug in These may be pre arranged at the Fairlight factory or by you or a colleague or if not they are shown by default in the order presented by the manufacturer normal first then ALT Several pages may be filled if there are more than 16 plug in parameters If the Pad controls do not display anything there may be an error in the Fleximap This requires the fleximap file to be deleted See Fleximap Files below Step 3 Hold down the Blue key and press
124. 014 The Auto Curves Menu When you press the Auto Curves button a menu is displayed in the Pad Note selection in this menu is based on Edit selection i e tracks selected while Edit menus were active not Mix selection This is because the curves are displayed on the Edit screen Display Toggles the curves display on and off for the selected tracks Edit Allows editing of the curve information Pressing it accesses the Event and Delete soft keys Event displays all the automation data points so you can select and move them with the mouse Delete removes all selected automation data points Target Accesses the pull down menu where you can choose the parameter to be displayed on curves for the selected tracks Clear Hides the curves on selected tracks Back to Mix Returns you to the basic level of the Mix Menu Data Storage All the mix data of the current mix is stored in system memory This data must be explicitly saved to disk as anamed mix If a new project is loaded the previous mix data is retained in memory and may be saved as a mix in the new project Mix Thinning XYNERGI offers a Mix thinning algorithm that ignores identical static mix data This is especially useful for large amounts of mix data as it can largely reduce the actual number of mix events When automation is written there can be events that are nothing more than a block of static information e g nothing more than an in and out point with no
125. 14 Numeric Keypad Numpad The Numeric Keypad also known as the Numpad has many uses Its function changes when you press the keys surrounding it like Loc Set Fader Sets and so on The following functions are available on the Numpad Function Type Numbers Parameter Entry Choose Fader Set Choose Number of tracks on Edit Screen Go To a timecode mark or clip name Jump by a number of seconds Set Review time Choose Meter Set Capture timecode into a Locator Move to a Locator Set Loop Jog width Macro execution Press or Hold Button None None Fader Sets BLUE Go To Jump Left Right or REW FF Review B Meters Setup Megamode Set Loc Jog Play hold down Macro key see Chapter Macros page 166 These functions are described in detail in the Chapter The Numpad Type Numbers When naming channels clips and other things these keys type the large number written on them Fairlight XYNERGI Page 17 THE XYNERGI TACTILE CONTROLLER November 7 2014 Play Jog Primarily used to enter Jog mode but also toggles to Play mode if Jog mode is active This is designed to allow easy transport control without moving your right hand away from the Jog Wheel BLUE Jog initiates Shuttle mode where the speed of the transport depends on the Jog Wheel position The Jog function has many other commands and variations For details please see Jog Play page 30 REW and FF These ke
126. 3 Mirou HON eee iee R E 303 Master Screen Meters seneese 303 Meter Selga tie eee eienen 306 Peaks ii menea a aeia aaa ania 308 Stereo Compound Meters ssessseeeseeeeeeeeeee 309 Parameter Setup sicst csencctuainiieasds telat 310 PYXIS TRACK cccsccsssissscciscsececastarctinia 311 MOCUCTION drit a sdb a A a aves dice 311 Creating a Pyxis Track n 311 Adding a Second Pyxis Track 312 Hiding and Showing the Video Track 312 Loading Video into Pyxis Track e 314 Capturing Video into Pyxis Track 0 317 ENCryPUlOnscveshs stuctesecnevt atheed a 319 The Pyxis Window s e 320 Using Pyxis Track as a Machine 00 322 The Pan Theatre 322 MIDI TRACKS saaaannnsssnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnennnnn 326 IMtFOCUCTION iiien a 326 File Compatibility IMPORTANT 5 326 Convert Tracks to MIDI 326 Patching to MIDI Tracks n 327 MetronOMme cccceeceeeeeeeetececeeeeeseeseneeeeeeeeees 327 Recording MIDI ClipS eeceeeeeeeeeeeees 328 Editing MIDI Clips 0 eeeeeeeereereeeeeeee 329 MIDI Note Editing cecceeeeeeeeeetees 329 SAMPLING viniani aniani en uniana sananai 332 Sound Design Sampler SDS Overview 332 Set pinuri u aniria atatia 332 Accessing SDS cccscsesceeeeeeeieeeeneeeeenees 333 Previewing and Loading Sounds into SDS 333 Keyboard Mapping ccccccceesseeeeneees 335 AHDSR and Modulation ceeeeeee
127. 3 Remap File sesiono r E aes 375 Advanced using Scripted Macros 379 INTRODUCTION November 7 2014 Introduction XYNERGI is a large audio production system with very strong support for video recording and editing About the Software Fairlight Post V5 XYNERGI runs Fairlight Post v5 software Many other Fairlight products also run this software Reference will be made throughout this document to the capabilities of Post V5 which implies that the software has the capability and all the Fairlight products running Post software also have it About This Manual The XYNERGI User Manual provides all the information necessary to rapidly become proficient at operating the system in a professional audio environment This manual is designed to familiarise sound editors and engineers with the facilities provided by XYNERGI The terminology and concepts used in this manual assume a reasonable knowledge of audio principles and studio procedures Finding the Information You Need Read through the chapters in the order presented to learn all the features of the system or use the Table of Contents or Index to quickly find the specific information you require What Else You Need to Know Installation If you need to install or re install the system please read the manual XYNERGI Installation Configuration and Service manual pdf This manual is installed on your hard disk in C Program Files x86 Fairlight Dream I
128. 5 Sub1 Right gt Track 6 Fairlight XYNERGI Page 67 TRANSPORT November 7 2014 Transport Basic Transport Controls The PLAY STOP FF and REW controls work in a similar manner to a tape machine Press FF and Rew multiple times to accelerate through 8 24 60 150 and 360 times play speed To enter record press the REC and PLAY keys together To exit record press any other transport button The play command can be accessed also by pressing the Jog Play Button Hold down Record to display special commands on the soft keys Jog Commands Jog is a mode where the transport moves as you turn the Jog Wheel Both video and audio move along in sync To enter Jog mode do any of the following e Press the Play Jog key unless already in Jog in which case it enters Play e Click the Jog button above the Edit Screen Holding the BLUE or ct ri key while jogging increases the jog speed by five times Holding down the suirt key while jogging increases the jog speed by 64 times Holding down the suirt and ct ri keys while jogging increases the jog speed by 512 times Loop Jog Loop Jog is a unique transport mode where jogging becomes a playspeed loop which is moved backwards and forwards It s great for detecting pitch changes in music sibilance in speech or other changes in tone To toggle this on and off hold down the Jog key and press the Loop soft key to choose Loop On or Off Other options in this menu Follow
129. 5 1 and SMPTE 5 1 choose between them with the appropriate soft key Step 6 Select one of the following options all defaults applies pan settings to each member to set the link group into a surround format as described above under Link Group Format All defaults also applies the feed parameter values of the first member of the group to all the members even if Relative Groups is selected Parameters modified are fader level pan EQ dynamics aux sends inserts and direct out state default pans applies pan settings to each member to set the link group into a surround format as described above under Link Group Format Default pans affects the pan parameter only feed params applies the feed parameter values of the first member of the group to all the members excluding pan This is true even if Relative Groups is Fairlight XYNERGI Page 192 GROUPING November 7 2014 selected Parameters modified are fader level EQ dynamics aux sends inserts and direct outs no defaults no feed parameters are modified Link Group Display If composed of Track Feeds a Link Group is shown in the Editing Screen like this bevxbx 3k3 bzvx NMjj Track 9 Track 10 Track 11 Track 12 bzvyxbx 3k bzyx NMijj Track 9 Track i RE Double click here to collapse or eae expandthe linked tracks You can collapse linked tracks down to the width of one track by double clicking any of the linked tracks close to i
130. 5535 GDB 09 43 00 gt version 1 1 GDB 09 43 00 gt name USB Audio Device 2 GDB 09 43 00 gt Midi Out 2 of 5 name USB Audio Device 3 GDB 09 43 00 gt MIDI Out device 2 GDB 09 43 00 gt manufacturer 65535 GDB 09 43 00 gt product 65535 GDB 09 43 00 gt version 1 1 GDB 09 43 00 gt name USB Audio Device 3 GDB 09 43 00 gt Midi Out 3 of 5 name USB Audio Device 4 GDB 09 43 00 gt MIDI Out device 3 GDB 09 43 00 gt manufacturer 65535 GDB 09 43 00 gt product 65535 GDB 09 43 00 gt version 1 1 GDB 09 43 00 gt name USB Audio Device 4 GDB 09 43 00 gt Midi Out 4 of 5 name Microsoft GS Wavetable SW Synth GDB 09 43 00 gt MIDI Out device 4 GDB 09 43 00 gt manufacturer 1 GDB 09 43 00 gt product 102 GDB 09 43 00 gt version 5 10 GDB 09 43 00 gt name Microsoft GS Wavetable SW Synth GDB 09 43 00 gt Using MIMidi Out 0 A number of MIDI devices may be presented not necessarily with useful names this depends on the driver for the device At the end the line GDB 09 43 00 gt Using MIMidi Out 0 tells you which MIDI device the system is using If this is clearly not your HUI device nothing is going to work In the example given it is possible to see that Microsoft GS Wavetable SW Synth has not been selected Remap File If you want transport control or any other key events to work you must place a file called remap txt in the following folder
131. 9 07 00 53 09 11 00 00 00 04 00000000_00000000_65B908E4_7F35633E i 48000 Hz 00 53 10 01 00 53 10 13 00 00 00 12 00000000_00000000_65B908E4_7F35633F 48000 Hz 00 53 12 11 00 53 13 11 00 00 01 00 00000000_00000000_658908E4_7F 356340 i 48000 Hz 00 53 13 22 00 53 14 18 00 00 00 20 00000000_00000000_65B908E4_7F35633E 48000 Hz 00 54 09 09 00 54 09 13 00 00 00 04 00000000_00000000_65B908E4_7F35633E 48000 Hz 00 54 10 02 00 54 10 14 00 00 00 12 00000000_00000000_65B908E4_7F35633F 48000 Hz 00 54 12 13 00 54 13 13 00 00 01 00 00000000_00000000_65B908E4_7F 356340 i 48000 Hz 00 54 13 23 00 54 14 19 00 00 00 20 00000000_00000000_658908E4_7F35633E 48000 Hz 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 This dialog displays every clip in the project You can filter it reduce the number of clips displayed in a number of ways The most important is to type in all or part of a name into the Search box as shown above This will hide all clips except those with names containing what you typed In the example shown above all the clips contain the letters bi Step 4 Having chosen your clip press the Go To button again or ENTER to locate to the clip s start timecode or Play to locate and go into play immediately or press Esc upper left key to close the dialog without locating anywhere anywhere Or you may double click on the name of any clip to locate to its position The Clip Search dialog has many other capabiliti
132. AHDSR and Modulation below for details Load Grab To load the clip under the cursor into SDS press the Grab soft key The clip will be mapped to the keyboard at its original pitch positioned at the next available white key See Within Audiobase you can perform a search scroll the results and Preview them on the keyboard Just as with clips on the timeline if the SDS Preview is active the highlighted sound in the search results list will be active on the sampler for playing listening To load an AudioBase sound into the sampler press the Grab soft key For convenience there is a new SDS Preview key on the AudioBase Smart Pane and a Grab key on the AudioBase PAD layout The keyboard behaviour for Audiobase sounds works the same way as for clips Removing Samples You can remove any sample from the keyboard using the delete soft key To select a sample for deletion simply play it on the MIDI keyboard Keyboard Mapping below for more options Note the first available white key is set as follows Step 1 Click Setup General Preferences Step 2 Click the sps tab General Preferences x Options Audiobase Playback VideoCapture Projects Scroles Metes SDS __Themes Keyboard Left Rigt C6 v Preview Root C3 v Auto Assign Step 3 Set the Assign Root to be the keyboard note where the first sample will be grabbed Step 4 Exit the dialog by clicking the Close box in the upper right corner Grabbing successive
133. BLUE key and press Joc To shuttle at half speed hold down ct ri and press REW or FF To shuttle at play speed hold down sHIFT and press REW Or FF To shuttle at double play speed hold down SHIFT and ctrl and press REW Or FF The transport key LEDs reflect the current speed and direction For example if shuttling reaches play speed the play light comes on Looping Overview Looping means playing the same section over and over There will normally be a pause at the start of the loop while the system loads audio from the hard disk ready to play The loop uses a start and end timecode which can be set in a number of ways Looping can use a preroll and postroll See below for options Loop Commands Press the loop button to start looping using the current loop start and end times If the transport is already looping it will start again from the beginning of the loop To stop looping press any other transport button Hold down the loop button to display the Loop Menu options in the Pad and others on the picture keys Pre Postroll ON If you toggle this option on the loop will add the system preroll and postroll to its start and end points Note pre and postroll are set in the sync menu in the Setup Megamode Clip Uses the clip under the cursor on the current Edit Track to set loop start and end points and starts looping around that Range Takes the current edit range which you have previously set using the From and To bu
134. Bus Send means the Insert Sends from the Aux Buses Reverse Patching Overview There is a quick way to perform simple patching i e choosing sources for recording It s called reverse patching because you select the destination first You can patch to multiple tracks at the same time but the only allowed sources are the Physical Inputs on the SX 20 and the system buses Get Ready Press the green Editor button Selection Press and release the sex button Xynergi displays 48 tracks Select the tracks to which you want to patch inputs Patching Hold down the set Source button You can now see all the system buses other than those with zero format and below them the four analog and four digital inputs from the SX 20 Some of the source may be lit that means they are patched to one or more of the selected tracks Press the source that you want to patch to the selected tracks This source is now patched to all of the selected tracks subject to the following rules Fairlight XYNERGI Page 66 PATCHING SIGNAL PATHS November 7 2014 If the source is a bus its elements are patched sequentially to the selected tracks and their neighbours For example Sub 1 is a stereo bus and Tracks 3 5 and 6 are selected After pressing Sub 1 the patching will be as follows Sub1 Left gt Track 3 Sub1 Right gt Track 4 though it wasn t selected it just happens to be Track 3 s neighbour Sub1 Left gt Track
135. CENSE This EULA grants you the following license e You may use the SOFTWARE only on the DEVICE e NOT FAULT TOLERANT THE SOFTWARE IS NOT FAULT TOLERANT Fairlight AU HAS INDEPENDENTLY DETERMINED HOW TO USE THE SOFTWARE IN THE DEVICE AND Fairlight AU S SOFTWARE SUPPLIERS HAVE RELIED UPON Fairlight AU TO CONDUCT SUFFICIENT TESTING TO DETERMINE THAT THE SOFTWARE IS SUITABLE FOR SUCH USE e NO WARRANTIES FOR THE SOFTWARE THE SOFTWARE is provided AS IS and with all faults THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY PERFORMANCE ACCURACY AND EFFORT INCLUDING LACK OF NEGLIGENCE IS WITH YOU ALSO THERE IS NO WARRANTY AGAINST INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT OF THE SOFTWARE OR AGAINST INFRINGEMENT IF YOU HAVE RECEIVED ANY WARRANTIES REGARD ING THE DEVICEOR THE SOFTWARE THOSE WARRANTIES DO NOT ORIGINATE FROM AND ARE NOT BINDING ON Fairlight AU S SOFTWARE SUPPLIERS e Note on Java Support The SOFTWARE may contain support for programs written in Java Java technology is not fault tolerant and is not designed manufactured or intended for use or resale as online control equipment in hazardous environments requiring fail safe performance such as in the operation of nuclear facilities aircraft navigation or communication systems air traffic control direct life support machines or weapons systems in which the failure of Java technology could lead directly to death personal injury or severe physical or environmental damage Sun Micro
136. CR LCRS or 5 1 Link Group the left and right channels will be allocated to left and right Link Group channels automatically Using VST Effects in XYNERGI Setup and installation Step 1 Install your plug ins as outlined by your plug in manufacturer The plug in will generate a file with extension DLL in the folder that your plug in has been installed most commonly located in C Program Files VSTPlug ins Step 2 Copy the DLL file and paste into C Program Files Fairlight Dream II Effects VSTs Step 3 Restart the XYNERGI PC Block Size You can control the size of blocks sent to your plug ins over the AudioBridge The AudioBridge connects the real time CC 1 audio environment to the block based audio environment in the PC where plug ins are performed Larger block size means more reliable operation but longer latency Fairlight recommends using 1024 samples To set block size click Setup General Preferences and click the Audio Plugins tab General Preferences l x Options Audiobase Playback Video Capture Projects Audio Plugins Latency 21 Sms Scan on each Startup D Rescan Cancel Scan Use the slider to set the Block Size Latency for each block size is shown Fairlight XYNERGI Page 277 PLUG INS REWIRE AND EXTERNAL PROCESSING November 7 2014 NOTE Latency is also affected by the processing delay of the VST plug in itself i e the time it takes for the CPU to execute Block size makes no d
137. ENT RANGE 0 000000 1 000000 SCALE 10000 000000 OFFSET 0 000000 POSTFIX BEGIN_PARAMETER VST ANYPLUG_01 air See BEGIN_SEGMENT Toggle text map RANGE 0 000000 0 499900 Three control SCALE 1 000000 segments are shown OFFSET 0 000000 net a ie 7 POSTFIX off POSTFIXONLY These can be BEGIN_SEGMENT replaced with more useful names here RANGE 0 500000 1 000000 though it is probably SCALE 1 000000 easier to do it in the OFFSET 0 000000 Plug in Editor POSTFIX on POSTFIXONLY Automation of Plug ins Enabling Plug in parameters for automation is described on page 253 Copying Plug ins Plug ins may be copied from one channel to another with all their settings followed faithfully To do this Step 1 Select the channel containing the plug in to be copied Step 2 Open the Config Plug ins menu by pressing the purple Plug ins button in the Mixer Megamode twice then pressing the config soft key Step 3 If there is more than one plug in in the selected channel use the Next soft key to select the right one to be copied Step 4 Press the Copy soft key Step 5 Select the destination channel for the plug in Step 6 Press the Paste soft key Clip based Plug ins Plug ins may be separately applied to individual clips The sound is written into new media on the hard disk and a new clip is placed on top of the original To do this Step 1 Press the wave key in the Editor Megamode Step 2 Press the Plugins soft key This will allow you t
138. F files associated with the MT Project If you want to transfer the MT project and all external audio files to QDC or to another XYNERGI system select Process Stuff Fufs All Clips or Process Stuff Fufs Selected Clips This will copy all external media into the Project s Fuf files Please note that this process can take some time depending on the quantity and size of external files that need to be stuffed Stuffing Fufs is a background task so you can keep working while Post V5 0 is processing However you cannot save your project until Fuf Stuffing is complete When dragging and dropping files onto the Post V5 0 timeline you may notice some files are Fuf Stuffed automatically Post V5 0 performs Fuf Stuffing automatically when it is required for QDC compatibility for example if you drag a file larger than 4 GB onto the timeline Post V5 0 users can also copy clips from one MT project to another In doing so the user creates a relationship between Fuf files belonging to one project and Fuf files belonging to another Using Save As with an MT file has the same effect and creates a Parent Child relationship between the original MT Project and the saved version To break any such inter Project dependencies select Fairlight XYNERGI Page 341 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT November 7 2014 Process Detach from the Post V5 0 menus After detaching your MT Project you can select Process Stuff Fu
139. FAIRLIGHT XYNERGI Post V5 0 Software Operator Reference Manual 6 November 2014 Issue 001 Important Notice COPYRIGHT The material in this document is copyright to Fairlight AU Pty Ltd and may not be quoted or reproduced in any form without written permission from the company Fairlight is a trademark of Fairlight AU Pty Ltd All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners LIMITED WARRANTY POLICY All the software and hardware provided with or purchased especially for Fairlight products has been tested for functionality Fairlight AU Pty Ltd will make its best efforts to correct reported defects for future releases subject to technical practicalities Fairlight AU will also replace any defective media on which software has been delivered provided that the item to be replaced is returned to the dealer who supported the product within 90 days of purchase Fairlight AU Pty Ltd makes no warranty or representation either expressed or implied with respect to the system s performance or fitness for a particular purpose In no event will Fairlight AU Pty Ltd be liable for direct or indirect damages arising from any defect in the product or its documentation Further Fairlight AU Pty Ltd will not accept any liability for any programs sounds audio recording or sequences stored in or used with Fairlight products including the cost of recovery of such data Product features and specifications are subject to change w
140. I Docs First Startup Even if someone else has installed the system for you there are some things you need to do the first time you start the system The manual mentioned in the previous paragraph includes a chapter on this subject called Launching XYNERGI for the First Time Please read this before using XYNERGI or at least have it standing by in case things get confusing Momentary and Latching This is one of the keys to speed Many operations can be done two ways Momentary means Hold down a key to open a mode do one thing in that mode then let go the key to exit the mode and go back to where you were This is skilful because it requires two hands but it s fast Latching means Press a key to enter latch a mode do some things in that mode then press the original key again to exit the mode This is not as fast but it s easier being one handed When we refer to momentary operation you ll see words like hold down and release When we refer to latched operation you ll see the word press or type which both mean press and release Fairlight XYNERGI Page 1 INTRODUCTION November 7 2014 Some Important Terms Throughout this manual we will use some terms that you need to understand Transport This refers to the movement of the system along the timeline For example when we put the transport into Play it means we cause forward movement along the timeline This applies to the disk audio tracks Pyxi
141. I surface Step 2 Hold down the Pot button by default it is labeled Pot L R Step 3 Select from the available functions that appear on the XYNERGI buttons Step 4 Release the Pot button Fader Function The standard fader function is to control the send level of the channel to its assigned buses i e Main Bus and sub buses Faders To Faders can also control a number of other parameters At any time there is an alternate fader function To activate the alternate fader function Step 1 Select the Mixer Megamode on the XYNERGI surface Step 2 Press and release the Faders To button It lights up to show the the alternate function is active To select the alternate function for the faders Step 1 Select the Mixer Megamode on the XYNERGI surface Step 2 Hold down the Faders To button until a menu of choices appears Step 3 Select from the available functions that appear on the XYNERGI buttons Input allows the faders to control the signal level prior to the disk recorder in a track feed Direct Output the faders control the direct out level of each feed Boom Level the fader controls the Boom LFE level for each feed OR Select an Aux bus or a reduction Sub Bus to control the feed send level to the selected bus Select a Sub Bus that has been set up for bus reduction to control the independent feed fader for that bus See page 201 for details on bus reduction When selecting a sub bus you may press the Auto Monitor soft
142. ING cc0cccceececescecessccnesscceeeceees 102 CHANNELS sccssccssssccsccscssccccscssscecseseeseees gg eee CONCERN UC CID Seir ee Other Clip Types sssssssesseessenesrrssrnesrnssrnsss 103 Introd cti Nai ied Bek ante cadee dts 33 i Editing Methods aoa eteni aiar rke 103 Set Number of Tracks in Project 33 Da Displaying Ch 34 Editing Tutorial siioni a 103 isp aying annels sinend eoveeeeeeeeeeeeneneneetiiin Tactile Editing Detailed Description 111 Pyxis Track Displaying Video 36 The Cursor 1141 Trak GOlOUIs ai scccessarotde asidelescevdciesavesblerceiccnss BO ey ee Ry ne es a ees Gut and Past wince i eiaa a a 112 Taek HEOR aei oeaan a teens 39 Co 117 Hiding Tracks ccccccccccsssssssssssssesessesesseseeeeseee 40 ee ER SAINT ue A a TO SA oE EEE TEE AQ S a a a aa ea aa YY ee a SDL EEA E AE creer renee N 119 S aa ce Pee eae eae ea 120 ia e E A E A E thatthe 122 Fade and Crossfade cccccceseeeeseeeeees 123 Glip Level oianean i aeaniiatiaas 134 Clip Equalisation ee eee 135 E QdISplA yiana ei 136 Editing on Multiple Layers 0 ee 139 The Track M nu ccccesseseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 140 XYNERGI s Quick Edit Layout 141 Importing from Other Projects 600 144 Gating Clips nesia niia 145 Replacing Audio Media 0 c ee 146 Undo and RedOne aa 147 Mouse Based Editing cccceeeeeeeeeees 150 The Edit Toolbar cccecsce
143. In point Step 3 Move the transport to the required Out point and press the To key to capture the Out point To make the In and Out points active Step 1 Press the Active In button to make the automation In point active The Auto Punch key appears Step 2 Press the Active Out button to make the automation Out point active The Auto Punch key appears if not already displayed Note you do not need to activate both In and Out points See below for consequences To enter record explicitly Step 1 Press the Auto Punch Key The transport will preroll the In Point go into automation record when it reaches the In Point if active then exit record at the Out Point if active If the In Point is not active the transport will still preroll and pass it allowing you to punch in when ready by pressing the rn key If the Out Point is not active the transport will go into record at the In Point then stay in record until you manually exit Fairlight XYNERGI Page 258 AUTOMATION November 7 2014 The transport continues to play after the Out point until you stop it manually To enter record implicitly Step 1 Move the transport to a location before the In point and press pLay The automation system will enter WRITE Or TRIM when the transport moves past the In point if active and return to READ when the transport moves past the Out point if active To exit record implicitly Step 1 Move the transport to a location before
144. N Fairlight XYNERGI Page 329 MIDI TRACKS November 7 2014 The Edit Events button toggles the Edit Screen between the MIDI Note Editor and the normal Track Display MIDI Events Play head Current length of MIDI clip being edited The Play Head is set to Unlocked when you enter the MIDI Note Editor This is to allow easy editing of MIDI events while in Play The lighter background shows the current length of the MIDI clip Notes can be outside this area if you have trimmed the original MIDI clip or copied its tail etc You can edit notes inside and outside the area The notes outside the area cannot be heard in the MIDI Note Editor or the normal Track Display Notes can be dragged horizontally in time or vertically in pitch Ranges of notes can also be selected with a mouse lasso marquee and dragged horizontally or vertically Notes dragged outside the limits of the MIDI clip will not be heard after editing but they are not erased The Note Editor Smart Pane aAA Em a hint Commands in the Note Editor Smart Pane are issued by clicking on the buttons Notes can be selected by moving the transport over them like audio clips In addition you can select a range of notes in time and in pitch with the mouse lasso The commands are described in detail below Fairlight XYNERGI Page 330 MIDI TRACKS November 7 2014 gt Quantises the S EEREFIRIRIN EI elected note s A y Tris to the current peta fast
145. NERGI Page 331 SAMPLING November 7 2014 Sampling Sound Design Sampler SDS Overview The Sound Design Sampler SDS integrates sample based playback of timeline and AudioBase clips into the XYNERGI environment It is a cost option to the system so the following only applies to systems where this licence has been purchased The Sampler is always active whether the SDS layout is visible or not Creating a New Project also creates an empty Sampler engine SDS works in mono and stereo A stereo sound can be either a multichannel clip or two mono clips on adjacent selected tracks that have the same start position and length All sounds will be automatically routed to the SDS Stereo output The SDS architecture consists of a Patch and Samples A Sample consists of a single sound either mono or stereo and its tone generator parameters A Patch is made up of one or more Samples Each of the Samples has a key map which determines which MIDI notes play it and which permits splitting or layering of the keyboard A Patch also has its own parameters for global control of all its Samples When a Project is saved the SDS Patch and Samples are saved in the Project as well Setup Setting up SDS requires the following steps Connect and configure MIDI keyboard Patch the Sampler output so it can be heard and recorded MIDI Keyboard Your MIDI keyboard must be installed before you run the Post V5 0 software Normally this is done
146. NGE Multiple channels source channels can be copied and multiple pasted destination channels Offsets may be used The rules are as follows Only enabled parameters are pasted The copied channels are pasted into the selected destination channels in numerical order For example if the source channels are 1 5 6 and the destination channels are 44 102 and 126 1 gt 44 5 gt 102 6 gt 126 If there are more destination channels than source channels we cycle again from the beginning of the source channels For example if the source channels are 5 8 and the destination channels are 44 56 77 and 78 5 gt 44 8 gt 56 5 gt 77 8 gt 78 Fairlight XYNERGI Page 262 AUTOMATION November 7 2014 e The source channels and destination channels can be of different types For example you can copy from a Track to a Bus or a Group to a Live In some cases the data cannot be pasted e g Lives can have an expander gate but Buses cannot e Timecode offsets may be used The amount by which the transport has moved in between copying and pasting is used as the offset The play head or cursor is used as the sync point for copying and pasting just as it is for clips e Plug in data may be copied If a plug in is pasted to a channel where it is not instantiated the software will do so automatically Jog Mix Allows automation to be read and written in transport modes other than play For example in Jog mode the system
147. NTROL XP_SECONDARY 5 0 00 1 00 SWITCH VST ANYPLUG_01 bass cut bass cuthis is a common CONTROL XP_SECONDARY 7 0 00 1 00 SWITCH VST ANYPLUG_01 stereo source of errors CONTROL XP_MAIN 1 0 00 1 00 SWITCH VST ANYPLUG_01 compression style style parameter display CONTROL XP_SECONDARY 8 0 00 1 00 LIN VST ANYPLUG_ 01 complex compl8_ names are shown CONTROL XP_MAIN 4 0 00 1 00 LIN VST ANYPLUG_01 compression compression after the control names Fadersets Each BEGIN_TEXTMAP BEGIN_PARAMETER VST ANYPLUG_01 compression Text map BEGIN _SEGMENT This controls the RANGE 0 001000 1 000000 display text in the SCALE 1000 000000 Pad OFFSET 0 000000 POSTFIX BEGIN_PARAMETER VST ANYPLUG_01 style BEGIN_SEGMENT RANGE 0 000000 0 333200 SCALE 1 000000 OFFSET 0 000000 Ther conte Multi Switch text map This is a 3 Switch POSTFIX vca POSTFIXONLY BEGIN_SEGMENT RANGE 0 3333 0 6666 SCALE 1 000000 OFFSET 0 000000 POSTFIX opto POSTFIXONLY BEGIN_SEGMENT RANGE 0 6667 1 00000 SCALE 1 000000 OFFSET 0 000000 segments are shown dividing the total range 0 to 1 by 3 The names are shown at left as vca opto and mod Immediately after creation the names would be shown as 1 2 and 3 These can be replaced with useful names here Fairlight XYNERGI Page 288 PLUG INS REWIRE AND EXTERNAL PROCESSING November 7 2014 POSTFIX mod POSTFIXONLY BEGIN_PARAMETER VST ANYPLUG_01 saturation BEGIN_SEGM
148. Screen e Click in the body of a track on the Edit Screen but avoid clips e Click a meter above the Edit Screen The last track you select in this way becomes the Current Track Mix To select for mixing do one of the following e Press a XYNERGI track live or bus button in the Mixer or Setup Megamode Note that selection for Editing and for Mixing is usually the same thing See Mix Follows Edit below How to Call To Call a channel do one of the following Fairlight XYNERGI Page 12 SELECTION AND CALLING November 7 2014 e Press the caii button in the Setup Megamode and select one channel e Press the car button on a fader e Inthe XYNERGI Mixer Screen click on a channel name e Inthe XYNERGI Mixer Screen double click on a channel s Pan EQ Dynamics Aux or Plug in graph e Inthe ILP2 screen click on a channel name Mix Follows Edit It s often useful to select channels for mixing and editing at the same time This is called Mix Follows Edit For one thing it s simple For another you don t need to remember all the different ways of selecting For standalone XYNERGI systems it s the recommended way to go As we add more faders and panels to a system it becomes a less obvious choice If you like to deal with one channel at a time most of the time go with Mix Follows Edit If you like to have different channels doing different things turn it off If you work with another person it s
149. Select signal path s Turn MULTI on if you want to change values on all the selected paths simultaneously Press the Write Trim button until Write is selected Press Play and then auto or vice versa The Level and Pan backgrounds go red and begin writing values Move knobs then press stop Enabled controls go into read Press Play Menu twice to review what you have just written Press the undo button to remove the new automation data Recording Mixes Recording a mix in real time using the automation to drive the processing parameters is a simple way of printing it to files It also has the advantage that you can record many deliverables on separate sub buses at the same time To record a mix it is necessary to patch the output of the bus in question to a set of tracks one track per bus element For example if SubBus 1 has 5 1 format you need six tracks to record it To patch SubBus 1 to a set of six tracks do the following Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Open the Patch I O page this is covered in the Chapter called Patching Signal Paths Select sub Bus Out at the lower left of the screen All the Sub Bus elements will be displayed in the upper left of the screen Select all the elements of Sub Bus 1 Select the right number of tracks in the upper right of the screen Click the Patch button Make sure the patched track are NOT assigned to Sub Bus 1 or you will hear feedback when monit
150. Smart Smart O reverse clips or clipboard Pane Pane page last undo range z l l ro of fo fo t 1 Display Clip EQ Clip Undo Erase Copy layering Smart Search last edit selected selected Pane Window clips or clips or range range Fade Trim Tail Head l Fade Split Trim Head Clip Tail Nudge Name Not Jump to Jump to 1 frame Clip active previous mark previous point a Po of 4 Nudge Mute Clip Add Jump to Jump to 1 frame Clip Level Mar next mark next point k Display Layering Toggles the display of clip layers on tracks This is explained on page 159 AudioBase Smart Pane Opens the AudioBase Smart Pane where you can search for sound effects audition them and paste them into your project This is explained starting at page 181 Clip EQ Smart Pane Opens the Clip EQ Smart Pane where you can add a four band equaliser to any clip This is explained starting at page 161 Fairlight XYNERGI Page 155 EDITING November 7 2014 Meters Smart Pane Opens the Meters Smart Pane This is the default display at the top of the Edit Screen It shows a meter for every track in the project Clip Search Window Opens a window showing every clip in the project plus ClipStore projects From here you can audition locate or paste any clip into your current project This is explained starting at page 184 Patch I O Page Opens a window where every signal path in the system can be accessed and connected to
151. Step 3 Turn the jog wheel to scroll through the list of available library presets for the selected type Step 4 Press the Delete soft key then press the ves soft key to confirm the operation Fairlight XYNERGI Page 246 AUTOMATION November 7 2014 Automation Introduction The XYNERGI automation system provides simple flexible and comprehensive facilities for recording and editing mix automation data All feed and bus mix parameters can be automated and played back in perfect synchronisation with the project audio In addition to the channel parameters bus assignments inserts and direct outs may also be recorded The XYNERGI automation system is designed to allow the operator to record all the static and dynamic parameter changes involved in balancing the mix of tracks played back from the disk recorder and live feeds from external sources Mix moves may be recorded on one or more parameters or channels at a time More moves may be added with each pass resulting in complex and detailed mixes that can be played back identically every time the project and mix are loaded This chapter does not cover basic operation of the mixer Refer to the chapters on Patching and Routing Faders On Screen Mixing and The InLine Panel for a complete overview of mixer operation Automation Basics below provides an intro to the fundamentals of the automation system Example procedures are detailed later in the chapter A
152. Step 4 Type a name for the new custom preset and press the Enter key Fairlight XYNERGI Page 128 EDITING November 7 2014 Alternatively use the custom presets pulldown menu in the Fades display as shown above Capturing Shapes To capture a fade means to extract all of its parameters making them available to apply to other clips Step 1 Click the capture button This will cause it to flash Step 2 Click the Clip Head or Tail button to capture the fade length and shape from the current clip The current clip is the one currently touching the play head on the active track Having captured those values you can apply them to any other red clip by clicking the clip button Untick shape or length if you don t want to apply it Cross Fades If a fade is placed on a clip and there is another clip layered underneath a cross fade between the two will automatically be induced Cross fade parameters can be modified with the soft key menu functions Induced crossfades are complementary that is to say the clip underneath is faded with exactly the opposite shape to the clip on top If the clip underneath already has its own fade overlapping the time of the upper clip s crossfade then no induced fade occurs In the following illustration clip layering has been turned on double press the takes button or View gt Display Layering Induced crossfade note lower curve No induced fade lower fade overlaps XFade N
153. Step 6 Click on the Centre Element Fairlight XYNERGI Page 204 MIXING November 7 2014 Bus Elements Element Name Short LR FB DU Left L 100 100 0 Right R 100 100 0 Centre amp 0 100 0 Surround Left Ls 100 100 0 Surround Right Rs 100 100 0 Boom B 0 100 0 Add Remove Up Down Reset Save l Step 7 Click the Down button until the Centre element is in the correct position below Right Step 8 In the same way move the Boom element to its correct position below Centre Step 9 Click Save When you restart the XYNERGI software the new Bus Format will appear in the Bus Format dialog and the Xynergi Bus Format Pad Menu Note The DU Down Up parameter cannot be altered unless you have purchased a 3D licence from Fairlight Bus Assign Overview Assigning a path to a bus means sending it to that mix destination Every path in the system has separate assignment to Main and each Sub Bus meaning that you can choose which paths go to which buses Bus to bus assignment is limited Sub Buses and Aux Buses can be assigned to the Main Bus but not to each other Main and MT Buses cannot be assigned to any other bus The Bus Assign screen is designed to assign multiple paths to one bus If you wish to do it the other way around one path to multiple buses use the Path layout in the Pad This is visible in the Editor and Mixer Megamodes This guide will show you how to assign paths t
154. Test DR2 LIB 10000 G FairlightAU Projects New Project 70 New Project70 DR2 LIB 35000 G FairlightAU Projects New Project144 New Project144 DR2 LIB 18001 G FairlightAU Projects New Project144 New Projectl44 DR2 LIB PREREAD G FairlightAU Projects New Project12 New Project12 DR2 LIB MAINRECO G FairlightAU Projects New Project12 New Project12 DR2 LIB 31000 G FairlightAU Projects New Project12 New Project12 DR2 LIB 36000 G FairlightAU Projects New Project12 New Project12 DR2 LIB 03003 G FairlightAU Projects New Project12 New Project12 DR2 LIB 37000 G FairlightAU Projects New Project12 New Project12 DR2 LIB ug G FairlightAU Projects New Project12 New Project12 DR2 LIB cag G FairlightAU Projects New Project12 New Project12 DR2 LIB en a AON EA Multiple reels can be selected at the same time and linked to a single project Step 6 Set up destination tracks If all tracks will be involved choose Track 1 as the destination Step 7 Click the Reconform button If one of the linked projects is not found an error message will be displayed and the reconform will stop If there is no audio between the source In and Out times for an event an error message will be displayed but the reconform will continue with the following events Additional Facilities Selecting a reel in the Reel Linking dialog also selects all of the EDL events associated with that reel Clicking the A button in the Sort group causes the EDL events
155. U signal by the internal crystal a timecode source or a digital audio source which is being recorded If the Position Reference and Motion References are not the same it is possible that they will drift apart over time This will be shown by a warning at the top of XYNERGI s video screen which indicates when an inconsistent timecode frame was encountered How XYNERGI Synchronises XYNERGI goes through a number of steps in achieving synchronization in play mode 1 Read the position reference and start loading up the corresponding audio on all active tracks 2 When ready start playing but with the outputs muted Use variable speed to reduce the error between the XYNERGI position and the Position Reference until it is very small 3 Switch to the Motion Reference for continued playback The system is said to be locked once this switch is made and the audio is unmuted 4 Warn of error status if the sync error increases if a reference signal is lost etc Fairlight XYNERGI Page 371 SYNC AND MACHINE CONTROL November 7 2014 Synchronization Conflicts When you are recording a digital source it must be synchronised to the same Master Clock Reference as XYNERGI or an overflow too many samples or underflow too few samples may occur at the input This causes a characteristic periodic form of digital distortion called a whisper A whisper sounds like a brief glassy or metallic buzz and occurs about once every few seconds dep
156. UAL 1 decrement_fader_set Then you can use CID_SW_MACKIE_BANK_DOWN in your remap file or trigger a different scripted macro Fairlight XYNERGI Page 379
157. VCA Groups can be shown on the Edit Screen using the following command sequence Fairlight XYNERGI Page 268 AUTOMATION November 7 2014 View Smart Pane Automation or by pressing the Auto Curves soft key in the Mix Menu Fader f Mute f iRPan teve OOOO t Click to toggle Click to remove Pull down menu Preset controls Edit Controls automation automation of automation graphs on or off display display parameter parameter To display automation curves on one or more tracks Step 1 Select the tracks where the automation is to be displayed Step 2 Click the Display button or press the Display soft key in the Auto Curves menu Step 3 Select the parameter to be displayed use either the pull down menu or a preset The pull down menu can also be accessed using the Target soft key in the Auto Curves menu Note that each signal path may show its own selected parameter The Display button is also used to turn the curves off To remove the display of automation curves Step 1 Select the tracks where the automation is to be displayed Step 2 Click the clear button or press the Clear soft key in the Auto Curves menu Curves for Buses Lives and Groups Mixer Tracks When Mix On is toggled ON the Edit Screen is appended with a set of Mixer Tracks corresponding with Live Feeds Buses and VCA Groups These displays are always shown at the bottom of the Edit Screen after the Tracks It is possibl
158. View Compound Stereo Meter Now you will see the new meters if you are using the new XYNERGI Mixer Screen Mixer Screen see above and on the ILP2 screen if you have one It will only be present if your Main bus has stereo format The Loudness metering has stereo LEQ meters and a mono LU meter The blue and white numbers give running reports on level according to ITU R BS 1770 standard known as LKFS They represent the subjective loudness of the audio program The right number gives a rolling average over 10 seconds and the left number gives an average over the entire length of program i e since you started playing The long term average level ignores anything below 18 dB so it won t go down when the system is in Stop You can reset the long term average by clicking the left number Note that readings amongst different brands of meters commonly differ because there are no agreed standards for some metering characteristics In particular the integration time of a meter which represents the length of time signal needs to be at a particular level before the meter reaches that level and the decay time when the level drops are not defined as standards For this reason the Fairlight meters may not match the levels shown by other meters Fairlight XYNERGI Page 309 METERS November 7 2014 Parameter Setup General Preferences Options Audiobase Playback VideoCapture Projects Scrollers Metes Themes Waterm
159. XIS TRACK November 7 2014 e Huffman Lossless For Standard Definition systems DV25 is the recommended setting For High Definition systems Huffmann Lossless is a good reliable option Invoke Video Capture Mode Unlike an audio recorder digital video capturing equipment must be in a specific Video Capture Mode in order to record an incoming signal In Post V5 0 you can invoke this mode by navigating to Setup gt Video Capture Mode General Preferences V Locked Playhead Bars and Beats Setup Media and Project Management Instruments Flip Decklink Field Order With Video Capture Mode ON your decklink card will act as a loopthough device and will display the incoming video signal This is in contrast to its normal mode where the Decklink card displays whatever video is already on the Pyxis track 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 With Video Capture Mode ON you may ARM the Pyxis track and record the incoming video signal in the same way as you would record audio Encryption Video files can be encrypted as they are recorded This will prevent anyone from seeing the video without applying the password If you wish to capture to an encrypted format do the following Step 1 Open the dialog box at Setup System Preferences gt video Capture Step 2 Enter an encryption password in the lower part of the page Confirm by repeating entry of the password Step 3 Capture a video file
160. a delay To insert a delay you may e Press the add delay button if it is visible OR e Type BLUE toc Each of these commands adds a 100 millisecond delay You can issue the command several times if you wish to add longer delays Common places where delays might be needed e After one or more jump commands e After bringing up a dialog box such as when naming a clip or a seed name Macro in Macro When you run a macro while recording another the macro trigger button itself is not recorded but all the keystrokes it plays back are Fairlight XYNERGI Page 168 EDITING November 7 2014 To access macro trigger buttons during recording you must have the macro layout displayed somewhere If you started recording your macro with the macro layout on the Numpad it will still be there and you can press any macro trigger button you like But if you started with the macro layout on the Picture Keys it will have disappeared as soon as you started recording to make way for other modes and megamodes To regain access to the macro trigger buttons press the macro button but NOT the fixed macro button because that will terminate the recording You may now press the macro trigger buttons and record their keystroke output One final complication if you have been using the last paragraph i e you started with macro trigger buttons on the Picture Keys the macro button you pressed to access the macro trigger buttons will be recorded i
161. a video clip in your timeline Step 1 Ensure that you have a Pyxis Track set up See the Chapter on Video Tracks for details Step 2 Position the transport where you would like the clip to start Step 3 Double click the item in the Search Results list Fairlight XYNERGI Page 189 GROUPING November 7 2014 Grouping Introduction Grouping is a fast and convenient method of controlling more than one signal path from a single fader or parameter control There are two types of groups Link Groups and Edit Groups Link groups are designed for controlling groups of feeds in multichannel formats Link groups simplify many tasks associated with working in surround formats and share many of the operational features of surround format buses Link groups can include up to eight members The simplest link group has two members and fulfils the function of a stereo channel Fader Groups are similar to other VCA or DCA grouping schemes and allow a master fader to control a group of signal paths Fader Groups can include any number of members Summary of Groups Type Member Type Master Fader Selection to Stem Structure Fold on Channel Panel Creation Link Group Live Feed or Link Group Select Master Yes Yes Track Feed Master level equal to first member Fader Group Live Feedor Fader Group Fader Group No No Track Feed Master menu key and soft Speaker Set key Link Groups Link Group Format When a link group is created you have the option to
162. accordingly in most cases this is set automatically and does not need to be changed Dream II 15178720 Yes 0000000 R Dream II Audio 212907624 Yes 500 Shared Yes 0000000 Dream II 619719412 Yes 0000000 Find SubFolders Convert to Media device Set Device Info J View CD Drives oii c recanoees Folder Fairlight XYNERGI Page 347 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT November 7 2014 Click here for folder display Pox cones To use a network connected device first create a mapped network drive or folder in Windows Explorer This can now be selected in the device panel and converted to a XYNERGI Media Device as above Please note that audio and video files can only be played from a designated Media Device If you try to play files from any other disk you will receive an error message Creating New Projects Once Media Devices have been set up on your XYNERGI system for Audio and Video you are ready to create a New Project To do this Press the Project key on your XYNERGI controller followed by the New softkey or select File gt New from the XYNERGI pulldown menu You will see the following dialog Will appear in title bar Choose a Project Type MT or DR2 By default your project is created in its own subfolder named with the Project Name This is the recommended practice as it helps keep your XYNERGI system organized If you prefe
163. aces the selected channels on them As you select and de select channels they dynamically come and go from the faders This makes it very easy to mix a large number of channels with a small number of faders Mixer Set has two modes Dynamic and Fixed Dynamic mode is always set first It responds to every change you make in the channel selection Fixed mode can be entered later It retains the last set of channels you placed on the faders in Dynamic mode but no longer responds to changes By default 12 faders are allocated to the Mixer Set but you can change this as explained below The first 12 faders are allocated to the Mixer Set If you only have 6 faders they will all be used If you have more than 12 faders the remaining ones continue to display the contents of whichever Fader Set you have chosen So you can have some fixed allocations and some dynamic ones To toggle Mixer Set on or off On the XYNERGI Center Section Step 1 Hold down the Fader Sets button Step 2 Press the 0 button Step 3 Release the Fader Sets button The same thing in latched mode Step 1 Press the Fader Sets button Step 2 Press the 0 button Step 3 If desired press the Fader Sets button to unlatch it if you prefer you can keep the Fader Sets layout handy for more changes To choose the number of faders dedicated to Mixer Set do the following Step 1 Press the Fader Sets button Step 2 Hold down the 0 button for a couple of seconds The numbe
164. ack selection may also be changed by holding the Track Sei key to the left of the jog wheel and turning the jog wheel or pressing the or keys This is useful for moving selections from one track to another The most recently selected track is always displayed The SEL Key The SEL key is used to display 48 signal paths at once You can use the Bank buttons to move its focus through all the tracks in the project Using the Mouse Clicking Screen Track buttons additive selection Press a dark onscreen track selection key to add that track to the selection Press a lit onscreen track selection to remove that track from the selection Fairlight XYNERGI Page 44 CHANNELS November 7 2014 Click and drag your mouse in the onscreen track selection pane to select deselect multiple tracks Click here to select track 8 for editing Click here to deselect Track 14 1 8 m ca iE Click any track here to select the Link Group starting at track 19 M ie Gee G ee G A To select a single track double click its number All other tracks will be deselected Clicking in a Track exclusive selection Clicking in the body of a track will make it the only selected track All other tracks will be deselected Clicking and dragging vertically will select a range of tracks but NOT if there is a clip under the original click then it will drag the clip instead You can get around this limitation by Shift Ctrl clicking i e
165. ader strip gives you a lot of information about the channel Steady State Under normal circumstances the OLED will show details of the channel being controlled by its associated fader The most common situation is shown below lt Pan Graph Pan Pot function lt 4 Mute Icon Meter In lt 4 Fader Icon q ___ User Name _______ System Name Fader Sets A fader set is a group of channels mapped to the faders The system offers up to 12 fader sets each including as many channels as there are faders on the system Selecting Fader Sets To select a fader set You can also select Fader Sets on the XYNERGI Center Section Step 1 Hold down the Fader Sets button Step 2 Press a button from 1 to 9 Step 3 Release the Fader Sets button The same thing in latched mode Step 1 Press the Fader Sets button Step 2 Press a button from 1 to 9 Step 3 While Fader Sets is latched you may choose any fader set by pressing a button from 1 to 9 Step 4 If desired press the Fader Sets button to unlatch it if you prefer you can keep the Fader Sets layout handy for more changes Fairlight XYNERGI Page 238 MIXING November 7 2014 Holding Faders To temporarily retain a selection of channels in their current fader positions when recalling a new fader set simply touch and hold the faders while pressing a fader set key The existing channels will temporarily replace those in the new fader set Press t
166. airlight XYNERGI Page 251 AUTOMATION November 7 2014 e Band 1 Q factor e Band 1 Shape e Band 1 Range e Band 1 Gain e Band 1 In Out To toggle the enables for all these controls simply press and release the button To access the controls individually hold down the button and select from the individual parameters that appear in the top row LR FB willl Pan Pan Spr ead Pan group partially Hold down buttons with red enabled triangles to display individual parameter enables Boom Press Exit to leave the Param Enable layout Using Screen Enables There are enable buttons on the Mixer Screen Clicking on these toggles a parameter enable group on and off ee Screen Enables The Edit Screen also displays enables for Fader Mute and Pan in the Solo Theme only Screen Enables Fairlight XYNERGI Page 252 Mix AUTOMATION November 7 2014 To display the Solo theme click General Preferences gt Options Themes Solo Enabling Plug ins Enable plug ins button in any of the the Param Enable layouts described immediately above This enables all plug in parameters When you are ready to record data for a particular parameter use Touch Write to access it Enable Signal Paths Enabling signal paths for automation allows you to control the paths on which automation may be recorded To enable Signal paths simply select them Select Signal paths using the buttons on the Xynergi Center Section or
167. always the ReWire Mixer The ReWire Mixer can accept up to 256 inputs from each of the connected ReWire clients Post V5 0 currently supports 96 of these ReWire inputs When a ReWire Mixer and ReWire Client are connected together transport controls and position information are automatically transmitted in both directions between the Mixer and Client s Fairlight XYNERGI Page 292 PLUG INS REWIRE AND EXTERNAL PROCESSING November 7 2014 Diagram of a running ReWire session ReWire DLL Client Application Reason RT Thread Mixer Application Dream II RT Thread GUI Thread driven by CC 1 96 Channel Audio Bridge from Fairlight CC 1 GUI Thread Engine Client Application Ableton RT Thread GUI Thread Using ReWire Devices in XYNERGI Setup and installation Step 1 Install your software as outlined by your the manufacturer Step 2 Run the software at least once in standalone mode Step 3 The software should now appear in the list of available ReWire devices Fairlight XYNERGI Page 293 PLUG INS REWIRE AND EXTERNAL PROCESSING November 7 2014 Launching a Rewire Application In order to patch a Rewire device a Rewire application must be installed first e g Reason Ableton Live Step 1 Click on Setup in the Post V5 0 toolbar Step 2 Select Setup Instruments to launch the dialogue box Your Rewire application should appear in this list Step 3 Cl
168. amplitude When ready release the Jog Disp button to apply the amplitude change Note Clips on multiple tracks can be amplitude adjusted at the same time If a range is present all clips wholly inside the range will be affected Clip Level Layout If you are doing a lot of Clip Level editing try pressing the clip Level button a second time This will cause a special layout to appear with many different level changes that can be applied instantly The Clip Level Layout will disappear when you select other menus but its presence will be remembered when you return to the Clip Level menu To remove it press the clip Level button again Level Normalisation Clips can be normalised to the maximum possible level using the Normal Level Soft key in the Clip Level menu Clip Equalisation XYNERGI provides clip based four band parametric Equalisation plus shelving which can be applied to a single clip or range of clips within a Project EQ is performed by the system on a copy of the original media therefore applying an EQ change does not affect the audio data on disk The clip based EQ is independent of the track feed mixer EQ Note Clip EQ is a multi track operation Applying EQ Step 1 Press the clip Eo button Step 2 Locate the cursor over the clip or define a Range of clips Step 3 Press the edit soft key Step 4 Select the appropriate EQ parameter This can be done using the Numeric keypad as shown in Choosing a Parameter be
169. any screen controls are available Automation Methods There are many styles for using automation Here is a summary of general methods it assumes that you have already enabled Mix On and you have selected the right Megamode see above Using the XCS Auto Button Step 1 Enable parameter s see Enable Parameters below Step 2 Press the auto button next to the Jog Wheel this puts the currently selected channel the one in the Pad into WRITE or TRIM see below Step 3 Press Play to move the transport automation data starts writing Step 4 Press stop automation stops writing and Auto buttons are extinguished The mix items that will be recorded are those for the enabled parameters on the Current Path only the one shown in the Pad Fairlight XYNERGI Page 248 AUTOMATION November 7 2014 Notes You can press Auto before or after pressing Play You can also take a signal path out of record by pressing auto again while play continues or take everything out of record by pressing the a11 read button See Leaving Automation Record below for other ways to exit record Using Fader Auto Buttons Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Enable parameter s see Enable Parameters below Press Auto on one or more Faders this puts them into WRITE or TRIM see below Press Play to move the transport automation data starts writing Press stop automation stops writing and Auto bu
170. any other path This is explained starting at page 61 Undo and Redo Undo reverses the effect of the last edit performed The system has an unlimited number undo steps Each one saves a complete copy of the edit list to disk and can be recalled later if need Redo reverses the effect of the last undo You can see a list of the available undo steps in your project using Edit gt Undo List You can see a list of the available redo steps in your project using Edit gt Redo List Erase Selected If there is no range this command will erase all clips on selected tracks that are touching the Play Head These clips are coloured red Warning This may include clips on tracks that are not visible at the time If there is a range this command will erase all clips and parts of clip on selected tracks that lie inside the range The same warning applies Cut Selected Cut is the same as Erase except that the clips are removed and placed on the clipboard ready to paste into the project at any time and on any track s If there is no range this command will cut all clips on selected tracks that are touching the Play Head These clips are coloured red Warning This may include clips on tracks that are not visible at the time If there is a range this command will cut all clips and parts of clip on selected tracks that lie inside the range The same warning applies Copy Selected Cut is the same as Cut except that the clips are not removed
171. ark Audio Plugins Compound Meter Source Control Room x Bar Graph Loudness Enabled v RMS Window 400 ms Scale Pek Target Reference 23 LKFS Shot Window 3 sec Integrated Gate 31 LKFS Scale 18 9 v The Compound meters are controlled by accessing Setup gt General Preferences Meters The compound meter contains 2 individual components a BarGraph and a Loudness meter The compound meters source can be selected as either the Control room source pre volume control or fixed to the main meter from the Source selection in the meter preferences The Width of the individual components is defined by the source and so if for example you have the control room selected as the source and change the monitoring source between a 5 1 main and a stereo sub bus the compound meter source and format will follow The Bargraph can be chosen from several scales Peak PPM BBC PPM DIN RMS The Bargraph can also be individually disabled if this component is not required The Loudness meter component offers BS1770 1 compliant loudness metering consisting of simultaneous momentary short term and infinite integration RLB2 weighted meters These meters are referenced to a target LKFS value and offer either a standard 18 9 LU scale or an optional 36 18 LU scale for material with a wider dynamic range e g long form Settings for the loudness component include RMS Window The length of the momentary slid
172. arks are created by pressing the Mark key which is visible in the Edit Megamode You can press it at any time in any transport mode Marks are shown above the track display in the Edit Screen as yellow pointers ao 000 00 IF OO 10 02 400 To locate to a Mark Step 1 Press the Go To button Step 2 Press the mark soft key Step 3 The Marks dialog appears on the Edit Screen Fairlight XYNERGI Page 75 TRANSPORT November 7 2014 Index Time Line 1 00 02 56 18 00 03 28 09 00 04 06 10 00 04 25 11 00 04 39 11 00 04 51 01 00 05 13 09 00 05 46 21 00 02 00 18 00 04 03 10 00 07 57 12 Video Locator 0 Video Locator 1 Video Locator 2 Video Locator 3 00 06 42 01 Video Locator 4 00 05 55 05 Video Locator 5 00 06 13 21 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 HOOOOOOOOOoOoo f There you can choose a Mark with the mouse or scroll down to it with the Jog Wheel or step down to it with the key Step 4 Having chosen your Mark press the Go To button again or ENTER to locate to the displayed timecode or Play to locate and go into play immediately or press Esc upper left key to close the dialog without locating anywhere anywhere While the Marks dialog is open you can do all sorts of other things to Marks like rename them change their timecode location remove them from the list and so on This requires mouse clicking and uses familiar dialogs Note double clicking with the mouse on a mark locates y
173. as in Step 2 or 2A above The same thing can be done with the mouse as follows To offset the Bend Point hold down ALT and Ctrl then click and drag the Bend Point to the left or right To warp the Bend Point hold down Shift and Ctrl then click and drag the Bend Point to the left or right If you offset the selected Bend Point the audio between it and its immediate neighbours is retimed Jogging left causes the audio left of the selected Bend Point to be speeded up and the audio right of it Fairlight XYNERGI Page 173 TIME DOMAIN PROCESSING November 7 2014 to be slowed down and vice versa If there is no Bend Point between the selected one and the end of the clip the end is used as a Bend Point If you warp the selected Bend Point the audio between it and the previous one is retimed All the audio between the selected Bend Point and the Tail of the clip is not retimed so it must slip by the same amount as you jogged Fairlight XYNERGI Page 174 TIME DOMAIN PROCESSING November 7 2014 Chopper Iriquois 2 Ext Approach Land Switch Off Ster Stretch 1 00 Chopper Triquoi Stretch 1 00 Chopper Triquoi Stretch 1 00 100 00 2 Ext Approach Land Switch Off Ster Approach Land Switch Off Ster 145 52 100 00 100 00 Add Pitch Change Original clip with Bend Points After Offset audio before and after second Bend Point is retimed Clip length is the same as the original After Warp
174. at This will toggle to the last non standard format you used if any Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Hold down the BLUE key while pressing the Talk button To access the Patch Page with Talk already selected as the destination press the Patch Source SOft key Now select any physical input or signal path and patch it to a Talkback circuit Fairlight XYNERGI Page 301 MONITORING AND TALKBACK November 7 2014 Setting Talkback Destination Talkback can be routed to any number of system buses To do this Step 1 Hold down the BLUE key while pressing the Talk button Step 2 Select Bus destinations on the picture keys Step 3 Press exit To toggle Talkback on and off use the Talk button in the upper right of the Center Section The button works in both momentary hold down while talking and latched mode press talk press again to toggle off Talkback Dimming The Dim control is always activated automatically when the Talk circuit is active Talkback AutoCue AutoCue causes Talkback to come on when the transport comes out of Play or Record This is useful for sessions recording talent where a lot of discussion is needed between takes To toggle AutoCue Step 1 Enter the Talk menu by holding down the BLUE key while pressing the Talk button Step 2 Press the Auto Cue soft key to toggle the function Fairlight XYNERGI Page 302 METERS November 7 2014 Meters Introduction Signal level metering is available in the
175. at the top of the Edit Screen Range Display This area contains three timecode values associated with Editing Ranges They are respectively the Range In time Range Out time and Range duration When Range is switched off these numbers show Fairlight XYNERGI Page 9 XYNERGI OVERVIEW November 7 2014 the last range that was created which can be restored by clicking the Range On key or selecting the Range On command from the Edit Menu Track and Clip Area This area shows a selection of the available tracks and the audio clips on them A complete description of all its functions is contained in the chapter on Editing page 102 Timecode Display This line shows the timecode at the left and right of the screen and also at the centre line or Play Cursor position To the right of the timecode display are two lights which change colour as follows Sync shows green if the system has a viable sync signal otherwise red Position shows green if the system sees a viable position signal such as timecode or 9 pin otherwise red Status View This area shows information such as the Project name and status and alert messages from the system Starting the System Step 1 Start the host computer PC by turning on its power switch The PC will boot the Windows operating system and display your PC desktop Video monitor s should be powered up and displaying the Windows desktop Step 2 Power on the audio interface box e
176. ated the master pan control is centred The Spread and Rotate controls become active when the link group is called These pan parameters offer unique and flexible panning controls to multichannel link groups See The Spread Control below e Holding down BLUE while touching controls for faders and aux sends sets them to 0 GB It also sets all group members to 0 dB removing any differences between their values e The AUTO key on the group Master enables automation recording for the link group master which will control all the members Only the Link Group master actually records automation data and any existing data for the other group members is preserved and read by the automation system Creating a Link Group Step 1 Press the Setup Megamode button Step 2 Press the Link Gp button The feeds that currently belong to link groups are shown in yellow or brown Feeds available for selection are shown in dark blue Step 3 Select the first feed of the group Its key lights up and all other buttons disappear except for 7 before and 7 after the one you selected maximum 8 feeds per group Step 4 Press one of the feed selection keys to make it the last feed of the group Link groups can only include track feeds or live feeds not a mixture of both Link groups can only include up to eight members which must have contiguous numbers e g 3 to 10 Step 4A Ifthe number of feeds you have selected corresponds to more than one Bus type e g Dolby
177. automatically set inversely proportional to the Pitch Factor The result is similar to speeding up or slowing down a Tape Recorder a WHAT The Formant Factor affects the frequency response of the result sounding a bit like a band pass filter on full spectrum audio Setting it to Auto will normally give neutral results where the spectrum of the audio is little changed Fairlight XYNERGI Page 171 TIME DOMAIN PROCESSING November 7 2014 Setting the Algorithm gives you options as to the parameters used in processing These are not directly visible but the choices in the menu allow you to try different settings There is no sure fire way of predicting what will work the best for any particular type of audio Quality determines how much time the system is allowed to spend on the process Better and best quality take more time than good ClipBender ClipBender provides real time non destructive processing of pitch and time variation with the ability to set break points like key frames in the audio It works on a single clip at a time The basic method is as follows Step 1 Create Bend Points within a clip These are used as divisions between different rates of time compression Step 2 Pull the Bend Points to another location this is done in two possible ways with different results as explained below Optionally add a Pitch offset which will also be heard when you play the clip Step 3 Play the audio The changes you h
178. ave requested will be heard immediately Adding Moving and Removing Bend Points All ClipBender operations can be performed in the Wave Menu To access them Step 1 Enter the Wave Menu by pressing the wave key in the Editor Megamode Step 2 Press the clipBender Soft key To add a Bend Point e Press the Add Bend Soft key or e Click the following menu item Process ClipBender gt Add Bend Point Bend points are shown as an orange vertical line in the clip To remove an existing Bend Point Step 1 Locate to the Bend Point using the Jump Keys Bend points must be selected as a J ump Target To do this e Hold down either of the Jump keys and select Bend Points from the Pad or e Click Edit Settings gt Jump To gt Bend Points Step 2 Press the Remove Bend Soft key Alternatively Step 1 Locate to the Bend Point using the Arrow keys Bend points must be selected as a J ump Target To do this click Edit Settings gt Jump To gt Bend Points Step 2 Click the following menu item Process gt ClipBender gt Remove Bend Point Note you can remove all Bend Points in a clip Fairlight XYNERGI Page 172 TIME DOMAIN PROCESSING November 7 2014 by pressing the Remove A11 soft key or by clicking Process gt ClipBender gt Remove All Bend Points When a Bend point is removed any time compression around it is also removed When all Bend Points are removed the clip goes back to normal playback apart from Pitch Bend see below To move
179. ayed paths Step 2 Click the current name of the path Step 3 Type in a new name Step 4 Accept the new name by selecting another path or by closing the dialog Alternatively to name a single track select it then click Tracks Rename Track Fairlight XYNERGI Page 60 PATCHING SIGNAL PATHS November 7 2014 Patching Signal Paths Overview Every signal path in the XYNERGI system originates or terminates in the Patching system This is shown in the system flow diagram on page 5 Connecting any signal path to another is done in the Patch I O page which is the subject of this chapter Note there is one exception to this statement assigning to Buses For Tracks and Live Feeds this is done in the Bus Assignment screen see page 205 For Talkback destinations it is done in the Talkback setup mode see page 302 The Patch I O Page To display the Patch I O Page e Press the Patch button in the Mixer or Setup Megamode to display the Patch dialog e Click Mixer Patching e Click the Patch icon on the Solo Toolbar Patch Icon Here the mouse is used to select sources and destinations then patch them together Note you can patch one source to many destinations but not vice versa Sources are shown on the left of the screen while Destinations are shown at the right Fairlight XYNERGI Page 61 PATCHING SIGNAL PATHS November 7 2014 7 Sources Destinations Track 37 Track 38 Track 39 Track 40 Track 41 Trac
180. ayed tracks the ones whose heights are non standard will retain their proportions to the new normal height Fairlight XYNERGI Page 39 CHANNELS November 7 2014 Hiding Tracks Tracks can be hidden and revealed To hide one or more tracks Step 1 Select the tracks you want to hide Step 2 Click the menu item Tracks Hide Selected Tracks To reveal a specific set of hidden tracks Step 1 Select the two tracks above and below the ones that are hidden Step 2 Click the menu item Tracks gt Unhide Between Selected Tracks To reveal all hidden tracks Step 1 Click the menu item Tracks gt Unhide All Tracks The Clip When audio is recorded or imported into XYNERGI it is displayed as a clip The clip is a reference to the audio data stored on disk Clips can be cut copied or moved without affecting the original audio data When new clips are recorded or pasted above existing clips the clips become layered one above the other Normally only the top clip is seen and heard during play back POST V5 now allows all layers to be seen simultaneously Display Layering To do this e Double press the Takes button in the Editor Megamode e Click the Layering button in the Toolbar Layering button e Select view gt Display Layering from the Menu Bar While Display Layering is on you can drag clips from one layer to another using the mouse The left end of the clip is known as the head The right end is the tail Clips also contain
181. be done as follows Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Press SEL choosing a signal path type Tracks Lives or Buses if needed Press a signal path button Press exit To choose a VCA Group Master press the Buses button then Bank Down until you see Grp buttons These are the VCA Masters Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Name a Single Path Press the green Mixer or Setup Megamode button Now press the name path button the QWERTY keyboard will be displayed Use the QWERTY keyboard to type a name for the signal path Your typing appears inside the Pad area in the white box at the right Press DEL if you want to completely remove the current name Press Backspace to remove one character of the current name When finished press ENTER to apply the name or Exit to escape without changing the name Naming More Paths The system keeps displaying paths so you can keep naming them Choose the next signal path you want to name the QWERTY keyboard will immediately be displayed Note you may need to press the path button TWICE Press exit when finished The Name List can be used to name a lot of paths in one place To use it click setup gt Path Naming Fairlight XYNERGI Page 58 CHANNELS November 7 2014 Fairlight XYNERGI Page 59 CHANNELS November 7 2014 Step 1 Scroll down to the signal path you wish to name You can use the search box in the upper left of the dialog to narrow the list of displ
182. ber of faders in your Mixer Set Step 3 Choose a number from 1 to 24 If you choose a number that greater than the number of faders in your system Mixer Set will not work correctly Step 4 If desired press the Fader Sets button to unlatch it if you prefer you can keep the Fader Sets layout handy for more changes Mixer Set Modes Mixer Set has three modes Variable Fixed and Off The procedure above turns Mixer Set on and puts it in Variable mode That means any change to channel selection will add or remove a fader from the surface If Mixer Set is in Variable mode toggling the 0 in Fader Sets OFF will put it in Fixed mode This means it keeps the current selection of channels but does not respond to any further changes in selection This can be very useful for putting channels next to each other but only selecting the ones you want to edit Choosing a Fader Set even re asserting the one that is illuminated on the Numpad puts Mixer set in the Off state Meter Sets The system supports up to 9 meter sets each containing 8 mono audio sources The meters from these sets can be displayed in the on screen Master Meters and on the optional hardware meters For more details see the Meters chapter on page 303 To select a meter set Step 1 Go to the Setup Megamode by pressing the green set up button Step 2 Press the Meters button Step 3 Press the Numpad number corresponding to the meter set you want Assigning meters to meter s
183. button The same thing in latched mode Step 1 Press the set button Step 2 Press the 1 2 or 3 button Fairlight XYNERGI Page 26 THE NUMPAD November 7 2014 Step 3 While set is latched you may store other timecodes by pressing the 1 2 or 3 button Step 4 Press the set button to unlatch it To retrieve locate to the timecode stored in a location momentary mode Step 1 Hold down the Loc button Step 2 Press the 1 2 or 3 button Step 3 Release the Loc button The same thing in latched mode Step 1 Press the Loc button Step 2 Press the 1 2 or 3 button Step 3 While Loc is latched you may locate to any stored timecode by pressing the 1 2 or 3 button Step 4 Press the set button to unlatch it Notes Before you Set a timecode into a Location its value is zero and can be used to locate there The stored timecodes include only whole frames so you can only use them to locate to frame edges This makes them inappropriate for holding fine edit points For these you should use Marks see Using Marks in the How To Chapter Basics section Fader Sets When used with external faders Fairlight Sidecar or Mackie fader blocks Fader Sets allow different combinations of channels to have their faders mapped to the control surface To activate a fader set momentary mode Step 1 Hold down the Fader Sets button Step 2 Press a button from 1 to 9 Step 3 Release the Fader Sets button The same thing in latched mode Step 1 Press the
184. by selecting parameters and signal paths in the usual way Use the From and To keys to select the range from which you want to copy The IN and out points are displayed on the LCD Press the Copy Mix soft key in the Mix menu Locate the cursor to the destination where you want to paste the mix automation data Press the Paste Mix soft key to complete the operation The rules are detailed above in the section about the Mix Menu Automation follows Clip Editing In addition to the Mix Copy functions it is also possible to edit automation data whilst editing the audio For Clips or Ranges of Clips their corresponding mix data can be Copied or Cut to another position if Data is included on the Edit Target key Step 1 Step 2 Step 2 Press the Mix Menu button Press the Target soft key until both is selected Edit audio in the usual ways and all enabled automation data for the sections of track you are editing will also be edited Note When a range is selected automation data is cut copied and pasted for the entire range whether or not clips are present Undoing the audio edit will also undo the automation change Copy Project Segment This command in the Edit Menu copies all audio and automation data on all channels in the system from a range to the cursor position To do this Step 1 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Make a range around the segment you want to copy Locate to the sync point in the range
185. by the automation system so they respond manually to their controls But when the console enters automation record they all go into Write or Trim Typically preview is used to audition new mix settings for one section of the project while other sections already have automation data It prevents the automation system from moving the controls that the user is trying to balance for the new section As soon as the user is happy with the new balance it can be written to the new section Preview state is engaged on enabled mix items by first pressing the Preview key and then enabling mix items using Touch Latch for individual parameters or the auto key next to a fader to enable the mix items for all parameters on the selected feed When enabled in Preview mix items are illuminated in flashing red Once in preview mode the mix items can be placed into Write or Trim by dropping in manually with the In key or automatically using the Active In and Out points see Programmed Automation below Once enabled for Preview mix items remain in that state regardless of transport starts and stops This is different from putting mix items into automation record which must be done again after each transport stop Preview is described in more detail below Safe When mix items are in Safe mode they cannot enter automation record They are always in READ or ISOLATE To put Signal paths into Safe mode Step 1 Press the Auto Safe button Step 2 Choos
186. call a channel from the mixer screen simply click on its tile or operate any of the controls inside it You can also call a channel using the CALL menu Track Feed and Live Feed Channel Tiles Each Track and Live Feed is represented with the track name and fader level plus indicators for EQ dynamics insert solo solo defeat and mute The parameter window within each channel tile provides a condensed display of the current settings of the Channel Panel for EQ dynamics or pan Click in the window to cycle around these three display options e EQ a graph displays the EQ transfer response e Dynamics a simplified transfer function for compressor limiter expander gate and the various combinations of these can be displayed Live 2 Dem 22E S Fairlight XYNERGI Page 218 MIXING November 7 2014 Pan a miniature display of the pan surround field with the red pan position is displayed The pan position changes in real time Track 5 gt S Buses The fader levels of the Main sub and auxiliary buses are displayed Signal level meters for the Main bus are also displayed Fat Channel The Fat Channel provides a detailed display of the signal processing and routing for the called channel Its only control functions are the fader and the Pan dot while the other graphics are for display only pa M OSC m pi 0 0 so ao a co Main P M a
187. cally at the Active Out point after pressing PUNCH or the PLAY key see Programmed Automation This works for enabled signal paths Fairlight XYNERGI Page 255 AUTOMATION November 7 2014 e In Prime mode use any applicable method to punch out of record e Press the All Read button in the Mixer Megamode to instantly place all mix items in Read e Press the mix on key to disable the mix automation system desperate measure but it works Transitions Using Glide When the automation system makes a transition from Write or Trim to Read Glide out data will be written to smooth the parameter transition as described below The Glide Out transition starts at the point where the system leaves record and finishes at the Out point plus the Glide Out time When a transition is made from Preview to Write Glide In data will be written The Glide In transition starts before the point that the system entered record In point minus Glide In time and finishes at the point where the system entered record Glide times are set in the utils menu On Stop Mix items currently in Write or Trim return to Read when the system leaves automation record using the Stop command The data that is written after the mix item returns to Read is determined by the on stop menu item in the Mix Menu If On Stop Hold is selected all the following mix events are deleted so the last written value remains in force for the rest of the project If On Stop Retu
188. ce You can position the loop up to over or after the Cursor position i e the Play Head where editing is normally performed In other words you can hear the audio up to a cut point or over the point or after it You can also set the length of the loop from half a frame up to 20 frames Here s how Step 1 Hold down Jog Step 2 Press a button from 00 to 9 Step 3 Release Jog If you press 0 the system toggles between linear jog and loop jog at your last loop width Fairlight XYNERGI Page 31 THE NUMPAD November 7 2014 If you press 00 the system sets loop jog at a width of half a frame If you press 1 the system sets loop jog at a width of one frame If you press 2 the system sets loop jog at a width of two frames and so on up to 9 If you press the system sets loop jog and increases width by one frame If you press the system sets loop jog and decreases width by one frame The Jog Menu Jog behaviour can also be controlled as follows Step 1 Hold down Jog Step 2 Use soft keys to control behaviour e Loop on off toggles loop and linear jogging e Loop width can be set in milliseconds minimum 20 ms e Jog Gear changes gear ratio for linear jogging e Jog Dim allows the level to be dropped automatically in loop jog Fairlight XYNERGI Page 32 CHANNELS November 7 2014 Channels Introduction XYNERGI provides six types of channel e Video Tracks include record and playback capability plus
189. channels muted before they no longer are To move channels from Mute to Solo Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Engage the Mute menu by either holding down the Mute button or pressing the sex button and then the Mute Menu button Select some channels to be muted Hold down the Mute Menu button Two new buttons appear beside it Press the Swap Solo button The Solo Menu appears and the channels that were muted are now soloed These channels are the ONLY channels soloed if there were other channels soloed before they no longer are Solo and Mute to SEL XYNERGI allows you to transfer your solo or mute selection into an edit or mix selection This is useful when you have used solo and mute to isolate a set of channels that need work and you now want to make some changes to them To make your Soloed channels also be the selected channels Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Engage the Solo menu by either holding down the solo button or pressing the sez button and then the Solo Menu button Select some channels to be soloed Hold down the solo Menu button Two new buttons appear beside it Press the to sEL button The SEL layout appears and the channels that were soloed are now also selected These channels are the ONLY channels selected if there were other channels selected before they no longer are To make your Muted channels also be the selected channels Step 1 Step 2 Engage the Mute menu by either holding do
190. ck and placing it across the Play Head it should be red Note this command is available on whole clips only Step 2 Open the Wave menu by pressing the wave button in the Editor Megamode Step 3 Press the Ext Process soft key Step 4 Press the soft key labelled with your desired external process This should cause the external process software to start come into focus and load a copy of the selected clip s media Saving Externally Processed Audio Back into XYNERGI The external process will have been working on a media copy of the clip you selected You now need to save the changes from your external process back to the media copy This may need a Save command from the external program or an Export command in which case you must make sure it targets the same piece of media Inside the XYNERGI software the selected clip will already have been re referenced to use the media copy so you should hear the processed audio as soon as it was saved in the external program Note there are no handles specified for external processing so if you think it might be necessary to trim the clip longer after processing it would be a good idea to do that before sending it to the external program Fairlight XYNERGI Page 296 MONITORING AND TALKBACK November 7 2014 Monitoring and Talkback The Monitor system provides summing and switching to handle speaker formats of up to 8 channels It offers the flexibility of multiple speaker sets of
191. ck at any time to automate complex editing moves The keys that play the macros back are called macro trigger buttons Please remember this otherwise things will get confusing quite soon The system supports 30 macros and provides different layouts to access them When macros are played back they execute the keystrokes as fast as possible This can result in race conditions where for example the editor is not quite ready for the mixer or vice versa If you find that a macro appears to be getting lost you may insert one or more delays of 100 ms Displaying Macros There are two different keys used for displaying macros They do almost exactly the same things e The macro picture button in the Editor Record Mixer and Setup megamodes e The macro fixed button in the upper right of the XYNERGI surface Fairlight XYNERGI Page 166 EDITING November 7 2014 Macro fixed button Either of these keys will toggle the macro trigger buttons on and off the XYNERGI Tactile Controller Macro trigger buttons can be displayed in two possible places e On the Picture Keys default You can show one or three rows of macro keys e Onthe Numpad To set the display location for macro trigger buttons do the following Step 1 Hold down the BLUE key and press either of the macro buttons The Edit Macro layout is displayed on the Picture Keys Step 2 The macro location button cycles macro trigger buttons between three settings 1 r
192. clips will place them at original pitch on a series of white keys You can also do the following e Grab a range of keys by making a range and pressing the grab soft key They will be assigned to the next available range of white notes Fairlight XYNERGI Page 334 SAMPLING November 7 2014 e Grab aclip at a different pitch by previewing the note at your desired pitch Then hold down the keyboard note that plays that pitch and press the grab soft key Working with Audiobase Within Audiobase you can perform a search scroll the results and Preview them on the keyboard Just as with clips on the timeline if the SDS Preview is active the highlighted sound in the search results list will be active on the sampler for playing listening To load an AudioBase sound into the sampler press the Grab soft key For convenience there is a new SDS Preview key on the AudioBase Smart Pane and a Grab key on the AudioBase PAD layout The keyboard behaviour for Audiobase sounds works the same way as for clips Removing Samples You can remove any sample from the keyboard using the delete soft key To select a sample for deletion simply play it on the MIDI keyboard Keyboard Mapping By default SDS automatically assigns Samples to keys as they are Grabbed But you have the option of using one of three modes for key assignment which are Single Split and Layer On the SDS layouts there is a Softkey that cycles through single Split and Layer
193. cord Test 1_a1 GLTO9DLYDDO_ FL_ Reccord Test 7_a2 GLTO9DLYDLO_F Nav FL_ Reccord Test 9_a4 GLTOSDLYDLO_H why FL_ Reccord Test 8_a3 GLTOSDLYDLO_G wa FL_ Reccord Test 10_a5 GLTOSDLYDLO_J way nwobNeYe Nw DRO Type a text string Click to sort the list Record Track Record Time here to only files by this parameter whose names contain that string Duratio 00 05 27 26 00 05 27 26 00 05 27 26 00 05 27 26 00 05 27 26 00 05 30 26 00 05 30 26 00 05 30 26 00 05 30 26 Drag headings left or right to re order the display Path D Fairlight AU DB Fairlightau D Fairlight4u D Fairlight AU D FairlightAU D FairlightAu D FairlightAu D Fairlight amp u D Fairlight amp u D Fairlight AU Fairlight XYNERGI Page 351 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT November 7 2014 Type Guid ightAU ProjectsiNew Project2 Media FL_ Reccord Test 6_a1 GLTOSDLYDLO_D way audio ightAU Projects New Project2 Media FL_ Reccord Test 5_a5 GLTOSDLYDDO_C way audio O0000000_00000000_E9640 ightAU Projects New Project2 Media FL_ Reccord Test _a4 GLTO9DLYDDO_B way audio 00000000_00000000_E9640 ightAU Projects New Project2 Media FL_ Reccord Test 3_a3 GLTO9DLYDDO_9 way audio o00000000_00000000_E9640 ightAU Projects New Project2 Media FL_ Reccord Test 2_82 GLTO9DLYDDO_8 way audio O0000000_00000000_E9640 ightAU Projects New Project2 Media FL_ Reccord Test 1_41 GLTO9DLYDDO_7 way audio 00000000_00000000_E9640 ightAU Pr
194. crossfade length will be 2 frames or 4 frames Fairlight XYNERGI Page 89 RECORDING November 7 2014 Step 6 Now we are going to repeat segments 3 to 5 Find where the take goes bad Press new split Audition for the best take Press next aud as many times as you need After finding the best take press x fade 2 fr Of x fade 4 fr Fault Conditions Things can sometimes go wrong especially with the crossfade interleaving Sometimes it s because you deviated from the normal command order Sometimes we don t know Below you can see some of the common fault conditions which occur with the crossfade commands Fade goes underneath Clip drops to lower layer Clip is cut off Fade on tail instead of head or vice versa All these conditions can be fixed by pressing UNDO three times then issuing the xfade command again You may need to do this twice and or say special magic words leave that to your expertise Auditioning can start in the wrong place if you forgot to press new split or if you went back to a previous edit point If so jump back to the split point and press new split again This re establishes the audition point More commands There are some extra audition commands to get easy access to particular takes aud again simply jumps back and plays so you can hear the same take again You could achieve the same thing by jumping back pop aud brings the current selection from the Takes Window to th
195. ctr1 Solo button in the Editor or Mixer Megamode to toggle the whole selection of soloed signal paths on and off The A11 Solo button does the same thing Press the Mute button in the Editor or Mixer Megamode to toggle mute on the current path Hold down the Mute button in the Editor or Mixer Megamode for a couple of seconds to display the Mute Menu with 48 signal paths that you can select after releasing Mute Press ctr1 Mute button in the Editor or Mixer Megamode to toggle the whole selection of muted signal paths on and off After pressing SEL you can select solo or Mute to display the Solo Menu and Mute Menu mentioned above Editor Screen Click a Solo button in the Editor Screen to toggle solo on any track Click a Mute button in the Editor Screen to toggle mute on any track Mute Solo Click a Solo button and drag up or down to solo lots of tracks Click a Mute button and drag up or down to mute lots of tracks Mixer Screen Click a Solo button in the Mixer Screen to toggle solo on any track Click a Mute button in the Mixer Screen to toggle mute on any track Fairlight XYNERGI Page 52 CHANNELS November 7 2014 Solo ON OFF Mute ON OFF Track 21 Track 22 Track 23 1 I I Solo Safe When a channel is soloed it works by muting all the other unsoled channels Sometimes you want to prevent this e g when channels returning reverb or other signals that affect the sound of the current chan
196. current stack of clips at the cursor position The top layer is selected but you may move the selection downwards using the Jog Wheel or the and buttons Pressing the pop soft key or clicking the on screen pop button brings the selected clip to the top of the stack making it audible Other soft key commands in the Takes menu Rotate sends the top clip to the bottom Reverse Rotate brings the bottom clip to the top on off toggles Clip Layering on and off Note you can use all the Takes menu commands whether or not Clip Layering is displayed You can move a clip between layers by dragging it up or down with the mouse Hold down the shift button if necessary to prevent any horizontal movement The Takes Editor The Takes Editor is a Xynergi layout for fast takes editing To access it Hold down shift and press takes The Takes Editor is particularly useful with in sync takes which all start and end at roughly the same time We assume that each take contains roughly the same content in any segment timecode range we are simply choosing which take is the best If your work is laid out differently the Takes Editor may not help you very much Fairlight XYNERGI Page 88 RECORDING November 7 2014 The picture above shows the start and end of the takes editing process At the beginning we have a number of takes of the same length stacked on top of each other At the end we have a composition of the takes where each
197. cut head cut tail use undo in between From and To Menu Now hold down the from button If you now pressed the mark soft key the system would display a list of marks that you could choose as the from point Instead press the time soft key Now use the Numeric Keypad to type a timecode from point The numbers will be displayed over the Edit Screen Now press Enter to lock in your from point For another useful feature press the gap soft key The range will expand to the left to reach the first moment of silence no clip in that direction Press it again to find the following gap in that direction Fairlight XYNERGI Page 104 EDITING November 7 2014 Trimming clips Overview A clip is the visual representation of a real piece of recorded audio located on hard disk Editing a clip means changing which part of the recorded audio is played When cutting or erasing parts of a clip you are reducing the amount of accessed audio Trimming a clip also means changing which part is accessed but you can increase or decrease the length that is played This is done by relocating the clip s head and tail thereby exposing more or less of the stored audio Get Ready Press the green Editor button Operation Press the trim button Locate the transport so that the cursor crosses the middle of at least one clip Identify the track containing that clip and double press its button to make it the only selected track If necessar
198. display in the FMC Fat Channel M OSC au nF as fa jc 00 50 0 PA Equaliser FMC Right clid e Double press the Path EQ Dyn or Aux button in the XCS Panel e Double click a graph in the XYNERGI Mixer Screen screen To remove the current zoom panel from the screen do one of the following e Right click the Zoom Panel e Click the Close box in the upper right corner of the Zoom Panel e Double press the button from Path EQ Dyn or Aux whichever is being displayed in the XCS Panel Fairlight XYNERGI Page 227 MIXING November 7 2014 Automatic Zoom Panel Display Zoom Panels can also be displayed automatically whenever you touch controls around the XYNERGI Pad To enable automatic display Step 1 Select the utils menu in the Setup Megamode Step 2 Press the zoom soft key until its label reads ON Step 3 Select your Zoom hold time using the Hold soft key The Pad controls determine which Zoom control is displayed Touching one of them will display the Zoom panel for the length of time set in the Hold soft key The Equalizer Panel EQUALIZER Library Fairlight XYNERGI Page 228 MIXING November 7 2014 The Dynamics Panel DYNAMICS Library The Pan Panel Library Use the mouse to move the red dot around the pan field Fairlight XYNERGI Page 229 MIXING November 7 2014 The 3D Panner There is also a 3D display for pan as shown be
199. e Clock In Range The Clock In Range indicator is green when the Clock reference is in range and red when the clock reference is out of range Position Sync When synchronising with an external machine such as a video machine audio recorder or digital audio workstation a positional source allows the machines to tell each other where they are The Position Sync Source indicator is green when a valid Position Sync Source reference is detected and red when the Position Sync Source is missing or invalid Synchronization Details XYNERGI can track the position and motion of external transports such as a video tape recorder timecode striped audio tape or a timecode generator The disk recorder will play in time with the Master Timecode source so that sound and picture coincide Position This is an absolute location reference to a sequence of pictures or audio It is used to determine whether the disk recorder is playing the right part of its Project For video position reference is usually provided by 9 pin Sony protocol from an RS 422 port For audio tapes LTC is normally used though 9 pin is also a possibility Motion The motion of an external machine is a measure of its speed and the disk recorder must move at the same speed to remain in sync This translates into producing the correct number of samples every second which is called the Master Clock rate This can be locked to a Digital Word Clock a video signal an AES EB
200. e 196 GROUPING November 7 2014 Displaying Group Membership The XYNERGI Mixer Screen screen always displays VCA group membership as shown below Assignment to Fader Groups Global Assignment Fader Group membership can be controlled globally using the Grouping Window To open this Press gt OR Click gt Fairlight XYNERGI Page 197 GROUPING November 7 2014 opi T So al dih TRACK6 bevxbx 3k3 l L bzvxbx 3k3 l C bevxbx 3k3 I R bzvxbx 3k3 I bzvxbx 3k3 l bzvxbx 3k3 I B Ungroup i Track 13 L Track 13 R Track 13 C Track 13 B Track 13 Ls Track 13 Rs Track 19 Track 20 Track 21 Track 22 Track 23 Track 24 Grp 7 Track 25 Track 26 Track 27 Track 28 Track 29 Track 30 Track 31 Track 32 Track 33 Track 34 Track 35 Track 36 sided re Grp 2 Grp 2 Grp 2 Grp 2 Track 37 Track 38 Track 39 Track 40 Track 41 Track 42 Track 43 Track 44 Track 45 Track 46 Track 47 Track 48 2 2 2 2 Track 49 Track 50 Track 51 Track 52 Track 53 Track 54 Track 55 Track 56 Track 57 Track 59 Track 60 Track 61 Track 62 Track 63 Track 64 Track 65 Track 66 Track 67 Track 68 Track 69 Track 70 Track 71 Track 72 Track 73 Track 74 Track 76 Track 77 Track 78 Track 79 Track 80 Track 81 Track 82 Track 83 Track 84 Track 86 Track 87 Track 88 Track 89 Track 90 Track 91 Track 92 Track 93 Track 95 Track 96 ap ap w f op me 1 2 7 8 Grp Grp Grp Grp Grp 7 18 19 20 23 Grp Grp 28 31 To use this window Step 1 Select a VCA group at the bottom o
201. e VST plug in standard is the most widespread plug in standard in use today with thousands of available plug ins The VST Host A VST host is a software application or hardware device that allows VST plug ins to be used in a logical context interacting with digital audio and MIDI elements XYNERGI is a VST host enabling VST plug ins to interact with the Post V5 0 mix environment As of this writing Post V5 uses Version 2 4 of the VST SDK Software Development Kit VST Effects versus VST Instruments VSTi A VST effect is a type of VST plug in that is used to process audio A VST effect might be a Reverb Compressor Flanger or EQ A VST Instrument is typically used to synthesize sound or play back sampled audio VSTi s have rapidly replaced hardware synthesizers and dedicated samplers due to their flexibility repeatability and low cost Using VST Effects on Fairlight systems Some typical scenarios include e Insert a VST Compressor or EQ plugin directly on a track or live input buses and Auxes Fairlight XYNERGI Page 276 PLUG INS REWIRE AND EXTERNAL PROCESSING November 7 2014 e Patch an Aux Output to a Live Input then insert an VST Reverb or Flanger on the Live input Now all channels feeding the Aux will be routed through the VST Effect Please note that Fairlight supports VST effects from Mono to 5 1 and beyond These can be inserted on mono channels or on Link Groups If a stereo VST Effect is inserted on a L
202. e current format is shown as a bright Soft key if all selected buses have have the same format and by speaker icons below Step 4 Select a bus format using one of the Soft keys If you select multiple buses with different formats no soft key will be lit brightly and speakers will appear foggy But you can still set them to any available format then the speakers become clear The Pad shows how many Bus Elements are left The Bus Format Dialog The Bus Format Dialog is another way to manage Bus Formats It is displayed when you select the Bus Format button in Step 2 of Setting Bus Formats above Alternatively click Mixer gt Bus Format in the menus above the Edit Screen Fairlight XYNERGI Page 201 MIXING November 7 2014 N NN eee ee Total 76 sp ax E Wee x The Bus Format dialog lists only buses with non zero format i e buses in use You can add a Sub Bus or Aux bus by clicking in the Ada group or by selecting an existing bus and clicking Duplicate this will create a new bus with the same format Format is set using a dropbox in the Format column the width column is a read only indicator of how many elements are used by each bus Clicking in the Reduce column checkboxes will toggle a Sub Bus into and out of Reduction Mode as explained below Click the Bus Assign button to open the Bus Assign dialog Bus Reduction Bus Reduction is used when you need to mix to mo
203. e cursor splits into two pieces showing the range that will be added to the timeline on selected tracks if you paste the clipboard Move inside another clip and press Enter The clipboard is pasted and the time it occupies is inserted into the track like splicing tape Investigate cut head and cut tail use undo in between Acceleration Overview Normal cut and paste can go much faster using modifier keys The modifier keys are ctrl SHIFT Track and Zoom To increase your speed practise using them with your left hand while your right hand uses the Jog Wheel and the Clip Head and Tail keys Get Ready Press the green Editor button Press the cut button to access the Cut menu Press the range button until it is OFF Operation Getting the right location track selection and view use at least half of your editing time This can be speeded up as follows Fairlight XYNERGI Page 110 EDITING November 7 2014 Jog Speed hold down ctr1 or SHIFT or both to jog ever faster Track Selection hold down Track up down while jogging Time Zoom hold down zoom while jogging Track Zoom hold down ct ri and zoom while jogging Locate the transport so that the cursor crosses the middle of a clip Make its track the only selected one If necessary use the Bank key The target clip should now be the only red clip on the screen Red means ready to edit Hold down Track and press cut clip head tail Keep holding while tur
204. e same way as when they were cut or copied Fade Head Inserts a fade from the head of the clip to the Play Head If there was already a fade at the head it is replaced The curve parameters of the inserted fade are the ones that would be visible in the Cross Fade Smart Pane To view this click view Smart Pane gt Cross Fade Fade Tail As Fade Head Split Clip This command breaks clips into two pieces This will happen to all clips on selected tracks that are touched by the Play Head Trim Head This command trims the Head of the clip s touching the cursor on selected tracks The clip is trimmed at the Play Head position Trim Tail As Trim Head Nudge The command moves selected clips forward or backward by one frame If there is no range it will affect clips on selected tracks touching the Play Head If there is a range it will affect all clips that are wholly inside the range on selected tracks Mute Clip This command toggles the Mute state of the selected clip s When a clip is muted it is shown darker and its audio is not heard If there is a range this command affects clips that are wholly inside the range on selected tracks Fairlight XYNERGI Page 158 EDITING November 7 2014 Name Clip Opens a dialog where you can rename clips Clip Level Opens a dialog where you can set the volume level of selected clips Add Mark Adds a timecode Mark to the timeline This can be used for location ei
205. e signal paths to make them safe Safety Zone In addition the Safe menu defines an Active Zone outside of which no automation data can be written for ANY signal path Fairlight XYNERGI Page 254 AUTOMATION November 7 2014 To set the Safety Zone Step 1 Enter the Auto Safe menu as described above Step 2 Use the In and out soft keys to set the timecode range that you wish to automate Step 3 Toggle the safety Zone soft key on When the Safety Zone is on the mixer receives no timecode outside the selected range This means it cannot read or write automation But inside the selected range automation functions work normally Recording Mix Data Mix Events Mix data is recorded as discrete events Each event occurs at a specific timecode location and relates to a specific mix item When a new mix is started there are no events recorded and all controls will remain static as the project is played Once mix data is recorded it is played back or read when the transport runs past the timecode at which the event is recorded If the transport is located to any point in the project the mixer state will reflect the result of all the events that have occurred from the start of the project to the current timecode The static snapshot recorded with every mix preserves the basic setup and balance of the mix Dynamic move events are added to this to create the final complete mix Entering Automation Record There are four ways to enter auto
206. e to control whether the Mixer Tracks are displayed To do this Step 1 Click Setup gt General Preferences gt Display Step 1 Select or deselect view Mixer Tracks on Mix On To see the Mixer Tracks you may do any of the following e Use the mouse and scroll bar in the Edit Screen to scroll down to the bottom e Select a Bus Live Feed or VCA Group in the normal way and it will become the current Track This will cause it to be displayed on the Edit Screen e Use Track Up Down by holding it and typing a number above the number of tracks Fairlight XYNERGI Page 269 AUTOMATION November 7 2014 Presets Presets are used to quickly access a particular parameter The first six buttons are provided with factory presets but you can replace them with your own To apply a preset simply click on it when the Display button is selected To create a preset Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Turn Display on if necessary Select a parameter to be displayed using either the pull down menu Click the Save button Click a preset button The system will request a name for the preset You may use the suggested name or choose your own The Curve Display l ra j 7 Fader Level Automation data is shown as a green line with the name of the parameter to the right of the cursor For switched parameters like Mutes the line is shown high when the channel is on and low when it is muted as shown below Mute When wr
207. e top of the stack and initiates audition So you can jog down the stack and simply press pop_aud to hear that take ADR Automation Dialog Replacement is described in its own chapter on Page 94 Background Recording Background recording allows you to make continuous background recordings of the Main Bus and or the armed tracks independently of all other activity in the system The background recordings can be brought into the current project as clips at any time Fairlight XYNERGI Page 90 RECORDING November 7 2014 Uses Recording the Main Bus can be useful for creating sound effects using real time controls on the system For example you can jog or shuttle the transport to create a speeding up or slowing down effect and this will be captured into the background recorder Recording the armed tracks means that you will capture every sound made by artists in your studio even if they enter early play a miraculous phrase that could never happen while the red light is on or crack a wonderful joke while you are listening to the creative director s opinion of the last take Licensing The Background Recorder is a system option requiring a licence The following applies only to licensed systems Please contact your Fairlight distributor if you to purchase a licence Cache or Linear Recording The background recording process has two recording modes Linear Just like a normal recording it captures everything from GO to STOP
208. e which it s difficult Keys like this CONTROL 16 CID_SW_CUT 1 CONTROL 250 CID_SW_ENTER 0O CONTROL 16 CID_SW_PLUS 0O CONTROL 15 CID_SW_00_48T 0 are clear enough they are cut enter and 00 But keys like this CONTROL O CID_SW_MFX4_61 0 CONTROL 656 CID_SW_CUSTOM_16 1 are internal macros built by Fairlight programmers No list is available Good luck with this Note after editing and saving your macro txt file you must restart the XYNERGI system before the macros are reloaded Fairlight XYNERGI Page 170 TIME DOMAIN PROCESSING November 7 2014 Time Domain Processing Bender Bender is a new suite of time domain processes available to all users in V5 software It comes in two flavours Render Bender is a high quality static process for pitch and time compression ClipBender is a real time processor that provides bend points within a clip and processes them non destructively Render Bender Render Bender can provide time compression without pitch change or vice versa or a combination of the two It works on the current clip the red one under the cursor or the selected range of clips To use Render Bender click the menu item Process gt Render Bender The following dialog box appears General Purpose X You may set a Time Factor affecting the length of the selected clip s and an independent Pitch Factor affecting the pitch If Varispeed is selected the Time Factor is
209. ead button The clip now fades from its beginning to the cursor position The shape or curve of the fade is that one shown above in the Smart Pane Current Head Fade 00 00 01 00 curve In the next section we will change this shape For now move the transport a little to the right and press fade tail These two commands are used to create most simple fades Press unpo this will simplify the next step Now press the copy button Locate to the middle of the clip where you placed fades Press the copy clip button Now jog about half the clip s length to the right and press Enter You have pasted a copy of the clip on top of itself The beginning of the newly pasted clip now interacts with the clip underneath inducing a crossfade You can see the line of the crossfade in the lower clip Move the top clip backwards and forwards to see how the fades interact Also go back to the Fade Menu and experiment by changing the fade in point Fade Shape Curves A fade s shape includes the following parameters X Level controls how loud the fade is compared to the full Level of the clip at the Crossover point Second clip Second clip Second clip Varying X level changes the loudness at the Crossover shown for clarity in a crossfade Fairlight XYNERGI Page 107 EDITING November 7 2014 X Point this controls the percentage of the fade s duration when it reaches the Crossover Point First clip Second clip Second
210. econd and will pull up to a sample rate of 44 144 when timecode runs at 30 frames per second It is advisable to choose a sample rate at which you want to make the final transfer of the Project Then record your material at whichever frame rate is going to be used during that final transfer The importance of this choice is that you do not want to compromise the quality of your final product by using sample rate conversion at the moment it leaves XYNERGI for the last time You should make these choices at the very beginning of the Project and then you may use any other combination that suits your purposes temporarily during the recording and editing process Fairlight XYNERGI Page 372 HUI SLAVE MODE November 7 2014 HUI Slave Mode Introduction HUI is a protocol invented by Mackie Corporation which allows different audio systems to control each other Many consoles and other devices now incorporate aspects of the HUI protocol and XYNERGI has implemented the full specification as a slave including the Universal Pro Extensions This allows the following functions to be controlled remotely e Transport states including Jog and Shuttle e Jog Frames i e the system can be jogged remotely e Fader levels bidirectional for motor control e Mutes Solos Track Arms Channel Selects note Channel Select will arm a track if the Arm or ADR menu is current e Channel names the first 4 characters to be displayed on the controller
211. ed box must be checked and each video Arm En box must also be checked on the desired device before the Video arm LED can be used to arm the video track Click the Eject button to eject tape from the desired device Note that controls will only appear if they are relevant to the selected device type Config Click the Config button to set transport ballistics for the different machine types TC Master When a machine M1 or M2 with this setting is placed on line it means that XYNERGI will control the transport of a 9 pin machine but will chase the position of that machine in all transport modes In this case the Config Window looks like this Fairlight XYNERGI Page 364 SYNC AND MACHINE CONTROL November 7 2014 DYW ASO0 P 00 00 30 00 Tracting Algerittia olay chase Power gt 125 Standard 8 tracks w On 10 minutes Locate Method Select between Cue Only operates only in Cue mode or Unlace unlaces a tape machine and puts it in Fast Forward or Rewind when the locate distance more than the number in the Lace Window This allows for faster locates for video tape recorders Lace Window Causes the machine to unlace if it is given a locate command outside the range of this window Unlacing allows the machine to travel faster and reduces head wear Tracking Algorithm Determines how the machine performs when searching for timecode Each machine may perform better with either choice of algori
212. ed to store the default setup of the XYNERGI on power up You may overwrite this file with any setup that suits your requirements Saving a Preset Follow these steps to save a preset Step 1 Press the Lib key to display the library menu and screen page Step 2 Click the chan EQ chan dyn all chan Of all console button to select the type of preset you wish to save Step 3 Click the save screen button and type a new name for the library preset The previously entered name is displayed by default To remove it press the DEL button Step 6 Click ox to save the preset or Cancel to cancel the operation Loading a Preset Follow these steps to load a preset Step 1 Step 2 Press the Lib key to display the library menu and screen page Click the chan EQ chan dyn all chan Of all console button to select the type of preset you wish to save Fairlight XYNERGI Page 245 MIXING November 7 2014 Step 3 On the screen click the preset you wish to load Step 4 Select the destination signal path s Step 5 Click the Apply button If you choose an all console preset it doesn t matter which signal path is selected because the whole console will be loaded Deleting a Preset Unwanted library presets can be deleted by following these steps Step 1 Press the Lib key to display the library menu and screen page Step 2 Press the chan EQ chan dyn all chan Or all console soft key to select the type of preset you wish to delete
213. eeeceeseeeeseeeeeees 155 Display Layering eeeeeeeeeeteeeeeesteeeeeeeaaes 159 Group CLIPS 2 0 eeeeecee eseese eese sete rer neer reren 160 Clip Equalisation eeseee eeen 161 EQ display ccccccceseceeseeceeeeeeeeeeeesaeeseneeesas 161 Mouse Edit MenuS cceceeeseeeeeeesteeeeeees 164 MaGroS exci hel aa ae asset eid ee 166 TIME DOMAIN PROCESSING 171 Benders aaan naa a renter reece rrr st 171 Using VocAlign Processing cee 177 Removing Clicks 0 ccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 178 Serato Pitch n Time 179 AUDIOBASE CLIP SEARCH CLIPSTORES QTUBE sccsseeeeees 181 AudioBase 2 cccceceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeetenaeees 181 Clip S arehis acc Artec aca aaeain ans 184 Clip BINS aa eaa area A dana eas 186 GClIPStOreS evisisfe te nates eee 186 QUDG wie aatra anaa naa Aa AAE aaa Paaa ed eed 188 GROUPIN Gis siccsiietictrcctnceranetis 190 ItrOGUCTION sannar aeaiiai 190 Summary Of GroupS cescceeeeeeeeeeeeeneee 190 Link GrOUupS ian aiai a aaa 190 Fader Groups VCAS eeeeeeeeeeeeee 196 Naming a Group ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeees 199 MIXING arni nunni ctv eestsaleccc cree teeasteasseenss 200 INtrOGUCTION iiia a aaa 200 BUSING ee iE A E e REEERE RIN 200 Signal Processing Using the Pad 208 Multi Rel e en a Sna 211 Screen Mix Controls sseesseeeseeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeee 212 Zoom PanelS iiaiai ianiai riaenr caritani
214. efine External Sources press the Source Setup button and the define Extsre soft key Define External Source Step 1 Choose the external source you wish to define Step 2 Choose the monitor set that will play it Control Room or Studio Monitor Step 3 Choose Analog Inputs or Digital Inputs at lower left Step 4 Choose the inputs you want to use at upper left and their destination Monitor Elements at the upper right Click Patch Step 5 If desired click Rename to name the set Step 6 Choose any other mode to exit Source Setup ALT Switches Overview The ALT switches in the Mon Megamode allow you to quickly change from standard settings to alternative ones The standard monitoring situation is Main speakers playing Main bus listening to all appropriate speakers You can choose an alternative speaker set an alternative source and or an alternative listening format This guide shows you how Get Ready Press the green Mon button Details To toggle to an alternative set of speakers press Alt spkr This will toggle to the last non standard speaker set you used or the first defined set if you haven t used any yet Note you can also do this by pressing MUTE and DIM together To toggle to an alternative monitor source press Alt source This will toggle to the last non standard source you used or the first defined External Source set if you haven t used any yet To toggle to an alternative monitor format press Alt form
215. els Allows you to select the format of the files being created by export Fairlight XYNERGI Page 356 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT November 7 2014 Mono Files 1 per track Stereo files 1 per track pair I Export Mono Stereo Files automatically choose Mix Tracks to a single Mono File gagag ix Tracks to a single Stereo File Bur Oooo Mix Tracks to Mono or Stereo tautomaticall eee 2ingle Multichannel File all selected tracks 1 Tracks Mono files 1 per track Creates a single mono media file for each track in the export i e all tracks or selected tracks depending whether the Selected Tracks Only checkbox is selected Stereo files 1 per track pair For each pair of tracks in the export a single stereo media file is created Mono Stereo files automatically choose If a track is mono and contains no multi channel clips its contents will be exported as a stereo media file If a pair of tracks are linked as a Link Group their contents will be exported as a stereo media file If a track contains a two channel clip its contents will be exported as a stereo media file Mix Track to a single Mono File All tracks in the export are mixed together to form a mono mix and this is recorded into a mono media file Mix Track to a single Stereo File All tracks in the export are mixed together to form a stereo mix and this is recorded into a stereo media file Single MultiChannel Fi
216. embers Scrolling Scrolling of the mixer screen can be done by e Dragging the scroll Bar with the mouse e Holding down ctri and pressing the Xynergi Bank buttons In addition the screen can be made to automatically scroll to show the current channel To set this up do the following Step 1 Select the setup Megamode Step 2 Press the cali button Step 3 Press the Scroll Mixer soft key Solo Mute Arm Soloing muting or arming a succession of channels can be done quickly as follows Step 1 Click on the arm mute or solo button of the first channel Step 2 Drag the mouse to the right or left to toggle the other channels You do not need to do this accurately as the horizontal position is the only criterion for choosing Fairlight XYNERGI Page 213 MIXING November 7 2014 Bus Meters The Bus Meter section shows all buses with non zero format see Bus Format on page 201 to learn about changing this As you add buses to your project the meters become thinner to accommodate them Fairlight XYNERGI Page 214 MIXING November 7 2014 Plug ins j Single click bypasses plug Double click opens screen GUI Right click opens plug in Config window Insert Single click toggles insert Aux Sends Double click opens Aux Zoom page Dynamics ee Double click opens Dyn Zoom page Bus Assign Single click on Main or any Sub bus to toggle assignment Solo Single click toggles soo Channel Name Sing
217. ems dating back to MFX3 systems running rev 15 x software If you are planning to swap projects with QDC systems always use the MT format when creating new projects Recording Files FUFs When using the MT project format on a XYNERGI system new audio recordings are stored in FUF files FUF stands for Fairlight Universal Format and a FUF file acts as an audio container with many individual audio files bundled inside it FUFs are saved as soon as the recording is complete At this point the audio media is written to disk but it is still not safe The clip s that appear in the edit screen immediately after recording are the ONLY reference to the recorded material They are stored in the Project MT file and until that file is saved the audio is not secure FUFs can only grow to a maximum 4GB to maintain QDC compatibility and new FUF files are generated automatically as required FUFs are automatically named based on their parent project So a project named MyProject MT might have FUF files named MyProject_001 FUF MyProject_002 FUF MyProject_003 FUF and so on FUF files are automatically created in the same subfolder as the MT project You must not delete FUF files unless you wish to remove audio from your project Fairlight XYNERGI Page 340 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT November 7 2014 When copying MT projects to a compliant QDC engine you must always be sure to copy all associated FUF fil
218. en e Click the Mix on button above the Edit Screen Solo Theme only Note In all methods described below it is assumed that Mix on has been selected Mix Duration The automation data for a project starts at a timecode location one frame after timecode midnight and finishes one frame before midnight However the system requires a minimum preroll of at least one second and it is advisable to start projects at a location of at least one minute after midnight to provide adequate preroll Static Snapshots Project Snapshot Every project contains a snapshot of the state of the mixer when the project was last closed When a project is opened the mixer state is updated and all parameters are recalled Mix Snapshot Every saved mix contains a snapshot of the state of the mixer when the mix was saved When a mix is loaded the mixer state is updated and all mix items are recalled So it is not necessary to write automation data for non critical items they will be reset to their correct static values when the mix is loaded A large number of complete mixes can be saved within a project How to Use Automation Where the Controls Are Many of the Automation controls are found in the Mixer Megamode They are only revealed when Mix On is toggled ON In addition the Faders contain their own Auto buttons for putting their channels in and out of Automation record the rotary controls around the Pad are touch sensitive for automation and m
219. ending how fast the samples are overflowing or underflowing The best solution to digital sync conflicts is to drive all digital devices from a single studio wide word clock signal Then all devices will have identical word rates so whispers never occur and digital interconnections may made with ease In this instance the sync HOUSE option is always used Pull Up and Pull Down The normal sample rates used by the digital audio industry are 32 000 44 056 44 100 48 000 and 96 000 samples per second The normal frame rates are 24 25 29 97 and 30 These last two may cause confusion when used together XYNERGI can alter its sample rates far enough to accommodate the small speed change caused by going from 30 to 29 97 frames per second and back again In other words if you slow down the frame rate from 30 to 29 97 XYNERGI can slow its internal sample rate to match This is called Pull up or Pull down depending in which direction you are taking the speed When you choose a frame rate you are telling XYNERGI what frame rate to expect To put it more accurately you are telling it the frame rate at which the chosen sample rate will be accurately reproduced For example if you tell XYNERGI that the NTSC frame rate is 30 in the Setup Menu and the sample rate is 44 100 it will pull down the sample rate to 44 056 if you feed in timecode at 29 97 If however you change the NTSC field to 29 97 XYNERGI will play at 44 100 at 29 97 frames per s
220. eo Tape Mode amp Normal Record Tape Mode Replace Mode Fairlight XYNERGI Page 82 RECORDING November 7 2014 Using Tape Mode If you punch into record over existing Tape Mode clips shown yellow the audio media will be replaced as you record If you continue to record past the end of the clip it will be extended If you punch into record in empty track space or over an Edit Mode clip shown red or blue the system will create a new Tape Mode clip Note if you extend beyond the end of a clip you may be overwriting media that has been trimmed from the end of the clip This is illustrated below Before clip exposes only part of the original media Recording reaches the end of the clip and continues clip is extended and now the hidden media is being replaced CAUTION This media might be used by other clips in which case their sound will change To prevent this you can use Replace Mode This is a variation where the system will not punch in until it is playing over a clip and will punch out automatically when it reaches the end of that clip This ensures that you cannot overwrite any media that is not exposed nor can you create a new clip by punching in too early To select Replace Mode select Process Tape Mode Replace Mode Creating Tapes If you would like to ensure that only one clip per track is created by recording you can start by making a Tape which is a Tape Mode that is ready to overwrite S
221. eration video files must be played from and recorded to a separate hard disk than the audio data WARNING If you attempt to play video and audio data from the same hard disk you will experience SEVERE performance problems The disk bandwidth required for video is governed by the type of video you wish to play back Some types of compressed Standard Definition video may play back from a single 10 000 RPM SATA drive while uncompressed High Definition Video may require a large fast RAID array Please contact your Fairlight distributor to discuss your specific needs Typical XYNERGI Drive Configuration 4 My Computer Sele a File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Q sxx Q E Search Folders Address My Computer System Tasks Local Disk C j Audio D 2 View system S Video E information 5 Shared Documents TH Add or remove j programs Dream s Documents G Change a setting Other Places My Network Places My Documents Shared Documents G Control Panel Designating Media Device When XYNERGLI is first started it displays a dialogue box requesting that a default project device be selected Select the devices Audio and Video you wish to use from the list of available drives To prepare the drive for use with XYNERGI select setup Media and Project Management from the XYNERGI main menu Select the device from the devices list and click on Convert to Media device Please also set the Device Info
222. ere Go To Timecode Step 1 Press the Go To button Step 2 Type a timecode address using the Numpad keys The number you are typing is shown on the Edit Screen If subframes are displayed type ten digits otherwise type 8 digits Fairlight XYNERGI Page 74 TRANSPORT November 7 2014 Numbers wrap around if you keep adding them Press Clear to reset all numbers to zero Press or to add or subtract what you have typed from the existing number Step 3 Press the Go To button again or ENTER to locate to the displayed timecode or Play to locate and go into play immediately or press Esc upper left key to close the dialog without locating anywhere Capture Timecode Sometimes you need to capture the current timecode and then do something with it For example you might want to move the transport exactly 2 seconds and 3 frames backwards To capture timecode Step 1 Hold down the BLUE key Step 2 Press the Go To button Step 3 Release the BLUE key You may now continue with the Go To Timecode procedure To complete our example of going back by 2 seconds and 3 frames continue like this Step 4 Type the button Step 5 Type the numbers 203 if subframes are not being displayed otherwise 20300 Step 6 Press the Go To button again or ENTER Play Of Esc You might press the Esc key if you simply wanted to capture the current timecode for another purpose such as setting an Edit Range Go To Mark A Mark is a stored timecode M
223. ers Step 1 Click Meter sets and choose a meter set you can change your choice later Step 2 Click the Define button The system displays the Patch I O page Fairlight XYNERGI Page 306 METERS November 7 2014 Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Sub 1M Sub 2 M Sub 3 M Sub 4 M Multi Set 2 Set 2 Set 2 Set 2 Set 2 Set 2 Undefined Undefined i J 5 bus 3 5 Meter Meter Set 2 Set 2 Undefined Undefined Sub 7 Sub 8 bi Track Track Track Live Live Aux Bus View Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Repro Send Direct Send Direct Send User set 1 set 2 set3 set 4 setS set 6 Aux Bus Aux Bus Sub Bus Sub Bus Sub Bus CR Mon view Meter Meter Meter Dir Out Send Dir Out Dir System set 7 set 8 set 9 CR Mon Main Main Main Osc Analog Out Send Dir Out Inputs Digital MADI Solo Instrument Inputs Inputs Out Inputs Step 3 Select the source type you want in the lower left section Step 4 Select one or more signal paths to patch to the meters If you wish to display Tracks or Live Feeds choose their Insert Send which always sends even if Insert is not switched on it s the Return that is affected by the switch Note the position of the insert in the channel which can be controlled on the Path Menu Choosing Direct Out is also possible but is subject to the Direct Out on off switch pre post switch and level control Step 5 Select one or more individual meters to patch in the upper right of the screen Step 6 Click the Patch button This pa
224. es Otherwise the QDC will not be able to find all of the audio data used in the MT project ox Fie Edit view Favorites Tools Help ay se X gt wi Search Folders ins Address lo D FairlightAU Projects Test 1 Go Folders x Name Date Modified Sb 314 Floppy A Test 1 MT 36 864 KB MT File 11 03 2008 1 39 PM F G Local Disk C E Test 1_0001 FUF 4 990KB FUFFile 11 03 2008 1 39 PM amp Audio D etax2003 O etax2004 B etax2005 O etax2006 E O Fairlight O FairlightAu O Media O ML3_AVT40a50 O MLS_AVTNewPlugin O Projects a EE aa EJ 2 objects Disk free space 101 GB 40 8 MB My Computer a H amp The picture above shows the typical file layout with an MT file The FUF file contains the audio while the MT file contains the Edit list mix information and automation files Note The FUF file will generally get much larger up to 4 GB while the MT file already contains a full complement of mix data even if mostly zero values and will only get bigger when automation files are saved When the first FUF file reaches 4 GB another one is automatically created Stuffing FUFs XYNERGI allows external files to be dragged and dropped onto the timeline Since these files are not recorded into the XYNERGI MT Project they are not automatically added to the FU
225. es Please see the section starting page 184 Fairlight XYNERGI Page 77 RECORDING November 7 2014 Recording Basics Overview XYNERGI lets you record on multiple tracks at the same time using the standard Play Record transport buttons to punch in It will punch in from Play or Stop and can punch out with gapless monitoring of playback There are two recording modes New and Tape Mode In New Mode each time a track enters record a new clip is created on that track If there is already a clip present the new one goes on top of the previous one The upper clip is always heard on playback In Tape Mode existing audio can be destructively replaced See the section on Tape Mode below To record on a track it must be armed Before being armed a track must have a source or patched input Patching Inputs Before you can record on a track it needs an audio source called an Input This could be a physical input or an internal path in the system such as a Bus element or an insert send The next section Patch Inputs to Tracks ilustrates patching by example Display the Patch I O screen by doing one of the following e Press the Patch button in the Record or Mixer Megamode e Click the Patch icon in the toolbar Patch Button Qgc_6122 e Select Mixer Patching The Mixer Screen shows a Patching dialog We are going to patch connect a physical input to the track where it will be recorded Fairl
226. es 335 Saving SDS eiriaa aia a iaa aaan 337 Media Considerations sesen 337 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT 338 IMtPOCUCHION inneni anran en 338 Basic File Commands n 338 Project Formats cieccc cist sceevedeieessbevasectedehewsss 339 MT Prete e a aa a AAAA 340 DR2 Project rinira nara Sa AEA 342 Waveform Profiles cceeccecseeeeseeeeeees 344 Revealing the Project File eee 345 Backup Fie Ser easa ek dene eis deacon 345 Automatic File Saving cccccceeeeeeees 345 Undo FIGS accciveartteviluantecvilercesbieastevehanedibecty 346 Video File Sineto enie etira aieia 347 Typical XYNERGI Drive Configuration 347 Designating Media Device cee 347 Creating New Projects c cccecceseeeees 348 Backup Project to Folder a 349 Media Scanning eeens 349 Detailed Media Management n 349 Importing Files aasieeerrssrrrerrrrnsrrene 352 EXPOM sisean AAA AA 355 EDL Management siessen 358 SYNC AND MACHINE CONTROL 363 INtFOCUCTION sienai enii 363 Setting up Machines ccccceeeceeseeeeeees 363 Machine Control IndicatorS csceee 368 Timecode Generator u eenen 368 Putting Machines Online a s 369 Editing with Machine Control 369 Timecode Setup cccceesceeeeeeesseeeeteneeeees 370 HUI SLAVE MODE sseeeeeeeeeeees 373 INtFOCUCTION se aiai i A 373 GU Pisses ceedtrariath e E 373 MIDI DeVICES 0 0 eee n A 37
227. es the media in the selected clips ih To replace the media of clips using that media file do the same as above but use the command Process Change Media All Related Clips Undo and Redo Post V5 0 has a powerful undo system that allows you to go back over your work in multiple steps Every time you record audio perform an edit or make a change to the automation data in your project the system captures an Undo File This is a file representing the project as it was before you changed it These files are written to disk and can be accessed at any time while the project remains open With some clever manipulation you can even access them later for information about this please see Undo Files on page 346 Undo The simplest way to undo a change is to press the unDo button located to the right of the Jog Wheel Redo Similarly reversing an undo can be done with the REDO button How many steps are available ALL of them since you opened the project How many steps are available ALL of them since you opened the project The Undo Menu and List You can see which edits are available to undo and redo by inspecting the Undo Menu and List To do this do ONE of the following Fairlight XYNERGI Page 147 EDITING November 7 2014 Step 1 Hold down the unpo button for a couple of seconds OR Step 1 Hold down the ctrl button and press the unpbo button OR Step 1 Hold down the BLUE Key and press the unpo bu
228. espective monitors The Dim button reduces the Control Room CR monitor level To control how much the level is dimmed Fairlight XYNERGI Page 14 THE XYNERGI TACTILE CONTROLLER November 7 2014 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Stop the transport Hold down the Dim button Turn the Jog Wheel The level is shown in the Pad Release the Dim button Fixed Level Monitoring Sometimes the monitoring environment must be set to a standard level and not changed This is called Fixed Level monitoring The Dim button is used to fix the CR monitor level When fixed it is unaffected by the rotary pot To turn on Fixed Level monitoring Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Stop the transport Hold down the BLUE key Press the Dim button To set the level for Fixed monitoring first set up an SPL meter at an appropriate position Step 1 Step 2 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 2 Stop the transport Hold down the BLUE key Hold down the Dim button Turn the Jog Wheel The level changes and is shown in the Pad Adjust to match the required SPL level Release the Dim button Release the BLUE key Fairlight XYNERGI Page 15 THE XYNERGI TACTILE CONTROLLER November 7 2014 Fixed Keys Fixed keys are normal switches with labels that do not change Their functions change a little but not as much as the picture keys LEDs show function and status Fairlight XYNERGI Page 16 THE XYNERGI TACTILE CONTROLLER November 7 20
229. est suited for music o Vocal best suited for voice o Varispeed varispeed mode e Press the preview soft key or Preview button to audition your settings in real time e Tempo changes speed without changing pitch Use the tempo slider to set the desired tempo or press the fit range soft key to capture the current range length or press the edit soft key to edit the output duration or type a value in the Output box e Pitch changes pitch without changing tempo Use the pitch slider to set the desired pitch e Press the process soft key or Process button to render your changes back to the timeline A new clip will be created and the original clip will be muted and preserved in the layer underneath Fairlight XYNERGI Page 179 TIME DOMAIN PROCESSING November 7 2014 Fairlight XYNERGI Page 180 AUDIOBASE CLIP SEARCH CLIPSTORES QTUBE November 7 2014 AudioBase Clip Search ClipStores QTube AudioBase and Clip Search provide different ways of managing sound effects and clips AudioBase has database capabilities which make it suitable for large scale and shared sound library capability Clip Search is more suited to fast storage of clips and groups and provides searching within the current project and attached library projects AudioBase AudioBase is a library database which allows you to search for WAV files on your Medialink2 server via a standard Windows network Once a WAV file has been found
230. est t cs note value Shows Click to toggle Click one of these Set the These commands advanced the track three buttons to set current Note act on the selected quantise display the mouse click Value used note s They set options between the action It can be by Add Note duration to the Piano Roll used to select Duration and current note value and normal clicked notes add a Quantise or add subtract the tracks note where you click note value s or delete notes duration where you click To set the To Trim the To Trim the pitch To change the Control how Set a playback velocity of the velocity of the of the selected MIDI channel of many octaves loop and start selected selected note s note s move the selected are shown on it Only MIDI note s move move the slider the slider to note s move the piano events are the slider to to show a show a positive the slider to played not show the positive or or negative show a channel Toggle the audio required value negative value value then click number then metronome then click Set then click Trim Trim click Set on and off Notes can be added To do this click the Select button in the Left Click group then click a note value from the array Now move the mouse cursor into the piano roll and you ll see the note length Click to create a note of any pitch at any position Deleting notes is done by selecting the Delete tool then clicking on individual notes Fairlight XY
231. eter values with the jogger wheel the actual sound is updated after a short delay e Turning the wheel faster increases the steps between values e There is no limit to the frequency Range for each band so you can have your low frequency higher than your high frequency if you want Fairlight XYNERGI Page 137 EDITING November 7 2014 e When you are using a Range it is possible to change one or more bands for the entire Range while leaving other bands as they were So for example the clips might have different settings for LOW EQ but the same setting for HIGH EQ Applying the Changes To apply your changes click the Apply button or press the apply soft key Only the bands whose Enable checkboxes are selected will be applied To escape without applying your changes click the Esc button or press the edit soft key to deselect it New or Old Whilst adjusting an EQ parameter it is possible to toggle between the new and old settings using the NEw oud soft key or clicking the New ola radio buttons until you apply the changes In or Out Toggle the EQ on and off with the in our soft key or the In Out radio buttons Copying an EQ The EQ parameters of a clip can be copied to another clip or Range of clips Step 1 Press the clip EQ button Step 2 Locate the cursor over the source clip Step 3 Press the copy soft key or click the copy button on the screen Step 4 The enable checkboxes allow you to choose which of
232. ets and general information about them is contained in the chapter on Meters starting page 303 Fairlight XYNERGI Page 28 THE NUMPAD November 7 2014 Jump by Seconds The Jump commands move the transport to special destinations including marks and clips You can also use Jump with the Numpad keys to move by a number of seconds by a single frame or to an exact frame edge To jump by seconds Step 1 Hold down Jump Left to go backwards or Jump Right to go forwards Step 2 Press a button from 00 to 9 Step 3 Press more numpad buttons if you want to make more jumps Step 4 Release the Jump button If you press 1 the transport jumps by one second If you press 2 the transport jumps by two seconds and so on If you press 0 the transport jumps by ten seconds If you press 00 the transport jumps by one frame If you press Clear the transport jumps to the previous frame edge unless it s already on one The REW and FF buttons can also be used to Jump by seconds This has two advantages over using the Jump keys a it s faster because there is no menu change or numpad layout change b it has priority over all other numpad functions except Blue which means it will work any time regardless of what is displayed on the numpad This makes it great for use in macros Fairlight XYNERGI Page 29 THE NUMPAD November 7 2014 Review The Review button causes the transport to jump back by a number of second
233. eveedusauacanceacaesa 12 Special Tra sbort Commands 70 Mix Follows EGit ccccccccsssssssssssssssessesssseseeeeeeee 13 pasi PERE E Sn E Call Foli 13 JUMPING iesenii iaaa a iR 70 AARO ON Sari da E E E EE 74 Tne XYNERGI TACTILE CONTROLLER14 RECORDING ccsssseseucnsseseeesssenseeaeees 78 INTOGDUCHON Jvciiioves et a 14 Monitor Secti 14 BASICS ses finite beech a aa su tteriew cous aa aAA 78 ued SCION Scie ies eo eR ee Recording and Editing Mulliple Takes sst 87 dane ka E ja ADR en a ma a a e 90 The Pado fchest cried r ee eiA 23 e a ah aeeete aia A SOM KEYS oneri nE ean EE EA A 23 VaN D A S E A A 94 Megamodes sssesrersrereseserininrererererenenenees 24 LGR O Fie dieeeiecsses oooh ctatean tasers cetaceans 94 The ADR List cccccessceseeceessseneeseeseeseesees 94 THE NUMPAD cescssecsessseecceeecsteeseeesees 26 ee Import Cue List from a Text File 94 Parameter Entry ccccccceseeeeeeseeeeeeeeteeeeeeaes 26 Import from CSV File eceeeeeeeeeereeeeeees 95 MOG ANG Sehere oterscaaaniva EA 26 Adding Cues Manually cccceeeeeeeeesees 95 Fader Sets en oda caasecaesaanteaiavagecdiieatoedt 27 Meter Set 28 ADR Preferences cccccccceceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 97 i 2 r es ae ee sc The ADR Display scssssssessssseesesseesesseeeseneeeee 98 Pe ge ance een S ALS EERO Exporting the ADR List sccssssssssssssssesseeees 100 REVIGW sep E EE ET AEA 30 Play JO gee aia endene e aa A T aian 30 EDIT
234. ew Method Making a crossfade between two clips requires that they overlap The new Xfade method creates the trim overlap at the same time as the crossfade The resulting crossfade is centred around the cursor This work is done in the Xfade dialog To open it e Press the Fade button e Press the xFade button or e Issue the command Fades Xfade Fairlight XYNERGI Page 129 EDITING November 7 2014 The Xfade dialog allows you to specify a Duration X Point expressed as a and X Level in dB Clicking the xfade button or pressing Enter completes the operation Navigation with Picture Keys Use the Picture Keys in the Xfade layout to place the cursor in the field you wish to edit Duration Xpoint or Xlevel dB Simple Example a butt edit second clip When the Xfade dialog is opened it shows the last used parameters The Duration is depicted with a yellow overlay to show the region of overlap As you increase the Duration the yellow area widens Fairlight XYNERGI Page 130 EDITING November 7 2014 After you press the crossfade is built around the cursor position Second clip Note the crossfade is not symmetrical about the cursor because X point was greater than 50 Xfade Looping You can automatically loop across your crossfade while building it This helps you to get the best settings To start looping e Press the button or e Click the button Pressing the Loop Nex
235. f beeps and corresponding streamer crosses is controlled in this dialog but the Preroll must be long enough to accommodate them If the Preroll is too short some of the beeps will be omitted See below for instructions on setting the Preroll The text referred to is that shown on the Decklink output from the Pyxis Track The font colour height control and Wrap Text control are used to customise the text display this text display is not shown on the Edit Screen Pyxis Window only on the independent monitor fed by your Decklink card if fitted Use the ADR Display described below to show text over the Edit Screen If you wish to set your beeps at a particular frame interval select spacing frames in the dialog shown above and set the interval you would like in the box that appears to the right The ADR Display The cat sat on the mat The ADR Display is a band across the screen which displays the ADR text and also gives an indication of the start point for the cue An example of the streamer is shown below The text is shown and the indicators converge on the centre of the screen arriving at precisely the In time of the cue To turn it on use the toggle ADR gt ADR Display Fairlight XYNERGI Page 98 ADR November 7 2014 Cycle The Cycle command is used to initiate ADR actions It will execute rehearsal recording and playback depending on the mode of the ADR system See below for details Preroll and Postroll
236. f the ADR list box 00 00 09 25 00 00 11 14 I hope you don t mind Andrew 00 00 10 11 00 00 15 11 Sunrise and sunset Peter 00 00 11 15 00 00 13 06 It s always been this way Peter 00 00 13 01 00 00 15 25 The long and the short John In the same way you can sort by From time To time or dialog alphabetically Click any one of these a second time to reverse sort ADR Preferences Once you have entered all the cues that you want to use you may set up your preferences by clicking the ADR Menu and selecting ADR Preferences The following screen is displayed Fairlight XYNERGI Page 97 ADR November 7 2014 Cues Single Multiple Cues single v Text preroll seconds Beeps Video Streamer Number of Beeps eamer white v Before Zero a eeni Spacing frames Cross white Zero beep Cross Beep Frequency Hz 1000 Gain dB 0 Frequency Hz 1500 Gain dB 9 Duration ms 40 Duration ms 40 Enable Beeps on first armed track Video Text Color black v Pyxis Pro ADR Height AutoScale Font P Lf Wrap Text Reset The main purpose of this dialog is to control beeps and the streamer The streamer is a pair of vertical lines moving across the Pyxis screen during the Preroll to the cue At the same time as the audible beeps the line extends upwards and downwards briefly The two lines come together at the cue point and a large cross is shown The extensions and cross can be given a different colour to the lines the number o
237. f the window Step 2 Toggle signal paths in and out of the group Step 3 Use Page Up and Page Down to access more Tracks and Live Feeds Step 4 To close this display type SsHIFT ctr1 v again or esc or right click on the window Assignment from the Virtual Channel Membership of fader groups can also be controlled in the Virtual channel which is accessed by right clicking a channel tile in the Mixer screen Fairlight XYNERGI Page 198 GROUPING November 7 2014 Click here to change the Fader Group of the called channel Zero means no Fader group membership Naming a Group Groups are named the same way as other signal paths using the Name Path function see page 57 Calling a Group Master Group Masters are shown in the path displays in NAME when called To CALL a Group Master do one of the following e Click its name on the Mixer Screen If not visible scroll the mixer screen Note a Group Master is only visible if its group has members e Select the Mixer Megamode Press seu Press Buses Press Bank Down to display the groups Choose a group Fairlight XYNERGI Page 199 MIXING November 7 2014 Mixing Introduction This chapter describes everything you need to know about mixing in the XYNERGI system The information is organised in sections as follows e Busing types formats assignment e Signal Processing using Tactile controls e Screen Mix Controls e Inserts and Direct outputs e
238. fault controls are assigned as Linear even if they have previously been assigned as Toggles or Multi Switches To set the control type click on one of the control Type buttons below The Multi Switch buttons are labelled switch 3 Switch 4 etc up to Switch 10 CT x OFF state m TER ON State ofF Off On When you choose Toggle the system displays dialog where the toggle display names can be set By default these are shown as xx You may replace them by e Typing new names e Clicking the Learn button to try automatically naming them e Clicking the Off On button to set the values to off and on What happens when you press the Learn button XYNERGI sends an off value to the plug in then an on value It waits to see if the plug in sends return messages If this happens the messages may contain useful toggle names but it is not mandatory in the VST specification for this to be provided and many manufacturers just send a value like 0 or 1 or nothing at all It s worth a try Fairlight XYNERGI Page 286 PLUG INS REWIRE AND EXTERNAL PROCESSING November 7 2014 Renaming a Control By default a control is given the name on the tile used to select it These names are supplied by the plug in manufacturer To rename a control click the Rename button then type your desired name and click ox Erasing a Control There is no explicit command to erase a control but you can do it by assigning a parameter then moving it s
239. frequency and level use Utils in the Setup Megamode To route the Oscillator to any system destination use the Patch I O page To route it to a Bus first patch it to a Live Feed or Track and arm the Track then assign the Live or Track to the desired destination Bus Noise Generator The system noise generator is toggled on and off in the Mixer or Record Megamode using the osc button To set noise type pink or white and level use Utils in the Setup Megamode Patching the noise generator to any point in the system is done using the Patch page in the same way as for the oscillator Using XE 6 Faders Introduction The XE6 Fader Extender has 6 faders for individual feeds buses or groups You can use up to four of these units together on one NAME system to control up to 24 signal paths at the same time Fairlight XYNERGI Page 235 MIXING November 7 2014 Installation of Xe6 faders is described in detail in the Installation manual supplied with your system and found in the folder C Program Files Fairlight Dream II Docs This chapter assumes you have successfully installed and tested your XE 6 unit s Fairlight XYNERGI Page 236 MIXING November 7 2014 Fader Controls OLED Soft Pot normally Left Right Pan Control but switchable to other functions Solo toggle Mute toggle AUTO button channel enters automation write trim preview CALL button brings channel to PAD Fader
240. from their original position They are copied to the clipboard ready to paste into the project at any time and on any track s If there is no range this command will copy all clips on selected tracks that are touching the Play Head These clips are coloured red Warning This may include clips on tracks that are not visible at the time If there is a range this command will copy all clips and parts of clip on selected tracks that lie inside the range The same warning applies Paste Clipboard This command pastes the clipboard at the current timecode position starting from the lowest numbered selected track Fairlight XYNERGI Page 156 EDITING November 7 2014 Note the clipboard includes a reference to the position of the playhead at the time of cutting or copying When pasting the system places that reference position in the clipboard at the current timecode This is illustrated below Clockface Before clips are cut copied Tracks 6 and 7 are selected and there is no range Clockface After the cut copy A ghost appears showing the clipboard contents Note that the sync reference is indicated by the position of the clips and the Play Head We select tracks 25 and 26 The ghost shows where the clipboard would go if pasted Fairlight XYNERGI Page 157 EDITING November 7 2014 Maid with the Flaxen Hair Kalirnba After pasting the clips are synchronised in relation to the Play Head in th
241. fs All Clips or Process Stuff Fufs Selected Clips to consolidate all audio into Fufs associated with your current project If you are unsure of what file a clip is stored in you can find out by selecting view gt Clip Search from the Post V5 0 menus You will see the filename associated with each clip in the list and you can click the Reveal File button to display a file in Windows Explorer Note that you can rearrange columns in the clip search window by dragging and dropping column headers You may need to scroll to the right to view all available clip search columns Always take great care not to delete files associated with your MT Project You may not be able to recover files once they have been deleted DR2 Projects DR2 projects are a new project format designed specifically for Post V5 0 DR2 files are not backwardly compatible with older Fairlight products although they can be converted to MT projects with FUF files as described above The DR2 file format provides enhanced capabilities compared with the legacy MT file format and all future development will focus on the DR2 file format Recording in DR2 When using the DR2 format new audio recordings are stored as industry standard Broadcast WAV Files XYNERGI Broadcast WAV Files are stored in the Media subfolder of the DR2 Project folder The WAV files are created when recording starts and they are refreshed at regular time intervals during recording When this
242. h Outputs soft key Click Analog Outputs Of Digital Outputs choose an output click patch Operation is the same as How To gt Recording gt Patch Inputs except that the Direct Output of the path you selected is already active on the Patch Page Note that Insert Sends and Returns may be patched to other channels within the NAME system not only sent to physical outputs Step 4 Press the Patch Outputs soft key again to exit To change the gain of the Direct Output press the gain soft key Use the Jog Whee1 to change the displayed number This will be expressed as REL relative if more than one output is active i e when a Link Group is selected Press Enter to apply The on orF toggle and the pre post toggle are available once the output is defined Oscillator The system oscillator has three channels e Tone e Noise switchable between White and Pink e Beeps used by the ADR program Each of the channels can be routed to a different point in the patching system The Tone and Noise outputs are both toggled on together while the Beeps are turned on and off independently by the ADR program The Tone and Noise channels use the same Level control see below The settings for Beeps are controlled by the ADR program To access these settings click on the menu item ADR gt ADR Preferences The system oscillator Tone and Noise channels are toggled on and off in the Mixer or Record Megamode using the osc button To set Oscillator
243. h in and out on the fly or use a range to set the start and end point of the recording To do this use the Auto Recording methods described on page 87 To record more takes of the same audio the easiest way is to use the Record Again function To do this use the method described on page 86 Viewing Takes To see all the layers of audio on your tracks turn on Display Layering This can be done as follows e Double press the Takes button in the Editor Megamode e Click the Layering button in the Toolbar Fairlight XYNERGI Page 87 RECORDING November 7 2014 Layering button e Select view Display Layering from the Menu Bar The Takes Menu The Takes menu allows you to bring different takes to the top of the stack for auditioning and editing To display the Takes menu e Press the Takes button in the Editor Megamode e Click view Smart Pane Clip Takes The system displays a Smart Panel showing the individual layers on the current editing track at the cursor position Color Track Layer Start Time Recorded Audio 5 Track 2 4 00 00 12 02 00 00 15 05 00 00 03 03 Recorded Audio 2 Track 2 3 00 00 12 20 00 00 15 11 00 00 02 20 Recorded Audio 4 Track 2 2 00 00 10 29 00 00 14 02 00 00 03 03 Recorded Audio 3 Track 2 1 00 00 12 02 00 00 14 11 00 00 02 09 As the transport moves to different places or as you select different tracks the Takes display updates at regular intervals to show the
244. h mid and High EQ Type Clicking the or buttons changes the EQ display to show different types of controls There are four types available each with its own sound Fairlight XYNERGI Page 224 MIXING November 7 2014 Dynamics The Post V5 0 Dynamics comprises three sections compressor limiter and expander or gate Make up gain Sidechain In Out Linking for Buses and Link Groups Compressor IN OUT Limiter IN OUT Gate Expander IN OUT Dynamics Toggle Expander or Each section has an independent IN OUT control All three may be acne the same time if required The transfer function of the dynamics is shown in the Mixer Screen channels the Xynergi Pad and the Dynamics Zoom screen Fairlight XYNERGI Page 225 MIXING November 7 2014 Aux Sends Satellite AV provides 12 aux sends Each send from each channel has an independent Pre Post switch and In Out control Aux 2 send IN OUT Aux Sends Zoom Panels It is possible to see more detail when adjusting EQ Dynamics and Pan control using Zoom Panels In particular numeric values for all parameters are shown and update as they are changed To display a zoom panel do one of the following it will stay on the screen until removed e Double click a graph in the XYNERGI Mixer Screen screen Fairlight XYNERGI Page 226 MIXING November 7 2014 NAME Mixer Screen Double click e Right click the corresponding
245. h to copy and paste tail button the selected clip to display a ghost Use the Jog Wheel or any transport control to locate to the point where you want to paste the tail If desired select another track to be the paste target but keep holding the copy tail below Step 1 Step 2 Press and hold the copy This will cause the tail of Step 3 button down Step 4 Release the copy tail button to make the edit Note Clips on multiple tracks can be copied and pasted at the same time Fairlight XYNERGI Page 143 EDITING November 7 2014 Cut Head Tail These keys copy the head or tail of the currently selected clip s The method for copy tail is listed below Level Adjust This key combines the Jog Wheel and the Level Trim function To use Level Adjust Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Start with the cursor touching a clip whose level you wish to trim Press and hold the Level Adjust button Turn the Jog Wheel to adjust the level trim displayed in the dialog box At the same time the clip waveform will change amplitude When ready release the Level Adjust button to apply the level change Note Clips on multiple tracks can be level adjusted at the same time If a range is present all clips wholly inside the range will be affected Importing from Other Projects The Import Menu allows you to copy clips from other projects into the current one Mixing data can also be brought in A project that
246. hange parameters as you like listening to the changes by playing the transport over the clip you may use solo and mute or fader levels to concentrate on a one or a few clips Parameters can be changing using the Value Grid see below or by dragging the curve points in the display Step 5 Apply the changes by clicking the Apply button Each equalisation band has three parameters you can change They are centre frequency of the band gain cut or boost at that frequency and Q factor sharpness of the band or whether it is a high or low shelf EQ display Left side of display When a clip s EQ is being edited the dots change from black to red as shown here They can be moved with the mouse changing frequency and gain values These values are updated in the value grid as you move the mouse You can also hear the changes in the audio if it is playing after a short delay Fairlight XYNERGI Page 161 EDITING November 7 2014 Range Filter Type Frequency Gain Q Factor Enables Right side of display The value grid shows the parameters of the EQ being applied to the clip or range of clips At any time you may A B the changes you have made with the previous EQ setting for the clip being edited To do this click the ola or New button For any clip whether or not it is being edited you can click the rn or out button to toggle its Clip EQ on and off If you want to escape without changing the Clip EQ settings clic
247. happens all but the last part of the recording is safely on disk This means that audio recordings in DR2 format are quite secure even if the project file is lost or never saved the WAV files are viable stand alone containers for audio media References to them can easily be imported and re synchronised in a new project or in any other project This process is described below as Recovering Lost WAVs 2101 File Edit View Favorites Tools Help ay sack Q wi ye Search Folders fz Address E D FairlightAU Projects New Project11 gt So Folders x Name Size Type etax2003 al media File Folder 4 etax2004 L E New Project11 DR2 33 337 KB DR2 File O etax2005 O etax2006 Fairlight O Fairlightau v ee nfl Aoo e gt 2 objects Disk free space 101 GB 32 5 MB 4 My Computer 7 The picture above shows the typical file layout with a DR2 file The Media folder which is automatically created by the system contains the audio in the form of WAV files while the DR2 file contains the Edit list mix information and automation files Fairlight XYNERGI Page 342 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT November 7 2014 aE View Favorites Tools Help ay Q wi a Search ii Folders m J D FairlightAUProjects New Project9 Media he Go Name Size Type AFL Recorded Audio 13_a1 1GC84Z6BC437X wav 766 KB WAV Audio
248. have mapped the whole fader set the mapping layout in XYNERGI will exit Mapping Multiple Faders A range of feeds may be mapped to a range of faders Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Press the Map key Press the cat key of the first fader in the range Hold down the first selection key in the range and double press the last selection key The paths selected will replace the paths previously assigned to the sequence of faders starting with the fader selected Mapping Link Groups If amember of a link group is selected to map to a fader only the link group master is assigned If a link group is included in a range the group takes up only one fader Short Cut for Mapping a Sequence You can map a sequence of channels as follows Fairlight XYNERGI Page 239 MIXING November 7 2014 Step 1 Press the Map key Step 2 Hold down the ctrl button and press the first Track Live or Bus key that you want to map on the XYNERGI surface The system automatically maps the following sequence of channels to your entire current fader set Any Link Groups that it finds are mapped as single items Inserting and Deleting Faders While mapping a menu is displayed Press the Insert key to insert a path at the current fader position Press the Delete key to delete the current path from the fader set Press the Blank key to leave the current fader un mapped Mixer Set Mixer Set is an option that takes over some of your faders and automatically pl
249. he Preview soft key is ON the MIDI keyboard ignores samples that are already loaded and only previews new ones There are two sources of sound for SDS e From clips that are already on a track e From Audiobase Working with a Track Select a Track with clips on it Position the transport so that one of the clips is touching the cursor The clip can be previewed or loaded into SDS Preview To preview the clip Step 1 Make sure Preview is on If not press the Preview Soft key in the Pad Step 2 Play notes on your MIDI keyboard The clip under the cursor will play as you press the notes changing pitch as you move up and down the keyboard As you move the transport to highlight a new clip it immediately becomes the target of your MIDI keyboard Preview will play the clip at its original pitch on the keyboard s Preview Root note To Set this do the following Step 1 Click Setup General Preferences Step 2 Click the sps tab General Preferences x ee Options Audiobase Playback Video Capture Projects _ Scrollers Meters SDS Themes __ Keyboard Left Right C6 Preview Root C3 v Ee Auto Assign Assign Root C2 w Fairlight XYNERGI Page 333 SAMPLING November 7 2014 Step 3 Set the Preview Root to be the keyboard note which original pitch is previewed Step 4 Exit the dialog by clicking the close box in the upper right corner Note ADSR functions are available while you are previewing See
250. he cut clip button The clip is now on the clipboard Move the transport The clip s ghost shows where it can be pasted Press another track number The ghost moves to the new track Press Enter to paste the clipboard contents once or many times Now press cut head or cut tail The front or back of the clip is now on the clipboard Press Enter to paste the clipboard contents Using Ranges Overview A range is the time span between two points called the IN and OUT points or the From and To points When a range is present the button labelled cut clip of copy clip erase clip etc changes to cut range copy range erase range In this situation the basic editing commands cut copy and erase target the parts of clips that lie inside the range Some other commands like Nudge Fade and Clip Level target only whole clips that lie inside the range Pressing the range button toggles the range on and off Operation Press the green Editor Megamode button Press the cut button to access the Cut menu Press the range key to turn it OFF Locate the transport so that the cursor crosses the middle of at least one clip Identify the track containing that clip and double press its button to make it the only selected track If necessary use the Bank key Press from A range is begun at that point Now Jog to the right The range is extended and the clip goes red inside it Press to The range is now fixed Investigate cut range
251. he fader set key without holding a fader to resume the normal fader set Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Mapping Fader Sets Select the setup Megamode and press the Map Faders button Select a fader set to map or continue with the currently selected one The car key on the first fader will flash to indicate that it is ready to be defined Picture keys on the XYNERGI panel will be displayed The path currently assigned to the fader will show purple Use the picture keys to select any feed bus or Group Master and assign that path to the current fader If necessary press the Track Live or Bus buttons and or the Bank up down buttons to access more paths The next fader is automatically selected and the path assigned to it flashes Continue to assign faders in order or select a fader out of sequence by pressing its caLL key and making a selec tion on the selection panel Use the picture keys to select any feed bus or Group Master and assign that path to the current fader If necessary press the Track Live Or Bus buttons and or the Bank up down buttons to access more paths You can press XYNERGI s exit button to stop changing the current map at any time You can fill the remaining faders in the set by holding down ct ri and pressing or clicking a path button This will use the path you pressed and the following ones until the set is filled It will take Link Groups into account using one fader for each group When you
252. he first track Step 3 Press the numbers soft key Step 4 Select the second track Move This command uses a range exclusively It moves all layers of the audio from the source track to the destination track replacing the audio that was there Step 1 Select the source track Step 2 Create a range in which you want to move the audio to the destination track using the From and To buttons Step 3 Press the move soft key Step 4 Choose the destination track The audio in the range is moved from the source track leaving it blank within the range and placed on the destination track replacing the audio that was there Copy This command uses a range exclusively It copies all layers of the audio from the source track to the destination track replacing the audio that was there Step 1 Select the source track Fairlight XYNERGI Page 140 EDITING November 7 2014 Step 2 Create a range in which you want to copy the audio to the destination track using the From and To buttons Step 3 Press the copy soft key Step 4 Choose the destination track The audio in the range is copied from the source track to the destination track replacing the audio that was there XYNERGI s Quick Edit Layout The Quick Edit Layout provides a faster way to perform basic edit functions It combines a number of the most used commands into one layout to reduce the number of keystrokes needed To use the Quick Edit Layout do the following Step 1 Sta
253. he new data Press the Glide Out soft key and use the jog wheel numeric keys or keys and press Enter to change the Glide Out value Update Sys File Saves the following system settings to the following files Monitor_Sources TXT patching and formats of external monitor sources Speaker_Sets TXT patching and formats of all speaker sets Setup_Variables TXT Call Follow state and XYNERGI brightness Automation with Link Groups Mix Link groups are useful for dealing with groups of feeds carrying audio in a multi channel format such as stereo or 5 1 See Grouping on page 190 for an overview of link groups Link groups should be established before any automation is written If members are added to a group when automation data is present on either the master or the members the data on the members is erased If the link group is destroyed or unlinked after automation is recorded for the group the au tomation data remains on the group master but not the slaves Only the parameters on the link group master can be automated the slave member s parameters follow the master Editing Mix Copy Mix Copy allows a selection of automated mix parameters to be copied from one time location and channel selection to another Fairlight XYNERGI Page 265 AUTOMATION November 7 2014 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Press the mtx on key to enable mix automation Select the mix items you wish to copy
254. he upper function in the box which relates to the chosen type of signal processing i e Path EQ Dyn Aux Of Plug ins Fairlight XYNERGI Page 208 MIXING November 7 2014 soe sr Be 3k87H2 iid B 00 CT 00 00 HMF BELL TE HMF BELL 800Hz IE ja 0 9dB LMF BELL a i i TR 171Hz ee 3 7 8 7 In the EQ case they control EQ frequencies and gains These parameters are shown in Black type with a blue background The lower set are shown grayed out The ALT key While aut is held down the lower parameters become active These parameters relate to the upper parameters e g the word IN below Band 1 Gain toggles Band 1 IN HF HI SH 3k87Hz HMF BELL 800Hz Non ALT LMF BELL 17 1Hz LF LO SH 50Hz 4 ALT Many axr functions like Band 1 IN are switches These are toggled by touching the rotary knob Others like Q factor are controlled by turning it In addition the Pad Soft Keys are displayed The upper ones are toggles like EQ IN while the lower ones are alternative pages of controls The Pad Soft Keys can be locked into place using the Pad Lock button in the Mixer Megamode or by a second press of Path EQ Dyn Aux Of Plug ins Fairlight XYNERGI Page 209 MIXING November 7 2014 Using SEL Press and release the SEL button while the Mixer Megamode is active While SEL is active the Path EQ Dyn Aux and Plug ins buttons are available This means that SEL i
255. hem with the mouse To delete a locator drag it far to the right and drop it when the delete icon is displayed Delete icon Video locators are also displayed in the Edit Marks list Locators list and can be edited there The Video Scroller The Video Scroller is a line of frames across the bottom of the screen centered at the current frame These frames cover the same width as the audio tracks The Video Scroller is useful because you can see specific frames and scene changes coming up and use it for easy location To Display the Video scroller hold down the Shift and Zoom buttons Now the track buttons allow you to select audio scrollers and a Video Scroll button appears at the lower left of the picture keys Use this button to toggle the Video Scroller on and off screen Fairlight XYNERGI Page 321 PYXIS TRACK November 7 2014 trim slip fade nudge Hold these down Zorm and click here Another way is to click OR e Press the sex button then toggle video Track on the Picture keys it s at the lower left where ctrl is normally placed Track 26 Video set Track source Editing with XYNERGI Buttons Editing commands can be used with the video track the same way as they are with audio The copy and cut commands can be used as with audio to put video clips on the clipboard but unlike audio clips they can only be pasted back to the video track NOTE Cross fades between two
256. hen press the custom preset soft key then use the Jog Wheel to scroll through the list of custom presets Each of the custom presets if any exist will be shown in turn and its shape displayed in the Fade panel Stop scrolling when you have loaded the preset you want To save the current shape to a new custom preset Step 1 Press the Preset soft key then press the save preset soft key Step 2 Type a name for the new custom preset then press the Enter key To change the shape stored in a custom preset Step 1 Recall the custom preset as described above Step 2 Adjust the shape at the head or tail of the clip or capture new ones from a clip Step 3 Press the Preset soft key then press the save preset soft key Step 4 Now immediately press the Enter key to save the current values over the selected preset This will overwrite the preset and the software will give no warning Using the Mouse and Screen While the Fade mode is active the screen displays shapes and controls for creating and editing fades Fairlight XYNERGI Page 126 EDITING November 7 2014 Duration g th IV Shape Fade Head Step 1 Select a track and move a clip under the cursor Step 2 Press the fade button if not already on Step 3 Click the Head button in the screen display it s near the upper right Step 4 Adjust the shape of the Head fade described below Step 5 Click the Apply button The fade described in
257. here is always a Main set usually your large Control Room monitors You may also create many other sets and choose them whenever you like The system remembers the last non Main one you chose and calls it the Alternative ALT Speaker Set Press the Control Room Dim and mute buttons together This will toggle between the MAIN and alternative monitor speakers The Mon Megamode button indicates when any alternative monitor function ALT Speakers ALT Format ALT Source is being used You can still use the MUTE and DIM buttons for their normal functions Choose Speaker Set The system allows you to define many speaker sets There is always a MAIN set usually your large Control Room monitors You may also create many other sets and choose them whenever you like This guide shows you how to select any defined speaker set It will become the Alternative ALT Speaker Set Step 1 Press the green Mon Megamode button Step 2 Press the Mon Setup button if it s not already lit Step 3 Choose one of the speaker sets named on the Soft keys MAIN refers to the main speakers and the others can be called SpkrSet1 2 etc or may have been given names You can only choose speaker sets that have been defined i e given physical outputs These sets have a dim light in their soft keys To define more speaker sets press the Config Monitors soft key and work on the Mixer Screen Configure Monitor Speaker Sets The system allows you to define many
258. hich of the open ClipStores to target Preview from Windows Explorer Audio files can be previewed directly from Windows Explorer To do this click File gt Import gt Audio File s This allows you to open up a custom Explorer window allowing Preview Auto Preview click and hear and Audition of individual audio files on the Windows file path You can then either drag drop multiple files directly to the timeline select Paste to place the selected media at the playhead or select Import to place the media at the playhead and exit the dialog Fairlight XYNERGI Page 187 AUDIOBASE CLIP SEARCH CLIPSTORES QTUBE November 7 2014 E gt orere Meda M gt WA gt gt Organize v New folder gz mM EE Desktop a Name Title Contributing artists Album i Downloads ps J Jan 2012 Recent Places l adr wav 2 Cybernetic wav oo Libraries L SWISH 02 Bamboo f Documents T i l SWISH 03 Bamboo d Music q Pictures i E Videos a Homegroup jE Computer amp Local Disk C ca Media M G2 This Year fs05 E rr manat Auto Preview Preview Paste Audition File name Cybernetic wav d WAV wav MP3 mp3 AIF aif k QTube QTube is a video database that Fairlight systems can access A licence is required from Fairlight and from QTube See your Fairlight dealer for details if you wish to purchase this option To set up QTube first click Setu
259. hs using the Name Path function see page 57 By default the path keys will show the names you have given but you can also choose to show the system name Track 1 Live 1 etc or a combination of system and user name This is done in the Setup Megamode using the style button a triggle that cycles through the three naming styles M1 Setup Setup user p insert proj seip mon config Showing More Paths SEL The SEL key can be used to display 48 paths at the same time It works in momentary mode hold down or latching mode press and release Action Keys fade clip fade fade head tail Action keys cause an immediate result They are always coloured orange Fairlight XYNERGI Page 22 THE XYNERGI TACTILE CONTROLLER November 7 2014 The Pad Sho i bh SG 3 This displays all mixing information relating to the current path the most recently selected path It also displays the labels for the soft keys see below The ALT keys work with the Pad to extend its functionality ALT 4 f The Pad is the main input device for processing mixing and automation For information about Pad mixing see page 208 For information about automation using the Pad see page 274 Soft Keys Soft keys display the soft menu options for the current mode Range Length The soft key label immediately above or below the soft key tells you what its current action will
260. i IN 0 of 4 name USB Audio Device GDB 09 43 00 gt MIDI in device 0 GDB 09 43 00 gt manufacturer 65535 GDB 09 43 00 gt product 65535 GDB 09 43 00 gt version 1 1 GDB 09 43 00 gt name USB Audio Device GDB 09 43 00 gt Midi IN 1 of 4 name USB Audio Device 2 GDB 09 43 00 gt MIDI in device 1 GDB 09 43 00 gt manufacturer 65535 GDB 09 43 00 gt product 65535 GDB 09 43 00 gt version 1 1 GDB 09 43 00 gt name USB Audio Device 2 GDB 09 43 00 gt Midi IN 2 of 4 name USB Audio Device 3 GDB 09 43 00 gt MIDI in device 2 GDB 09 43 00 gt manufacturer 65535 GDB 09 43 00 gt product 65535 GDB 09 43 00 gt version 1 1 GDB 09 43 00 gt name USB Audio Device 3 GDB 09 43 00 gt Midi IN 3 of 4 name USB Audio Device 4 Fairlight XYNERGI Page 374 HUI SLAVE MODE November 7 2014 GDB 09 43 00 gt MIDI in device 3 GDB 09 43 00 gt manufacturer 65535 GDB 09 43 00 gt product 65535 GDB 09 43 00 gt version 1 1 GDB 09 43 00 gt name USB Audio Device 4 GDB 09 43 00 gt Midi Out 0 of 5 name USB Audio Device GDB 09 43 00 gt MIDI Out device 0 GDB 09 43 00 gt manufacturer 65535 GDB 09 43 00 gt product 65535 GDB 09 43 00 gt version 1 1 GDB 09 43 00 gt name USB Audio Device GDB 09 43 00 gt Midi Out 1 of 5 name USB Audio Device 2 GDB 09 43 00 gt MIDI Out device 1 GDB 09 43 00 gt manufacturer 65535 GDB 09 43 00 gt product 6
261. i until the red range on the screen matches the width of the click Step 6 When the width is correctly set press the Enter key to execute the command Note that the click must not be in the fade in or fade out area of a clip and that the command does not work on linked clips i e Multi Channel clips Undo is available after using the Remove Click command Fairlight XYNERGI Page 178 TIME DOMAIN PROCESSING November 7 2014 Serato Pitch n Time Serato Pitch n Time FE has been available in Fairlight systems for many years as a paid option For owners of this option the software continues to work as previously This is described below Serato can change length without changing pitch or pitch without changing length and hear the result in real time as you jump from clip to clip Note Pitch n Time FE requires an iLok USB Security Key and a valid license Licenses can be purchased at http www serato com Step 1 To enter the Wave Menu press the wave key Step 2 Press the Pitch n Time soft key The Pitch n Time FE popup appears Algorithm Polyphonic Tempo I 1 133 327 I I Length Input 8437760 Samples Units Output 6328616 J Capture Pitch 1 1 a 100 000 I I Pitch n Time FE 1 0 2006 Serato Audio Research Preview Process Close Use the keyboard and mouse to adjust parameters e Select an Algorithm o Polyphonic b
262. ia D FairlightAU Projects Media D FairlightAUProjects BusTest D FairlightAU Projects BusTest Media D Fairlightau Projects BusTest D Fairlightau Projects BusTest Media Frank MixOS D FairlightAU Projects PluginPhaseTest48 Me Hubble Briefcase D FairlightAU Projects PluginPhaseTest48 oft Javanese D Fairlinbral iPrpiert lt tPh ininRerTest4e Lazy Days 4 Localise test Big Import DR2 Dream II 5678 Frank Mix05 DR2 D rc11 Testing 1140 New Project19 DR2 Dream II 1548 New Project20 DR2 Dream II 10 Plugin builder DR2 XXXXX xxx File D FairlightAU Projects Plugin builder DR2 N A SoftwareException DR2 Dream II 10 New Project9 MT MT Project NJA Very large MT MT MT Project N A aes3itest aestest Arm test BusTest ChannelTest48 Frank MixO1 Frank Mix04 2l Stop Scanning Reveal Folder List Media Discard Unused Media Delete Ts View Backup Projects While this pane is open click on one of the devices shown above and its folders will be displayed Now you can select folders and click Stop scanning selected folders Fairlight XYNERGI Page 349 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT November 7 2014 Clicking Reveal folder will open a Windows Explorer window showing the selected folder and its contents Double clicking a folder in the list of Scanned Folders will display its subfolders if any in the Subfolders window and the projects if any con
263. ich information is displayed in clips using the command view Displayed Clip Information The system displays a dialog like this Select information you would like displayed on clips Bit rate Frame Rate F Sample Rate Video Resolution Gain Gain Icon OffSet Codec F Source Channel Not local media icon Note that Frame Rate Video Size and Codec are only shown on Video clips see the chapter Pyxis Track on page 311 for details about video Choosing Clip Colours To explicitly choose clip colours do the following Step 1 Select tracks containing the clips you want to colour Step 2 Move the transport so the clips are under the cursor or make a range using the From and To keys The clips should be red Step 3 Use the menu item clip Set Clip Colour Fairlight XYNERGI Page 42 CHANNELS November 7 2014 Clip Level Click to choose a Normalize Clip Level colour for all selected LR Stereo Swap red clips Phase Invert Clips Rename Resync to record time Reverse Clips Set Sync Point BWF Click to display a mixer for special colours Flip Video Clip Field Click to return the selected clips to their track clip colour Cut Clips To Bin Copy Clips To Bin Publish Clips To Clipstore Custom Colour Follow Track Multichannel Clips Multichannel clips are linked for editing operations They are displayed with no separating line and a little smaller in height The p
264. ick on the name of the desired Rewire application so it is highlighted Instrument MIDI Device MIDI Channel Ableton Live Highlight rewire application Click Edit to launch Step 4 Click on Edit at the bottom of the dialogue box Note Some programs eg Reason will launch automatically Others eg Ableton Live need to be launched manually Step 5 Open or create a project within your Rewire application demo projects that accompany the application are a good starting point Patching a Rewire Application Once your Rewire Application is launched it s time to patch Rewire inputs to track or live feeds Step 1 Open the Patch I O page by pressing the Patch button in the Setup Megamode Step 2 Click on Instrument Inputs located on the left hand side of the Patch I O page You see inputs labeled according to the Rewire applications you have installed If you have installed more than one application click Page Down on the patch I O page until you find the input for your Rewire application Fairlight XYNERGI Page 294 PLUG INS REWIRE AND EXTERNAL PROCESSING November 7 2014 Step 3 Select the desired instrument input e g If using Reason select the inputs labeled Mix L and Mix R for a stereo mix Step 4 Select Track Live or other patch destinations located on the lower right hand side of the Patch I O page Step 5 Select destinations to patch in the upper right and click the Patch button to comple
265. icked the cursor is stationary but otherwise it moves While the cursor is moveable you can reposition it by right clicking anywhere in the Edit Screen and dragging the mouse right or left audio is not played while you do this or press the Jog command and use the Jog Wheel audio is scrubbed if the movement is less than four times play speed When re locking the cursor its current position is held This allows you to place it away from the middle of the screen which can be useful for seeing more of the incoming audio for example But if you want to get it exactly back to the center use the command setup Reset Playhead Cut and Paste Whole Clip To cut and paste a clip Step 1 Select a track and move a clip under the cursor The clip is red because it is touching the a PAT eet e cursor Step 2 Press the cut key if not already selected Step 3 Press the cut clip key We see the clip s ghost It s a picture of the clipboard ready to be pasted in Step 4 Select another track and or move to another location The ghost shows where the clipboard contents can be pasted Fairlight XYNERGI Page 112 EDITING November 7 2014 Step 5 Press the Enter key to paste the clipboard The clip is pasted Head This time we ll only work with the Head of the clip That is the part before the cursor Step 1 Select a track and move a clip under the cursor The clip is red because it is touching
266. icture below shows two stereo multichannel clips Fo You can create multichannel clips in two ways e By importing a multi channel Wave or other file e By Recording into a Link Group of tracks Once a clip has been defined as multichannel operations on one channel of the clip eg EQ affect all other channels Multichannel clips can be broken apart using the command Edit gt Cleave Multi Channel Clips Clips that have previously been cleaved can be restored using Edit gt Restore Multi Channel Fairlight XYNERGI Page 43 CHANNELS November 7 2014 Selecting Channels Selecting channels makes them the target for commands and parameter changes With audio tracks clips on the selected ones are targeted for clip based editing Using Track Keys In most layouts 12 keys beneath the soft keys allow track selection The Bank keys at the ends allow selection of any group of 12 tracks Click a dark track selection key to add that track to the selection Click a lit track selection to remove that track from the selection To select a range of tracks press and hold down the first track select key and double click the last track selection key you wish to be active All other tracks will be deselected To select a single track double click on the desired track selection key All other selections will be deselected Selecting a track which is a member of a link group will select all tracks in the link group The tr
267. iew The system allows you to define many speaker sets There is always a MAIN set usually your large Control Room monitors You may also create many other sets and choose them whenever you like This guide will show you how to choose outputs for any of your speaker sets Step 1 Press the green Mon button Step 2 Press the Mon Setup button if it s not already lit Fairlight XYNERGI Page 299 MONITORING AND TALKBACK November 7 2014 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Press the Config Monitors soft key and work on the Mixer Screen Choose a Speaker set at the lower left Select all or one of its Elements at the top left Click Analog Or Digital Outputs at lower right Choose the right number of free outputs to match the number of selected elements Click Patch Repeat as needed Press the end soft key to leave the Config Monitors screen Change Monitor Listening Format Overview You can tell the system to play into a narrower format than your current speaker set This is called folding down For example you can listen to your 5 1 mix in stereo without changing speaker sets by changing the Listening format The system remembers the last non standard listening format you used and calls it the Alternative Format This can be heard at any time by pressing the ALT Format button in the Mon Megamode press mon then ALT Format This guide will show you how to choose a listening format Step 1
268. iew Press and hold the shift key while scrolling to go faster Note you can determine whether the preview comes directly from your monitor speakers or from the current track by opening the following dialog tab Setup General Preferences Media Libraries and entering a choice in the Preview group An alternative method gives you more control of the clip s final position Step 2A Press the Audition soft key or click the Audition button in the Smart Pane While Audition is Fairlight XYNERGI Page 182 AUDIOBASE CLIP SEARCH CLIPSTORES QTUBE November 7 2014 lit the highlighted WAV file in the list will play as a clip on the current track while everything else is frozen if necessary take M1 off line to prevent the video moving You can also press the Jog button and move the clip with the Jog Wheel This allows you to find a sync point Note you can force the auditioning clip to be shown on top of existing clips by selecting the following option Setup General Preferences Media Libraries clip appears on top of existing clips Step 3 Double Click the selected WAV file to paste it at the playhead on the active track or drag and drop a clip to any track at any point on the timeline Step 3A Press the paste soft key to paste the auditioning clip at its current position on the current track This allows you to find a relevant sync point and paste the clip accordingly Notes e The AudioBase3 results pane can be displayed
269. ifference to this Scanning on Startup If you check the Scan on Startup button in the General Preferences dialog shown above the system will scan all your plug ins each time it starts If you have a large number of plug ins this can take a long time especially since many of them require dongle verification Another strategy is to use the Rescan button in the same dialog only when you have added or removed plug ins from the system Plug in Latency and Compensation Each plug in takes a certain amount of time to run and this effectively delays the audio in the track or live feed The delay time is called the latency of the plug in Latency has two components e AudioBridge latency which is the time taken to get the audio from the Crystal engine to the CPU where the plug ins are executed and back again This is unavoidable due to the VST specification requiring blocks of samples to be sent for processing e Processing time of the plug in which is how long it takes the CPU to process a block of samples This is reported by each manufacturer of VST plug ins Latency Compensation For Track Feeds containing plug ins the track playback is automatically advanced by the amount of the latency Note this is not possible for Live Feeds as they happen in slightly retarded real time When Buses contain plug ins the tracks feeding that bus are automatically advanced by the amount of the latency If a track is feeding more than one bus
270. ight XYNERGI Page 78 RECORDING November 7 2014 Ensure Track Input is selected at the lower right then select a track number to be recorded in the upper right Analog Inputs Click Analog Inputs Of Digital Inputs at the lower left of the screen Select any Input in the upper left of the screen Click Patch to connect the physical input to the track Exit Patching by selecting another menu or by right clicking the Patch I O display Note Patching is used for all system connections between paths Please see Patching Signal Paths on page 61 for more details Arming Tracks Tracks can be armed in the following ways e Press a Track button when the arm or ADR menu is displayed in the Record Megamode This track button should turn red e Hold down the Record button and press a Track button e Click the Arm button near a track number on the Edit screen The button should turn red Fairlight XYNERGI Page 79 RECORDING November 7 2014 Click to Arm You can click one Arm button thus toggling it and then drag up or down to toggle others to the same value armed or disarmed without being careful to drag exactly over the buttons only vertical mouse position is taken into account Click then drag to arm multiple tracks The illustrated move will cause tracks 5 to 14 to be armed as long as they have patched inputs Fairlight XYNERGI Page 80 Click to Arm RECORDING November 7 2014
271. in ranges and edited with QWERTY shortcuts in the same way as audio clips Each copy of an original MIDI recording is independent so if MIDI Note Editing see below is used on one of them the other one will not change MIDI clips cannot be pasted on to audio tracks or the video track nor vice versa Names can be added to the MIDI clips then changed if desired using either the Name Clip command from the XYNERGI Editor Megamode or the Clip gt Rename command MIDI Note Editing The system will only note edit MIDI clips containing a single MIDI channel If you have recorded or imported notes from multiple MIDI channels into one clip you can separate them using the command MIDI gt Separate MIDI Notes by Channel The system creates one clip for each channel and places them on the tracks below the selected one For this to work there must be sufficient MIDI tracks to take all the clips MIDI clips can be edited in detail using MIDI Edit MIDI Notes Another way to do this is view gt Smart Pane MIDI Events then click the Edit Events button Either way one MIDI clip at a time can be edited the one on the current track blue name and blue tab at left under the cursor the clip must be red MIDI Note Editing opens a piano roll editor where each MIDI event note ON note OFF is shown as a clip like object Only mouse editing is available in this window Note NO AUDIO OR VIDEO PLAYBACK OCCURS WHILE THE MIDI NOTE EDITOR IS OPE
272. in the Project Megamode In either case you will see a dialog box where you can select the number of tracks With Open Project If you wish to change the number of tracks in your project e Press the track count button in the Project Megamode or e Click the Tracks Set Audio Track Count command in the menu above the Edit screen Fairlight XYNERGI Page 33 CHANNELS November 7 2014 You will see a dialog where the number of tracks can be changed WARNING If you remove tracks containing clips the contents will be destroyed with no UNDO Displaying Channels Audio and MIDI tracks are displayed on the Edit Screen Live Feeds and Buses can also be displayed but only when mix automation is active Mix On is on The latter is intended for displaying automation graphs All channels are displayed on the Mixer Screen They are fixed in width and can be scrolled from side to side Number of Tracks on Edit Screen Using Buttons Select the number of tracks to display by holding down the BLUE key and pressing one of the Numpad keys labeled 1T 2T 4T 8T 16T 24T 32T and 48T The most recently selected track always appears in the track display If Track 1 is displayed your Pyxis Track video track if there is one in the project will also be shown Step 1 Hold down the BLUE key Step 2 Press the desired Track Display key You can also select the desired track view in the onscreen View Menu Tracks Submenu A method u
273. in your currently open project POST V5 0 lists each type of edit that it finds in the EDL e g A12 A 3 etc and allows you to choose which audio tracks to record for each type Often it will be the same set of tracks for all edit types Click in the Record Trks column for each type of edit and choose from the drop down list The Rec Tracks drop down list provides a convenient way to quickly fill in the track mapping for a specific number of tracks per EDL track Presets allow you to save a track mapping for reuse Type a name into the field and click Save To load a preset simply select it from the drop down list Select Edits to Capture 1 CLOSE 00 48 37 00 00 00 00 O0 00 00 C 00 14 38 12 00 16 55 00 4 24 19 00 48 26 1 00 16 55 32 SSEP SS 344000 CLOSE O00 ere oo of of S The system will capture only the highlighted events in the EDL display Use the mouse to highlight the required events You can select a range of events by selecting the first then holding down SHIFT and selecting the last in the range You can add or subtract an event from the selection by holding down ctrl and clicking it Events that are marked with an R will not be recorded even if they are selected Each time the system performs a recording the events that successfully record are automatically marked this way You may also click in the checkbox for any event to mark or unmark it manually Capture Settings Fairlight XYNERGI Page 360
274. indow to the Track display if multiple clips are selected they will be placed end to end at the destination What is Displayed el Clip ee r oee m Color Track Layer Ste Video 2 00 Video 3 00 Video 3 00 Video 3 00 Viden 4 nn By default the window displays clips from the current workspace By clicking the various tabs you can access your choice of All sources The current project workspace Other workspaces i e attached Library projects for information about libraries see Import on Page 144 Your project Bin described in the next section Your Clipstores described in the next section Clip Selection While a list of clips is shown in the window you can use the mouse to select one or more of them Fairlight XYNERGI Page 185 AUDIOBASE CLIP SEARCH CLIPSTORES QTUBE November 7 2014 P After that you can click the Select button to select those clips in the Edit Screen This is very useful for applying the same Clip EQ or Level to a bunch of clips with similar names Clip Bins Every project has a Clip Bin This is a place to store clips not being used at the moment They are copied directly to the Project Bin using Clip Copy Clips to Bin OR Clip Cut Clips to Bin The command will target the currently selected clip s If a Range is present only wholly included clips will be copied To access them open the Clip Search dialog as follows e Press GoTo Clip e Click Vie
275. indows can be selected displaying a small mixer the video playback Video Locators or a combination of these To select these use your mouse with the View Menu above the screen R Available ange aie Ape Pyxis Track Edit toolbar recording time Smart Pane Zoom range Timecode video on current drive position Kalimba flowers My garden 0 35 00 W lt t gt gt t leme SRS SA ee See Peo AAA ee anienininis ial iene gt Sima F nae E pC_p122 Pyxis Mixer Track Info Panel window Arm Solo Mute Select Fader Pan Automation Track and clip area Fairlight XYNERGI Page 8 XYNERGI OVERVIEW November 7 2014 Clip Track name Track Link indication Track bed D3 24_Martini_Asti_Balloons_30_v 10b_L es Cli p Name Automation curve Track Meter Pan value Fader value MIDI Audio indicator Track and Clip Names Normally clips and their names appear on top of track names You can reverse this so that the track names have display precedence by clicking Setup gt General Preferences Options and selecting or deselecting Display track names above clip display Smart Pane This area contains a number of different displays at different times It may show Meters Clip EQ parameters Fade parameters and so on Each editing mode automatically displays its appropriate Smart Pane You can also force the display of any pane or no Smart Pane at all by selecting View Smart Pane
276. ing e Move an individual event with the mouse You may change the event value move up or down or its timecode move left or right The timecode position is bounded by the next and previous events The timecode and current value of the event are shown in the Automation Edit group of the Smart Pane e Select one or more events by making a box marquee with the mouse Selected events may be e Dragged up and down or left and right Left and right movement is bounded by the next and previous events The value of the highest point is shown in the display above e Deleted using the Del key e Create a new event by clicking where there is currently no event e Combine moving and creating by clicking above or below the line If there is no point at the timecode where you clicked one will be created but if there is one within a quarter frame of where you clicked it will be raised or lowered to your mouse position Drawing Drawing allows you to create automation data using the mouse To begin drawing click the Draw button Now click and drag on any selected track to create or replace automation data Glide Make a range and click the Glide button This will create a smooth ramp between the values at the beginning and end of the range Undo Automation changes made by editing or redrawing can be undone using Undo in the normal way An unlimited number of undo steps is provided Fairlight XYNERGI Page 272 AUTOMATION November 7 2
277. ing applications Step 3 Click the Bus Format tab Surface Config IJO Config Bus Formats LCR 5 1 Add Duplicate Remove Bus Elements ElementName Short LR FB ou 100 100 0 Element Settings 100 100 0 50 100 0 Lox cancel Fairlight XYNERGI Page 203 MIXING November 7 2014 The Bus Format tab shows all the currently available formats in your system The factory formats are shown in grey and cannot be edited Clicking on an element as shown above displays its position in 3D space as a red square with numerical equivalents below Step 4 To create a new format press Add creates a blank format or Duplicate creates a copy of the selected format which you can edit In this case we select the factory 5 1 format and click Duplicate Surface Config 1 0 Config Bus Formats L Ada _ Duplicate remove up Down Bus Elements Element Name Short iR FB DU Left L 100 100 0 Centre C 0 100 Right R 100 100 Surround Left Ls Rs B 100 100 0 100 Surround Right 100 Boom 100 0 ve Down Reset Save x Step 5 Double click the name of the new format which appears as 5 1 D for duplicate and edit it to read 5 1 SMPTE The SMPTE 5 1 format requires a different element order from the factory 5 1 format based on Dolby
278. ing window in ms Target Reference in LKFS Short Window The length of the short term sliding window meter integration time in seconds Integrated Gate An optional Gate can be applied to the Infinite programme integration The blue numbers give running reports on level according to ITU R BS 1770 1 standard as a referenced LKFS value LK They represent the subjective loudness of the audio program The right hand number gives a rolling average over the defined short term window length and the left hand number gives an average over the entire length of program i e since you last reset the meter You can reset the long term average infinite integration by clicking the number The long term average level can additionally have a gate applied in the meter preferences in order to allow it comply with the R128 EBU Standard Fairlight XYNERGI Page 310 Pyxis TRACK November 7 2014 Pyxis Track Introduction Pyxis Track is XYNERGI s built in video disk recorder and editor It can import files of many formats and export to many formats Some of these formats require special licences to operate See below for import export information Creating a Pyxis Track Before using Pyxis Track a video track must be added to the project This can be done in two ways e When creating a new project select the Add Pyxis Track checkbox shown below For a project that is already created use the command Tracks Add Pyxis T
279. io and MIDI tracks are distinguished visually by a new pair of icons in the bar at the left Fairlight XYNERGI Page 326 MIDI TRACKS November 7 2014 MIDI w Audio Patching to MIDI Tracks To patch MIDI inputs to tracks and their outputs to instruments use Setup Instruments on the Edit Screen Instrument Setup xj MIDI Device In ___ MIDI Channel USB Audio Device _s Church Organ 2nd 1 zj Church Organ 2nd USB Audio Device OMNI Unassigned Unassigned _ Unassigned OMNI Unassigned Unassigned Patching is done in three steps 1 Load an instrument and patch a controller to it 2 Patch the instrument s audio outputs to tracks or lives so you can hear it 3 Patch a controller to be recorded on a track and patch the track s output to an instrument to play it Step 1 On the input left side load an instrument using the Add command Choose any of your installed instruments from the dropdown menu that is displayed The GUI for that instrument will appear on the screen Now assign a MIDI controller MIDI Device In and choose the MIDI channel or OMNI that the instrument will play it will not respond to other MIDI channels from the controller The MIDI controller you assign will play the instrument live Step 2 To hear the output of that instrument it must be patched to one or more Track or Live Feed inputs This is done on the Patch I O page in the normal
280. ion Setup Setup is used for all behind the scenes work Most functions here are set and left for the duration of the project Some of the most important are the Bus related modes such as Bus Format and Bus Assign the machine control setups M1 and M2 setup and the digital sync environment Sync Many of these are demonstrated in How To Setup For details of the other modes and button hold down the xp1ain key and press the button for which you would like some Xplanation Fairlight XYNERGI Page 24 THE XYNERGI TACTILE CONTROLLER November 7 2014 Record This is the place to do your recording Selecting tracks in this megamode Arms them for recording but only if they have something to record i e a patched input signal The ADR menu is also here It s a great way to manage a post sync session or any other list of recording tasks This is described in its own chapter starting page 94 For details of the main recording commands see How To Recording For details of the other modes and button hold down the xp1ain key and press the button for which you would like some Xplanation Monitoring This megamode is for setting up your monitor system Much of this is setup at installation but there are also controls for setting up the monitors for a particular session and switching quickly between different sources and surround formats Speaker icons allow you to mute any of the current speakers For details of the main m
281. ion button can TOGGLE the channel on and off The CALL button makes the channel the current Pad channel and only asserts does not toggle Auto button The Auto button changes the automation state of the channel that owns the fader strip If Preview is on the channel is toggled in and out of preview Otherwise if Write is selected the channel is toggled into and out of Write or if Trim is selected it is toggled into and out of Trim PanPot Function The Panpot default function is to control the Left Right Pan position of each channel It can also control many other mix parameters To change the Panpot function Step 1 Hold down BLUE and the 1 Pot button The OLEDs display all the functions which can be controlled by the Panpot Step 2 The XCS panel displays all the parameters the pot can control Select one of these by pressing its button Step 4 Release the Pot button The OLED display names the function you are controlling with the panpot and shows a graphic display of the current parameter value Fairlight XYNERGI Page 241 MIXING November 7 2014 Note Simply pressing and releasing the Pot button toggles between the standard function Pan L R and the most recent non standard function that you used If you have not used any non standard function it toggles between Pane L R and Pan F B front back You can also change Pot function on the XYNERGI Center Section Step 1 Select the Mixer Megamode on the XYNERG
282. is active before doing so Allows you to copy the plug in s from the current clip then Apply render them into another clip To select more than one clip from the list hold down SHIFT and click on more plug ins Saves the current list item as a preset allowing you to recall and apply it at any time Type the name into the drop down list before clicking Save Loads the currently viewable preset into the current clip From there you can Preview it make changes then click Apply to render it Using VST Instruments in XYNERGI While Post V5 0 does not include a MIDI sequencer VST Instruments can still be played live through the system This can be useful for Foley using a VSTi sampler Live musical performance Tuning vocals with a VSTi sampler and MIDI controller with pitch wheel Live effects triggering with a VSTi sampler VSTi s can easily be recorded to tracks or inserted on Lives depending on your needs ReWire About ReWire ReWire is a software protocol jointly developed by Propellerhead and Steinberg It enables remote control and data transfer among digital audio editing and related software Originally appearing in the ReBirth software synthesizer in 1998 the protocol has since XYNERGIllved into an industry standard The ReWire Mixer The ReWire protocol is designed to allow a number of ReWire Clients to communicate with a single ReWire Mixer Only one ReWire mixer can be active at a time Post V5 0 is
283. ith subframes and samples feet and frames in either film format or Bars and Beats To toggle between whole frames and frames with subframes hold down the BLUE key and press the Subf Clear key in the Numeric Keypad For all timescale choices select view gt Timescale and choose one of the options Display Layering Smart Pane gt Pyxis Mix Panel Show Pyxis Track Multi Video Monitor 3D Dual Video Output YY Playback Video Source Edit Workspace 7Y Marks Sort ideo Locators Tracks gt Clip Search Displayed Clip Information Orphaned Media TimeScale gt Background Tasks Performance Statistics Transport Window Timecode Display Wi Hours MinjSec Frame Hours Minj Sec Frame SubFrame Hours Min Sec Frame SubFrame Samples Feet Frames 35 mm Feet Frames 16 mm Hours Feet Frames 35 mm Hours Feet Frames 16 mm Bars and Beats Bar Beat display Positions can be displayed in bars and beats To enable this use the Edit Screen menus and click view gt Timescale Bars and Beats The Edit Screen shows dark bar lines and light beat lines Fairlight XYNERGI Page 48 CHANNELS November 7 2014 To set up parameters go to Setup Bars and Beats Setup This displays a dialog with the following parameters Tempo a li Time 4 l 4 H Origin time 00 00 00 00 Setlidst Snap to fije M 1 BPM from Number Bars E Close
284. ithout notice Fairlight AU reserves the right to change any part of this document without notice The warranties remedies and disclaimers above are exclusive and take precedence over all others oral or written express or implied to the extent permitted by law in the geographical area of the product s use No employee of Fairlight AU agent distributor or employee of an agent or distributor is authorised to offer any variation from this policy Copyright 2014 Fairlight AU Pty Ltd Unit 3 15 Rodborough Rd Frenchs Forest NSW 2086 AUSTRALIA Telephone 61 2 9975 1777 Fax 61 2 9975 1999 END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT You have acquired a device DEVICE which includes software licensed by Fairlight AU from one or more software licensors Fairlight AU s Software Suppliers Such software products as well as associated media printed materials and online or electronic documentation SOFTWARE are protected by international intellectual property laws and treaties The SOFTWARE is licensed not sold All rights reserved IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT EULA DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR COPY THE SOFTWARE INSTEAD PROMPTLY CONTACT Fairlight AU FOR INSTRUC TIONS ON RETURN OF THE UNUSED DEVICE S FOR A REFUND ANY USE OF THE SOFTWARE INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICE WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT TO THIS EULA OR RATIFICATION OF ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT GRANT OF SOFTWARE LI
285. iting automation the graph is shown in red Existing automation data is shown in green allowing you to target punch out points easily Fairlight XYNERGI Page 270 AUTOMATION November 7 2014 4_TRACK IN 4_TRACK IN TO DI 16 bit Note that in this case the red line continues past the cursor This shows accurately what will happen when Write is exited because the system On Stop setting is EVENT meaning the current value will be held until the next change in automation value Here is how it looks when On Stop is set to HOLD 4_TRACK IN 4_TRACKINTODI 16bit oO In this case the red line continues at the same value to the end of the screen because this value will be written to the end of the project Editing Automation Curves Automation data can be edited graphically using the mouse To do this click the Edit button There are two ways to edit Events and Draw Events To edit Events click on the Events button Fairlight XYNERGI Page 271 AUTOMATION November 7 2014 Events are shown as red squares Note that each event is a value of the parameter After an event the value stays constant until just before the next event when it ramps up or down to the next value When events are close together as shown above they are joined by a smooth line reflecting this ramp Otherwise the values are held constant and shown with a horizontal line While Events are displayed you may do any of the follow
286. ject has the same track count rates and track names as the last project Fairlight XYNERGI Page 339 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT November 7 2014 nr gt Select the new path and name z Ne fi gt Computer Data D FairlightAU Projects Jestream video gt gt Search Jestream video pl Organize v New folder a v z Name Date modified Type Size 1 Comput ge g J Media 8 01 20138 18 AM File folder em C Ee System C _ Jestream video DR2 6 12 2012 2 37 PM DR2 File 34 090 KB ca Data D 01 gt SAT 3 Eile _ Shutdown DR2 012 5 47 PM DR2 File a system SUPERNOVA P GP RandD fs04 R amp This Year fs05 T 28 JDs Audiobase V G2 fairlightau wsdev web website wr amp Storage X ae c gandalf Y fairlightau wsdev web website wr My Web Sites on MSN _ SoftwareException DR2 30 10 2012 6 42PM DR2File ty Network j AB3 SERVER J amp E CC2 4600 jm HERCULES X File name Jestreanas Dream 2 DR2 Fairlight MT MT Fairlight MT Mfix3 MT If you save a project into the MT format it will load and play on QDC systems If you save a project into the MT MFX3 format it will load and play on MFX3 systems MT Projects The MT Project format is designed for backward compatibility with Fairlight QDC systems running software version 19 2 11 or higher XYNERGI can also open MT files created on older Fairlight syst
287. k 42 m Loew oe ome oes ee oe d Buttons ia Track Track Track Live Live Aux Bus view Track Track Live Live Aux Bus Sub Bus Repro Send Direct Send Direct Send User Input Return Input Return Retum Return Aux Bus Aux Bus Sub Bus Sub Bus Sub Bus CR Mon View Main CR Mon Talk Analog Digital MADI Dir Out Send Dir Out Dir System Return in Back Outputs Outputs Outputs CR Mon Main Analoq Dynamics Out Dir Inputs Sidechain mol Source categories Destination categories Inputs Input Source Categories Categories of signal paths are selected in the lower part of the screen Source categories Analog Inputs CoE BOE afifi afaj HOE afifi Selecting a category of sources expands the category in the upper left of the screen Fairlight XYNERGI Page 62 PATCHING SIGNAL PATHS November 7 2014 In this case Analog Inputs have been selected Destination Categories Destination categories Selecting a category of destinations expands it into the upper right of the screen Fairlight XYNERGI Page 63 PATCHING SIGNAL PATHS November 7 2014 In this case Track Inputs are shown Making a Patch Select a source and a destination then click the Patch button in the center Patch Afterwards the tiles used in the patch will show the results Source is always shown above destination Input 1 Source Source nl a T ry r I h j Ji Notes You can select multiple sources and multiple destina
288. k cancel Clip EQ Parameters Band There are four EQ bands that you can apply They are given the names commonly used on mixing consoles but actually they are not in fixed ranges you have the full frequency range available on each of them Filter Type Choices are P Band pass filter gt High pass filter lt Low pass filter Each band can be set to any filter type Mouse click on the button to cycle amongst the choices Frequency The centre frequency of each band Gain The gain of the band Range 99 to 20cB Q This displays the Q of the band or indicates the type of shelf Range 0 99 Enables Used with the Apply command Only the Enabled bands are applied to the selected clips Value Grid Fairlight XYNERGI Page 162 EDITING November 7 2014 The Value Grid shows all the current parameters of the EQ being changed Changing a Parameter To choose a parameter numerically click with the mouse in the cell you would like to change You may move across the grid using the Tab key going towards the right or Shift Tab going towards the left There are several ways to change the value of a parameter once chosen Type a number on the QWERTY keyboard If you type a number that is out of range the field background turns red In this case use the Backspace button to remove digits until the red colour disappears The minus sign can be used in the Gain fields Use the up and down arrows to make small changes
289. ks e Click empty space in a track not on a clip and drag upwards or downwards Every track you touch will be selected and all others will be deselected If you drag sideways as well you will make a range e Hold the ctrl key and click empty space on any number of tracks Each track you click is added to the selection e Click a track number and drag upwards or downwards Each track number you reach will be added to the selection This does not affect selection of untouched tracks Fairlight XYNERGI Page 151 EDITING November 7 2014 Mouse Based Ranges A range is a time interval bounded by an In Time and an Out Time It can be used to edit multiple clips and parts of clips The mouse can be used at any time to create a range Simply click an empty space one where there is no clip and drag an area on the Track display and a range will be created The tracks that you touch while dragging will be selected and all other tracks deselected If you need to make a range where clips are present hold down the ctrl and shift buttons while dragging This will prevent clips being relocated To remove the current range click but don t drag empty space in the track area This will also make that track the sole selection You can also toggle the range using the keyboard shortcut x You can make or extend the range to exactly include a clip by holding down ct ri and clicking the clip The Range Panel Sets the Range In point
290. l shown below fa Track 2 E a Dynamics DREAM II irtual Channel Aux Sends K o E Pan Boom S SF Spread m Assign amp YCA Click on any switch to toggle it Click on any knob and drag around it to change its value Hover the mouse over any box or knob and use the mouse wheel to change its value Click and Click drag the and to fader change channels e To open the Virtual Channel double click a channel name in the EVO Mixer Screen screen In the above example we have selected Track 8 e To close the Virtual Channel right click anywhere inside it e While it is open you may move to the next or previous channel by clicking the and buttons next to the channel name Click to select next or previous channel Fairlight XYNERGI Page 221 MIXING November 7 2014 Input Section DREAM II 48 V and Mic Control Used for Fairlight Mic preamps Recording Section Available only when a track is the current channel Arm means ready to record press this button only if there is an audio source patched to the current track Thru means the track will monitor its input but will not respond to a record command The Thru state makes the track equivalent to a Live Feed Press the Thru button only if there is an audio source patched to the current track Rec Level controls the level going to the Disk before recording It does not affect the track when
291. l exit will be used Keep Playing At the end of a cycle you may wish to keep playing in order to hear the next section of track Pressing the keep playing soft key at any time during a cycle will cause the postroll to be ignored and the system will enter normal Play mode after the cue s Out time Exporting the ADR List Clicking the Export button will cause a file to be created in CSV format containing all the cues in your ADR List Preroll 0 sec Postroll 0 sec Cue Delete All Export The format is as follows 2 columns of timecode Then next column is the character default is Then next column is the text Example 23 58 39 03 00 02 58 19 Andrew Haven t seen you before Fairlight XYNERGI Page 100 ADR November 7 2014 00 02 19 19 00 03 19 19 Bill froggs are really cool 00 04 57 07 00 09 42 18 Do not look now Fairlight XYNERGI Page 101 EDITING November 7 2014 Editing Basic Concepts the Audio Clip An Audio Clip plays audio from a single Media File It may play all of that file or only part Audio Clip 00 04 20 08 00 04 40 00 00 05 00 00 00 05 16 00 Audio lip 1 Media file on disk the highlighted section is played by the clip The Audio Clip has properties that you can change by editing Audio Clip 1 80de Name Head trim Fade in Fade in Fade out Fade out Tail trim Curve Point Point Curve e Head Trim the first audio sample of the media
292. l the controls work on the current sample the one last played e The Delete softkey removes only the current sample When Patch is selected e Modulation controls are not available e The axpsr controls affect all samples in the Patch offsetting their individual values e The Delete softkey removes the whole patch with all its samples AHDSR The ADSR controls are Attack Hold Sustain Decay Release These control the output volume of a particular sample after its MIDI key has been pressed These are illustrated below Leval Aleck Time Hoki Tins Oscay Tins Raksasa Tins e t a These terms are familiar to most synthesiser and sampler users so they will not be explained here See Wikipedia for further information To control the AHDSR parameters use the rotary knobs at the sides of the Pad Note To access parameters written in grey in the lower part of each section hold down the ALT button Other Controls Filter This is a low pass filter Resonance Boosts the signal at the turnover frequency of the filter Level Sets the maximum playback level of the sample Distortion Adds third harmonic distortion to the sample For Patch settings only Pitch Bend On off Pitch Range The maximum pitch bend for the patch Portamento On off Glissando On off P G rate The speed of portamento or glissando between successive notes Fairlight XYNERGI Page 336 SAMPLING November 7 2014 Modulation To di
293. lable in the Setup General Preferences Projects dialog as shown below nape Bree a vv JE af Tererences mesm Metes sps Themes Audio Plugins ee Autosave Off Z Load Last Project on Startup Profiles Undo Redo Options Ack selection follows Undo Playhead follows Undo Zoom Level follows Undo Marks are undoable Trakk display follows Undo Number of Backups 5 Restore Previous View on Project Load Audio Record Format WAV v MT Options Default Fuf extension fuf Stuff Fufs Bit Depth 16 or 24 X Multiple Workspaces Maintain Project Sample Rate and Frame Rate Switch Sample Rate and Frame Rate Media Scan Scan Media in background required restart Cancel _ In addition you can toggle the Follow Playhead option using the PlayheadFollows softkey in the Undo Menu Notes When recording multiple punch ins and outs in a single pass will produce multiple undoable events When you undo a recording the media you created is not destroyed by undo only the clips that reference the newly created media In fact you can access the media again using view gt Orphaned Media See how on page 351 Fairlight XYNERGI Page 149 EDITING November 7 2014 Undo Automation and Audio Automation changes can be undone with the same Undo button as Edit changes It is also possible to perform audio a
294. lain System Xplain is XYNERGI s built in Help system It s great to use because you don t need to clutter your desktop with books like this one and it gives you help about exactly where you are right now Xplain places text in the Pad text area Sometimes this covers up the feature that it is Xplaining it usually apologises Xplain has two systems Xplain Button Xplain Button gt hold down the xpiain button and press any other button on the keyboard to get a description of what it does This includes picture keys fixed keys and soft keys Xplain How To Xplain How To step by step guides to many of the product s basic procedures Press the xplain button to start Now choose a main topic and then one of its sub topics Read the overview and press that button which is flashing again When you see a flashing button read the text first then press the button Sometimes the text will instruct you to press a button without flashing it Go ahead and press the button This symbol comes at the end of the topic Press xplain again to exit How To s don t care where you are in the system They will always guide you to the end result by the shortest path So if you can t quite remember how to do something and you ve gone partway through it start the How To and it will guide you from that point onwards Fairlight XYNERGI Page 3 INTRODUCTION November 7 2014 How Much does Xplain Cover Xplain covers most
295. lation and display After some time the number of profiles can get quite large and use a lot of space on your computer The system automatically deletes profiles if they have not been used for a certain number of days To control how many days use the command setup General Preferences Projects Fairlight XYNERGI Page 344 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT November 7 2014 General Preferences Options Audiobase Playback Video Capture Projects Scrollers Audio Plugins Autosave Load Last Project on Startup D Profiles Delete Profile after 30 days The default is set at 90 days but you may change that to any time you like Revealing the Project File To display a Windows Explorer Window containing the currently loaded project use the command File gt Reveal Project File Backup Files Each time a DR2 file is saved an optional backup of the previous saved version can be made This will only happen if your system is set up correctly To enable backup saving issue the command setup gt General Preferences and go to the Projects tab General Preferences x Options Audiobase Playback Video Capture Projects Audio Plugins Number of Backups 5 Autosave ta Load Last Project on Startup D Set the number of backups you would like to keep The system default is 5 which means the 5 most recent saved versions of your file will be retained Automatic File Saving Au
296. lay updates at regular intervals to show the current stack of clips at the cursor position The top layer is selected but you may move the selection downwards using the Jog wheel or the and buttons Pressing the pop soft key or clicking the on screen pop button brings the selected clip to the top of the stack making it audible Other soft key commands in the Takes menu Rotate sends the top clip to the bottom Reverse Rotate brings the bottom clip to the top Fairlight XYNERGI Page 139 EDITING November 7 2014 On off toggles Clip Layering on and off Note you can use all the commands whether or not Clip Layering is displayed The Track Menu XYNERGI offers a group of commands that work between tracks called the Track Menu To access the Track Menu use the Track Menu button in the Editor Megamode Swap This command uses a range exclusively It swaps all layers of audio between the source and destination tracks Step 1 Select the source track for swapping Step 2 Create a range in which you want to swap the audio with another track using the From and To buttons Step 3 Press the swap soft key Step 4 Choose the destination track for swapping The audio in the range all layers is swapped between the source track and the destination track you selected in Step 4 Numbers This command swaps the positions of two tracks including their names and all audio It does not swap the automation data Step 1 Select t
297. lder which there almost certainly is it will be replaced with this one This means that undo files from older projects are difficult to identify But if you have wrongly and very recently saved a project and you wish to access a previous version of the edit list take the following steps Step 1 Open the folder C Program Files Fairlight Dream II Undo C Program Files Fairlight Dream IT Undo gt Go Name Size Type Date Modified a E KB 2File 11 03 2008 2 33 PM Only these two fi files are from the E UndoFile_00 13KB 4 File 11 03 2008 2 31 PM most recent E UndoFile_00 3 13KB 3File 11 03 2008 2 31 PM project E UndoFile_00 8 15KB 8 File 11 03 2008 1 46 PM ro LindaFila NN 7 iSVR 7Eil 11INRenNe 1 42 oy 4 gt Disk free space 14 1 GB 74 6 MB My Computer Step 2 Choose the undo file you want to open Rename this file so that it has an extension dr2 upper or lower case it doesn t matter Step 3 Move this file to a Media Device The simplest is to move it to the folder on your audio drive where the original project is stored Step 4 Open this file by issuing the File gt Open command or using the Project Menu open soft key Fairlight XYNERGI Page 346 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT November 7 2014 Video Files XYNERGI supports drag and drop import of a variety of video file formats as well as direct video recording to the XYNERGI timeline For correct op
298. le all selected tracks A single file is created with multiple linked media one for each track in the export Note The description field inside a BWave file is preserved when a clip is exported as BWF The default value for the BWF originator field can now be specified See Setup General Preferences gt Options Exporting Video You can export the video straight from a project and automatically combine it with your choice of audio from a project Fairlight XYNERGI Page 357 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT November 7 2014 To do this choose click on the File Menu and choose Export then Video This box pops up S lis pee azalan m Normal oo x a pasts j720 Step 1 Choose the video format into which you wish to export Step 2 Choose whether you want to export the whole project or a selected range Note to export as a Quicktime file you must have the latest version of Quicktime installed Note some file types require licences for export Please consult your Fairlight distributor for details Export Cue Sheet You can export the clip data from your project as a comma separated CSV file To do this Step 1 Issue the command gt gt Step 2 Use the Save dialog to select a destination for the file Step 3 Press EDL Management Introduction EDL Management supports three activities associated with EDLs Edit Decision Lists produced by other editing products Fairlight XYNERGI Page 358
299. le Rate Conversion Fast High Quality Puts a small load on the computer system but doesn t sound so good Very useful when there are a lot of clips to be sample rate converted or a lot of plug ins in the project High Quality Sounds good but loads down the CPU If you need good quality and have lots of clips to sample rate convert you can localise the media which performs the best quality sample rate conversion and re references the clip Step 1 Select the clips that need to be sample rate converted Step 2 Issue the command Process Localise Audio Use handles if the clip has been edited and might need to be re extended Select all clips using this media before localising and the system will only produce a single piece of media which they can all reference Export Exporting Audio You can export audio from a Project in the following formats Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 e WAV e Broadcast WAV e Aif e AES 31 This consolidates your project into a file used by other manufacturers Select the clip or clips to be exported Ranges of clips can also be selected Click the File menu command above the Track display Choose Export then Audio Tracks Clips The following dialog box appears Fa irlight XYNERGI Page 355 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT November 7 2014 D Fairlight AUi Projects native depth ak 3 Projecsi E j 48000 f fefe E asugi Aljo in Jasseron j Plasa alju oneg cinielinis
300. le click on Fade point remove fade e Double click on Curve point make fade linear e Double click on Level point set Level to 0 dB Edit While Playing All XYNERGI edits can be performed while the transport is in play If the clip you are editing is actually being played at the time it will take a second or two to update and resume play To make editing easier while playing you can view the tracks as stationary clips with a moving Play Head To do this click Setup Locked Playhead until the tick is removed Fairlight XYNERGI Page 153 EDITING November 7 2014 Sample Editing Redrawing waveform with the mouse can be done as follows Step 1 Zoom in until you can see individual samples This can be done with the mouse wheel It can also be done by holding down the zoom button and turning the Jog Wheel clockwise Step 2 Drag a sample up or down You can also drag freeform including left or right to create a new path for the corresponding sequence of samples The system displays black points to show where samples have been moved Note Sample Editing can be undone as the changed points are stored separately from the media Fairlight XYNERGI Page 154 EDITING November 7 2014 The Edit Toolbar The Edit Toolbar is shown only when the Solo theme is selected To do this click General Preferences Display Active Theme Then select Solo from the drop down menu Audiobase Meters Patch Redo Cut selected Paste
301. le click to select as current Double click opens Virtual Channel Channel System Name Shows the number of the track live bus or group Link group numbering is shown Input Double click opens Patch I O EQ Single click toggles EQ in out Double click opens EQ Zoom page Pan Single click toggles Pan on off Double click opens Pan Zoom page Arm Single click toggles Arm Mute Single click toggles Mute Fader Level Fader Set level with mouse Double click to set 0 dB Colour indicates automation status Channel Meter Link Group metering is shown Fairlight XYNERGI Page 215 MIXING November 7 2014 Pan Clicking on the Pan display toggles Pan Defeat in and out When Pan Defeat is on the red and yellow indicators disappear The column at the left represents Boom level It is brighter when on and darker when off Double clicking on the Pan graph brings the Pan Zoom display to the screen m Clicking on the EQ display toggles EQ in and out When EQ is out the graph line goes dull grey Double clicking on the EQ graph brings the EQ Zoom display to the screen Dyn The blue lines on the Dynamics display indicate Limiter at the top Compressor in the middle and Gate Expander It is possible to have all of them on Double clicking on the Dyn graph brings the Dyn Zoom display to the screen Aux The Aux graph shows only sends for Aux buses with non zero format The bars represent the a
302. lips Cycles clip layers sending top layer to bottom Reverse cycles clip layers bringing bottom to top Spaces the selected clips evenly Copies the range including all clips and automation Groups the selected clips into one clip object per track Ungroups the selected groups Fairlight XYNERGI Page 165 EDITING November 7 2014 Edit Settings Menu Edit Settings Range Controls Range On Off sets head or tail of range All Layers Controls whether on or all clips layers are affected by edits Razor On Turns Razor edit on and off Range Selection Toggles range selection type between inclusive and exclusive Vv Snap Editing Snap To Jump To Turns Snap Editing On or Off Defines where clips snap to when mouse editing Defines Jump destination points for speedy project navigation Define Project Start Time Sets the start time for the project Target Automation Toggles Automation follows editing on or off Fade Menu Fades can be applied to clips using the Fades Menu Fades Auto Fade Uses Playback head location on a clip to guess desired fade Fade Head Fades to head of Clip s Fade Tail Fades to tail of Clip s X Fade Makes a crossfade at the current position see page 161 Make Overlap Makes a one second overlap by pulling out the head and tail of butted clips Macros What is a Macro Macros are recorded sequences of keystrokes jog wheel actions and rotary pot moves They can be learned then played ba
303. log is open you can Fairlight XYNERGI Page 184 AUDIOBASE CLIP SEARCH CLIPSTORES QTUBE November 7 2014 Filter the list by typing a sequence of characters in the text box Only clip names containing that sequence will be displayed To quickly move the cursor into the Search field press the Search soft key Sort the clips in track order start order end order or duration or clip colour by clicking on the column header Clicking the header a second time reverses the sort order Double click any clip to locate to its timecode Press the Playhead Soft key or select the under Playhead checkbox to display only clips touching the cursor This is updated as the transport moves Press the Pop soft key or select the Pop button to bring the currently selected clip to the top layer on its track This can be used to manage multiple takes of the same recording layered on a single track Press the offline soft key or select the only Offline Clips button to reduce the list to only those clips for which media are not currently available Click the Reveal File button to display a Windows Explorer window showing the file containing the media for the clip Resize the dialog by dragging with the mouse on any of its sides Change the order of displayed fields by dragging the field names horizontally with the mouse Paste the selected clip s at the current time by clicking the Paste button or by dragging one or more clips from the w
304. low Track 14 The yellow ball is used when a Link Group is displayed It can be moved with the mouse The third dimension controls D U and Distance have no effect on the audio in this version of software To enable the 3D panner open the System Variables dialog Step 1 Type ctrl Shift U The System Variables dialog box is displayed Meters Permanent Peak hold mode Main VU Follows 5 0 Peak display limit dB 20 0 VU reference level dB 10 0 Seconds to retain overload 0 0 VU Trim left dB Clear Peak on Record Play oo VU Trim right dB IV All Meters use same meter point JV Digital VU meters J Launch on screen meters at Bootup Iv cena Mixer Requires Restart J EQ On Busses MADI Channels 56 64 JV Show 3D Panner Step 2 Select the 3D Panner checkbox Fairlight XYNERGI Page 230 MIXING November 7 2014 Step 3 Close the System Variables dialog The Video button toggles the Pan Theatre a a w Cm Having enabled it here open the Pyxis Window to use the Pan Theatre The Pan Theatre The Pan Theatre offers a combination of the 3D panner with the Pyxis window as shown below a i Par j a S eS This allows you to adjust surround panning directly in front of the pictures You can use the mouse to move the yellow or red balls or use the regular panning controls and joystick Fairlight XYNERGI Page 231 MIXING November 7 2014
305. low or by clicking in the appropriate field in the EQ display above Step 5 Adjust the parameter using the Jogger Wheel Changes are heard in real time Step 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 as often as needed Step 7 Apply the changes by pressing the Enter key or by clicking the Apply screen button Fairlight XYNERGI Page 135 EDITING November 7 2014 Each equalisation band has three parameters you can change They are centre frequency of the band gain cut or boost at that frequency and Q factor sharpness of the band or whether it is a high or low shelf Note When changing EQ frequency hold down the suirFt button for fine numerical adjustment EQ display Andrew2 2 X peere BEES Hdd Left side of display When a clip s EQ is being edited the dots change from black to red as shown here They can be moved with the mouse changing frequency and gain values These values are updated in the value grid as you move the mouse You can also hear the changes in the audio if it is playing after a short delay Range Filter Type Frequency Gain Q Factor Enables Right side of display The value grid shows the parameters of the EQ being applied to the clip or range of clips Clip EQ Parameters Band There are four EQ bands that you can apply They are given the names commonly used on mixing consoles but actually they are not in fixed ranges you have the full frequency range available on each of them Fil
306. lowest numbered track copied to the clipboard The special paste targets every clip that is wholly within the range on selected tracks Trimming allows clips to be resized Trim commands are used to set the head and tail of clips to determine how much of the original recording is played by the clip Trimming may shorten a clip or extend a clip if it is playing less than all of the original recording This will be the case if the clip was imported with handles or if the original clip has been edited Head Trim Head and Trim Tail are the most common uses of Trim Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Select a track and move a clip under the cursor Press the Trim key if not already on Press and release the Head key Move the transport forward a few frames jog or play Press Enter The head of the clip is placed at the cursor which is now shorter The effect is just like erasing the head of the clip Its sync remains as before but it starts at a later time and a later point in the audio Step 6 Jog backward a few frames and press ENTER Now the head is moved earlier revealing more of the audio You can keep jogging and pressing ENTER as long as you like until you are satisfied with the position of the head Fairlight XYNERGI Page 119 EDITING November 7 2014 Two Handed Trimming This is a more powerful method which is worth learning Step 1 Select a track and move a clip under the cursor Step 2 Press the
307. m looks back and forward in time to find any events previously recorded for the parameter If no dynamic events have been recorded for the parameter the parameter is free meaning you can move it manually The current value for any parameter is determined in the following order 1 The parameter is set to the TO value of the most recent previous event or the current event if the transport is right on top of a data change 2 If no previous event exists the parameter is set to the FROM value of the next future event 3 If no future or previous event exists the parameter is not changed If the project was just loaded it will be at its value in the saved snapshot Touch Write Touch write is a super fast way to automate your mix When properly set up you can simply grab the controls you want to change and write the changes straight into the automation For a parameter to go into write when you touch it the following must be true The parameter must be enabled Use the Param Enable layout in the Mixer Megamode or an enable button on the Mixer screen The channel must be selected OR Touch Auto Enable must be on Channels can be selected using the channel buttons in the XCS panel when a Mixer menu is current e g mix menu OF pad lock The Touch Auto Enable button is found in the Mixer Megamode Touch must be set to Snap or Latch Use the Touch button in the Mixer Megamode or on the Mixer screen Parameters available for touch
308. mation data Tutorial bis gba delenguat aay AE ta Siete 274 Recording MixeS ccecscceeeeseeeeeeeeteeeeeeee 275 PLUG INS REWIRE AND EXTERNAL PROCESSING scscdnscessacevescessnevastactanitents 276 INMOGUCHION suns eeser edits Hattie nase 276 General Capabilities 0 0eceeeeeteereees 276 VST and VSI aranaren anian ceases 276 Using VST Effects in XYNERGI 008 277 Plug in Latency and Compensation 278 Instantiatiom siis eseten aaeeei an naa ankan 279 Selecting PIUG iNS 0 cceeeceeeeeeteeeeereees 281 Controlling Plug ins on Screen 281 Controlling Plug ins on the Pad 06 284 Automation of Plug ins s s s 289 Copying Plug ins 0 0 2 ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeesteeeeeeees 289 Clip based Plug ins ececeeeeeseeeeereees 289 Using VST Instruments in XYNERGI 292 latch lds enre costco a A aea 292 External Processing sses 295 MONITORING AND TALKBACK 297 Set Monitor Levels Mute and Dim 297 Mute Individual Speakers csseeeeee 298 Toggle Main and ALT Speakers 0 298 Choose Speaker Set ccccccccsseeeeseeneees 298 Configure Monitor Speaker Sets 298 Choose Monitor Speaker Outputs 299 Change Monitor Listening Format 300 Configure Monitor Sources 0 cseeeee 300 ALST SWIGHOS vs cuit ga iieloestcaadtenthantededeaie 301 ME TES os tctsctctaltieccceeiteseslesiiica 30
309. mation record e Press the auto key below any fader Enabled parameters on the channel are put into record Pressing the auto button on the XCS Panel puts the current channel into record There are also AUTO buttons on the Edit Screen and Mixer Screen e Use Touch mode and move any fader pot or switch on your Fader panel or the XCS Panel The mix item it controls is put into Write or Trim if it is touch enabled If Touch Auto Enable is OFF the signal path and parameter must both be enabled for mix items to enter record If Touch Auto Enable is ON the signal path need not be enabled but the parameter must be e Punch in manually on enabled tracks with the rn key in the Punch Menu or punch in auto matically at the Active In point using PUNCH or the PLAY key Details in Programmed Automation below All enabled mix items are put into record e Use Prime mode and the transport Recording or ADR functions to record automation on selected signal paths Details in Programmed Automation below All enabled mix items are put into record Leaving Automation Record There are seven methods of leaving automation record e Press any illuminated auto key to take its signal path out of record e Cause the transport to leave PLAY or REC using any transport command not effective if Jog Mix is on see below e When in Touch Snap mode release any fader pot or switch e Punch out manually with the out key in the Punch Menu or punch out automati
310. mined by the link group master pan When a link group is created with default pans spread is set to maximum divergence is set to minimum and rotation is set to zero The spread control can be used to great effect when it is desired to collapse the surround sound field to a point source This may occur for instance where the camera moves continuously from an interior shot to an exterior or visa versa The surround field can be established for the interior and then as the camera moves through the door or window the surround field collapses and pans and fades down to the location of the window As this is occurring a pre mixed surround field for the exterior can be growing from the rear speakers and spread out to the entire speaker system as the exterior shot is established Fader Groups VCAs There are 32 VCA style Fader groups on XYNERGI Members of a Fader Group have their fader levels controlled by a Master and can also be accessed individually to set relative levels within the group Control Faders in a group are controlled relatively by the Group Master fader To do this you must either e Add the Group Master to a fader set e This is done using the Mapping software See page 239 e CALL the Group Master then control it with the Pad Level control To call the Group Master click on its Name Plate on the XYNERGI Mixer Screen e Use the mouse directly on the Mixer Screen by moving the Group Master faders Fairlight XYNERGI Pag
311. ming clips Name the Clips Select the track s whose clips you wish to name Since you re on the Arm Menu the system will also try to arm the tracks but this won t work unless they have patched inputs see How to Recording Patch Inputs for details If you want to name clips on unarmed tracks use the Edit Megamode or see below for Using the Name Menu For existing clips they must be touching the cursor or wholly inside the range In either case they will be coloured Red Press the clip name button If any clip is red or if the transport is in Record the clip name dialog is displayed Use the QWERTY keyboard to type the name then press ENTER or click ox to finish Note If you select more than one clip or more than one track in record the affected clips will all get the same name Fairlight XYNERGI Page 85 RECORDING November 7 2014 Using the Name Menu Press the name button to display a selection of all tracks Select the one s whose clip names you want to change Press the name soft key To rename clips they must be touching the cursor or wholly inside the range In either case they will be coloured Red Press the clip soft key to display the name dialog Use the QWERTY keyboard to type the name then press ENTER or Click ox to finish Press exit to leave the Name menu Another way to open the clip name dialog is by clicking clip Rename Clip Recording Shortcuts the Record menu O
312. mix item into Preview in one of these ways e Press the Auto button on its fader e Press the XCS Auto button puts the currently selected channel into Preview e Toggle Live Preview ON Mix Menu Preview Menu Live Preview and select the channel on the XCS Parameters in preview can be moved freely while you get a balance Then they can be written into the automation data in a number of ways Preview to Write To take your Previewing parameters straight into Write use the In button This can be found by pressing the Punch Menu button in the Mixer Megamode Fairlight XYNERGI Page 263 AUTOMATION November 7 2014 When channels are in Preview this is a good way to take them into Write For example you can play to a certain point adjusting parameter values then press the In button to put the selected parameters into Write starting at their previewed values If you wish to punch from Preview to Write automatically use Programmed Automation recording as described on page 258 The Preview Menu Parameters settings that you find while in Preview can be transferred into the Mix data in other ways as well To enter the Preview Menu press the Preview Menu Soft key in the Mix Menu All of the following commands require Preview to be on They will affect all signal paths in Preview status on all enabled parameters Fill Range A range must be present Pressing this soft key causes all previewing parameters to write their cur
313. mode Step 2 Save softkey Alternative Step 1 Editor megamode Step 2 save proj button top row Alternatively click File Save or type ctrl s Save Project As Step 1 Proj Megamode Step 2 Save As softkey Alternatively click File Save As Close Project Step 1 Proj megamode Step 2 Close softkey Alternatively click File Close Fairlight XYNERGI Page 338 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT November 7 2014 Load Recent Projects Step 1 Proj megamode Step 2 Open Prj buttons Alternatively click File File Name a list of recent projects Project Formats In XYNERGI three native project formats are supported The newer format has the extension DR2 It has the strongest feature set and is recommended for use where compatibility with older systems is not required The older formats are MT and MT MFX3 The MT format was introduced in the DREAM product series also known as QDC systems and is maintained with full backward compatibility by XYNERGI The MT MFX3 format is for much older systems you ll know if you need to use it Choosing Format At the time of creating a project file the system offers the choice of project formats in the New Project dialog There is no way to change project format after creation but you can save a copy of the current project in the other format using the File Save As command Note selecting the option Retain Attributes of Existing Project will mean the new pro
314. more tracks and click the Patch button on screen Press the patch button again to exit the Patch screen Monitor Soft Key Press the Monitor soft key to toggle between INPUT and the last other setting you chose AUTO by default To select another setting hold down the BLUE key and press the Monitor soft key Now turn the Jog Wheel to cycle through the possibilities Press ENTER to select one of them The Monitor settings work as follows Input always monitors the input to the track Auto monitors repro in Play or Jog otherwise input Record mutes the track when stopped otherwise as AUTO Mute mutes the track while in Record otherwise repro Repro always monitors recorded audio Tape Mode Overview When Tape Mode is selected you can punch in on existing Tape Mode clips and replace the audio media This can save filling up disks with unwanted material and results in a cleaner simpler project with fewer clips You can also create new Tape Mode clips by recording or using the Make Tape command Press the green Record Megamode button to access recording functions The Arm menu will be automatically selected Press the Record soft key so that Tape is displayed You can also select Tape Mode by selecting Process Tape Mode Tape Mode Process Erame Rate Convert Remove SRC Regenerate Profiles gt Remove Hidden Clips Gate Preview Gate Discard Unused Media Localize Audio Localize id
315. mount of level being sent to the active aux buses Where the send is muted the bar is dark as shown at left Double clicking on the Aux graph brings the Aux Zoom display to the screen Fairlight XYNERGI Page 216 MIXING November 7 2014 The FMC Old Mixer Screen _live ie Live 11 Live Feed tiles ET E CEA Hac Track 10 Track 11 Track 12 Track 13 maa oie a L i knla o J o o o o o o o m E t l m Ra ka Ra Ma Ra ka ka Ra E2 R2 Ra E2 Ra Ra Ea Ea 3 am Hilt UX 1 ale a Fat Channel Channel M osc Tiles A Tile shows basic information about the Feed it represents Bus tiles show only fader information Track Feed and Live Feed tiles display more information and provide control for a group of functions as shown below Fairlight XYNERGI Page 217 MIXING November 7 2014 Dynamics In indicator only appears Click here to when any dynamics present cycle the display Solo ON OFF between Pan EQ and Dyn Mute ON OFF Fader Control Click here to add this channel to the Multi Trim Insert IN OUT group the number goes red EQ IN OUT Called Channel One channel can be controlled in detail It is the Called channel In the picture above it is Track 6 To
316. mp gt jump to next or previous Point Head Tail or Sync Point of a clip on any selected track ctrl Shift Jump gt jump to the beginning or end of the Project Range Jump gt jump to the Head or Tail of the Range a Range must exist for this to work Jump 1 jump by one second Jump 2 gt jump by two seconds and so on up to 9 seconds Jump 0 jump by ten seconds Jump 00 gt jump by one frame Jump Clear jump to the previous frame edge unless already on one Locators Overview XYNERGI provides three non permanent Locators to use freely in editing or mixing They are designed to use quickly and are not saved with the Project Marks are saved see Using Marks Locators are stored using the set key next to the Numeric Keypad and recalled using the Loc key above it Get Ready Make sure the Go To menu is not active Storing Locators To store a location press the set button then press 1 2 or 3 While Set is active you can store other locations You can also use set in momentary style Hold it down press a number then release it The system will exit Set mode Going to a Location To locate to a stored location press the Loc button then press 1 2 or 3 You can also use Loc in momentary style Hold it down press a number then release it The system will exit Loc mode You can leave the Loc button latched if you wish to use locators a lot They can be interrupted temporarily by pressing Fadersets Go To BLUE
317. n about the source and destination patching associated with that tile Track 3 1 What are the Categories Each category name has two parts The first part can be Track a recording track Live a Live Feed which is a full featured channel bringing audio directly to a bus Main the Main mix bus MT Bus a Multi track bus as used in traditional mixing systems Fairlight XYNERGI Page 65 PATCHING SIGNAL PATHS November 7 2014 Sub Bus a multi Element bus used for extra mixing functions Aux Bus a mono or stereo bus tied to the Auxiliary sends on the channels Mon shows the elements of the Control Room and Studio monitor paths Analog an analog physical input or output Digital an AES EBU physical input or output MADI a MADI physical input or output Osc the system oscillator and noise generator The second part can be In the input of a signal path not a physical input Out the output of a signal path not a physical output Direct each signal can have a Direct Output Send Insert Send from a signal path Return Insert Return to a signal path Talkback the Talkback system shows Comm1 and Comm2 Inputs physical inputs analog or digital Outputs physical outputs analog or digital Meters the components of the current Meter Set see Meters page 303 So for example Analog Inputs means the physical analog input ports while Aux
318. n as OFF if below 99cB Pan values gt percentage left right of center Hold down the aut key for more functions Press the path EQ Or Dyn buttons for their details Aux ALT The three Aux modes are selected on the lower soft keys Aux sends are Muted using the ON MUTE button Multi Rel MULTI allows you to change mixing parameters on many paths at the same time When Multi is Off the Pad controls only the most recently selected path which is called the Current Module Pressing MULTI changes its display to MULTI REL relative All changes made with the Pad now apply to all selected signal paths Changes made with rotary knobs are applied relatively i e values amongst the signal paths remain different but rise and fall together But values are clamped when they reach the upper or lower limit Changes made with switches are applied absolutely even if values amongst the selected signal paths are different at the start Take care with Multi It s very powerful but also quite dangerous It s a good idea to switch it off as soon as you ve finished using it Fairlight XYNERGI Page 211 MIXING November 7 2014 Screen Mix Controls Choosing Your Mixer Screen In V3 0 software Fairlight software gained a new mixer screen By default it is displayed in preference to the old one but you have a choice The old screen is called FMC and the new one is called EVO Mixer Screen V4 0 software enables this
319. n of both the Decklink card and Post V5 0 Configuration of the Decklink card Configure the required settings for your Decklink card by navigating to START Setting Control Panel Decklink Blackmagic DeckLink 6 7 1 x Preference settings for your DeckLink HD Extreme 2 Settings Processing video Levels Audio Levels Set output sor amp HDMI amp R B x Set input SSA e eee at eae Lee e For video and audio capture Use video setup in NTSC At 7 5 IRE For use in the USA 4t 0 0 IRE for use in Japan IV Remove field jitter when video is paused T Select 4 4 4 on video output F Use 3 Gb s SDI For Single Link 4 4 4 J Set black ref on video output in capture When not playing video send Black te To all the video outputs Requires restarting your computer Set reference output timing __ 0 Reference input not detected cce ay It is critical that you select the appropriate Inputs for your system In the example we are intending to capture video from a Digital Betacam VTR via the Decklink Component inputs If you will be consistently using the same physical inputs for all video capture duties you should be able to set and forget this value Configure XYNERGI Video Capture options With the software launched and a Project with Pyxis track open navigate to Setup gt General Preferences Video Capture This window configures the Post V5 0
320. n the omf file Sub Composition OMF s created in AVID often derive clips from either the Master clip and the Sub Composition This option derives the names of clips from the Sub Composition Use this setting to give your clips more logical names if they are coming from an AVID and not displaying logical clip names Offset Entering a timecode offset moves the whole composition forwards on the timeline Fairlight XYNERGI Page 353 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT November 7 2014 Entering a track offset moves the whole composition down in the track display Importing Individual Sound Files Sound files of various types can be imported directly into your Post V5 0 project These include the following MP2 MP3 WAV BWAV AAC and more To import one use Windows Explorer or My Computer to locate the file then drag and drop it on to the Post V5 0 Edit Screen The file will be placed at the cursor position or in the range on the track where you drag it unless you use the options below Found at Setup General Preferences Options Place Files at Embedded Timecode r Place Files on Embedded Track M Bway MxF i BAN Mpeg T Quicktime Place Files at Embedded Timecode Some audio files carry a timecode with them Checking this option for a particular file type causes it to be placed at that timecode no matter where you drag it with the mouse Place Files on Embedded Track Some audio files
321. nd automation changes simultaneously To set this up Step 1 Select the Mixer Megamode Step 2 Mix On must be ON if not toggle it on Step 3 Select the Mix menu Step 4 Toggle the Target soft key so that it reads BOTH When you perform an audio edit with the Target set to Both an audio edit and an automation edit occur at the same time In the Undo List this will be seen as a single audio edit and will be undone ina single step Mouse Based Editing The mouse can be used to move the transport select and zoom tracks make ranges and edit clips This can be done irrespective of which editing or mixing mode is selected Transport Transport buttons are provided in the Solo theme To select this click General Preferences gt Display Active Theme Then select solo from the drop down menu With this theme active you may click on the transport buttons at the top of the screen Clicking REW and FF multiple times will increase the speed of movement each time Clicking the Loop button when a range is present will cause the transport to loop the range if any is present The spacebar on your qwerty keyboard can also be used to toggle between Play and Stop Right click in Timescale locate transport to that time and center that time on the screen Dragging and Scrolling the Transport Very fast locating is possible using right click and drag horizontally anywhere inside the track area of the Edit Screen To sc
322. nd is synchronised to fixed picture frames When working on radio spots interviews and music pieces we sometimes need to cut time as well as audio This is just like people used to do on tape The razor mode causes time to be manipulated as well as audio Fairlight XYNERGI Page 109 EDITING November 7 2014 When you cut audio the time it occupied is removed from the track and either e Everything afterwards trailing clips move earlier or e Everything before leading clips move later When you paste audio the time it occupies is inserted into the track and either e Everything afterwards trailing clips move later or e Everything before leading clips move earlier Control of the direction for razor cutting is in a special soft key menu that appears in the Pad only while you hold down the Razor button Choose leading clips Of trailing clips Razor editing always uses a range Get Ready Press the green Editor button Press the cut button to access the Cut menu Operation Locate the transport so that the cursor crosses the middle of at least one clip Identify the track containing that clip and double press its button to make it the only selected track If necessary use the Bank key Create a range within the clip using from and to Press the Razor button to highlight it Press cut range The width of the range is cut out of the track like a piece of tape and downstream clips move forwards Th
323. ndone Redo List Shows a list of the edits that can be redone Undo History Cut Ctrl X Cut Head Cut Tail Copy Ctrl C Copy Head Copy Tail Paste Ctrl V Paste Special Erase Delete Erase Head Erase Tail Restore Head Restore Tail Check Media Size Split Clips S Join Split Cleave Multi Channel Clips Restore Multi Channel Rotate Layers Reverse Rotate Layers Space Clips Evenly Copy Project Segment UnGroup Clips Shows a list of the edits that can be undone Cuts the selected clip or range to the clipboard Cuts the head of the clip at the cursor position to the clipboard Cuts the tail of the clip at the cursor position to the clipboard Copies the selected clip or range to the clipboard Copies the head of the clip at the cursor position to the clipboard Copies the tail of the clip at the cursor position to the clipboard Pastes a copy of the clipboard at the current position Allows characteristics of the first clip on the clipboard to be pasted Erases the selected clip or range Erases the head of the clip at the cursor position Erases the tail of the clip at the cursor position Extends the clip head to use all the recorded audio Extends the clip tail to use all the recorded audio Used for media that was imported while still recording opens up tail Splits the selected clips into two at the cursor Heals split in audio clips must be positioned together Unlinks linked clips Relinks previously linked c
324. nel Solo safe means cannot be muted by soloing another channel Channels can be prevented from being soloed in the following ways Fairlight XYNERGI Page 53 CHANNELS November 7 2014 e Using the Virtual Channel double click a channel s Name Plate in the Mixer Screen to open this Solo safe Using the Pad Step 1 Press the path button in the Editor or Mixer Megamode Step 2 Press it a second time to engage the PadLock menu Step 3 Press the Solo Safe soft key Solo Mute Swap XYNERGI allows you to swap all your mutes for soloes or vice versa This is very useful in a complicated edit session when you want to isolate a particular set of sounds You can solo them to make sure you re hearing the right thing then mute them to make sure the sound is not somewhere else as well To move channels from Solo to Mute Step 1 Engage the Solo menu by either holding down the solo button or pressing the sex button and then the Solo Menu button Step 2 Select some channels to be soloed Step 3 Hold down the Solo Menu button Two new buttons appear beside it Fairlight XYNERGI Page 54 CHANNELS November 7 2014 Step 4 P T tack Erak Trac 19 20 Track Track Track Track Track 41 42 43 41 42 cola Si solo mute menu 1z menu menu Press the Swap Mute button The Mute Menu appears and the channels that were soloed are now muted These channels are the ONLY channels muted if there were other
325. ning the Jogger Wheel to move to another track Release Track to drop the cut clip Press and hold cut clip Jog forward and release cut clip to drop the cut clip You can do the same with copy slip and trim These moves may feel awkward at first but remember your first mouse click and drag With practice you ll become a virtuoso editor Tactile Editing Detailed Description This section goes into more detail about editing Edit Modes XYNERGI editing uses five main modes selected in the Edit Megamode Copy copies the selection to the clipboard Enter pastes it into the tracks Cut cuts the selection to the clipboard Enter pastes it into the tracks Erase erases the selection Trim retracts or extends the heads or tails of clips Fade fades or cross fades the selection Once a mode is selected it remains current until another mode is selected The Cursor Most edits are performed at the Play Head or Cursor This is the vertical line in the center of the Edit Screen Reco ded Audio 9 Audio 1 Cursor Normally the Cursor is stationary and the clips scroll across the tracks The audio you hear is the waveform passing the Cursor hence its name Play Head Fairlight XYNERGI Page 111 EDITING November 7 2014 Moving Cursor Many products show stationary waveforms with a moving cursor To show this in Post V5 0 select Setup Locked Playhead from the Edit Screen menu bar When this item is t
326. nto your new macro Since your macro starts with the macro layout displayed this key will result in the macro layout being removed from the Picture keys when your macro runs To avert this problem add an extra press of the macro button at the end of your macro Or start with the macro trigger buttons on the Numpad Macro Names When macros are displayed on the picture keys their names can be seen This is very helpful for distinguishing them To name a macro do the following Step 1 Hold down the BLUE key and a macro button The Edit Macro layout is displayed on the Picture Keys Step 2 Select the macro you want to name by pressing its macro trigger button Step 3 Press the name soft key The QWERTY keyboard is shown on the picture keys Type a name for the macro To remove the existing name press De1 When you have the name you want press Enter Or press Exit to escape without changing the macro name The picture keys can only display short names It s best to use no more than two words of up to 5 characters in most cases some letters are thinner than others Macro Colour Groups You can set the background colour of your macros so that they form functional groups The system provides 10 colours for this purpose To set the colour group of a macro do the following Step 1 Hold down the BLUE key and press macro or Key 7 The Edit Macro layout is displayed on the Picture Keys Step 2 Select the macro whose colour group you want to
327. ntrols Note When ADR is in Record mode double clicking a cue will select it and initiate a recording Cycle Playing Back a cue Step 1 Turn off the Rec Playback Or Rehearse button if on or press the RECORD PLAYBACK soft key until its label is PLAYBACK This puts the ADR system in Playback mode Step 2 Select a cue The transport will locate to its In Time Step 3 Click cycle This will cause the transport to drive through the In and Out points once playing back the audio Note When the ADR is in Playback mode double clicking a cue will select it and initiate a playback Cycle Fairlight XYNERGI Page 99 ADR November 7 2014 Pre Record Pre Record automatically enters record a little earlier than the time of the cue This is useful when recording artists that tend to anticipate the entrance The streamer will still indicate the cue in time but you are able to capture the audio a little earlier Early In Early In can be clicked during the preroll of a record cycle It causes recording to start immediately There is also an early in soft key Rec Out If desired the system can ignore the Out time of the cue and just keep recording until you exit manually using Stop Jog Rewind etc The Rec Out soft key can be set to PROG programmed exit or OPEN keep recording until manual exit The Rec Out screen button does the same When selected blue the record Out time will be obeyed When unselected grey manua
328. o Allow a large number of audio edits to be undone redone When you issue an Undo Or Redo command the system will revert to the timecode location zoom setting and track selection at the time of the edit You can prevent part of this by changing a preference in the Setup gt General Preferences dialog This is found in the menus at the top of the Edit Screen General Preferences x Options Audiobase Playback Video Capture Projects Audio Plugins Number of Backups 5 Autosave Load Last Project on Startup D m DR2 Options I Restore Previous View on Project Load Undo Redo Options Cv PB head Follows Undo CM Zm Level Follows Undo Note Undo applies only to audio editing not mixing or automation moves Fairlight XYNERGI Page 19 THE XYNERGI TACTILE CONTROLLER November 7 2014 Zoom Hold down zoom then turn the Jog whee1 or press the and buttons to adjust the amount of time being displayed horizontally across the Edit screen A specific Zoom value can be obtained by holding down zoom and pressing a Numpad key combination making a number between 1 and 20 the releasing zoom The Zoom value is shown at the bottom of the Edit Screen Zoom 15 00 00 02 06 Zooming in and out can also be done using the wheel on your mouse when the Edit screen is in focus if not click somewhere on it Simply pressing and releasing zoom toggles between your last two zoom settings
329. o Buses using the Bus Assign screen Get Ready Step 1 Press the green Setup button Step 2 Press the Bus Assign button Fairlight XYNERGI Page 205 MIXING November 7 2014 The Bus Assign Screen The Bus Assign screen is operated with the mouse M H M M M FX Stereo FX Stereo ASLONGA TRACK6 a gz P e Jz Dp 3 ay Som Ao we u p pos N All Tracks M M M M M M M M M M Track 15 Track 16 Track 17 Track 18 Track 19 Track 20 Track 21 Track 22 Track 23 Track 24 fale 13 The 14th BE All Lives H M Track 36 M Track 35 M Track 34 M Track 33 M M M M M M M Track 26 Track 27 Track 28 Track 29 Track 30 Track 31 Track 32 w fz m tas aa aa B Tak 47 Deassign All ae BS on au Fad Eger G D no ge Py on Roo Ao Eset Tak 39 Trace 40 cae 41 Tee 43 Ao ae w Ao ee w m AD K py wo E ou O G Kie n He fe ul N AD kanes wo Trai Tra Track 5 am kaa fa a om RN a a om boat a x Am RM o a om AN D st Ag Rr o Tra Track 5 k ck f Track 65 Track 66 Track amp aa AN m aa aa om AT oO oO na AT a o aa ATO O m ATO J a om ATO J as aa ATO J N Tra k 62 Track 63 o Tra Tr An i J e 3 Ag i D J fatas 3 J on Ag ae sl a og AT J a A ATO J a An ae ao O A i co her 3 Ag i
330. o access another block of 48 You have the same selection methods e g using double press as in the normal Edit Megamode SEL mode has two ways of working momentary or latched For latched mode press and release seu Make your selection of tracks then press exit For momentary mode press and hold sex Make your selection of tracks then release sEL Fade and Crossfade Overview In the fade menu we can place level ramps at the begining fade in and end fade out of each clip A fade in starts from silence and ends at the full level of the clip and a fade out does the opposite Crossfades between two clips are created by first layering one clip on top of another then putting a fade in the upper clip This induces a complementary fade in the lower clip For clarity while reading this Help item turn on Display Layering by clicking view Display Layering above the Edit Screen Fairlight XYNERGI Page 106 EDITING November 7 2014 We can also control the fade profile i e its shape using the X Level and X Point parameters Get Ready Press the green Editor button Operation Press the fade button Locate the transport so that the cursor crosses the middle of at least one clip Identify the track containing that clip and double press its button to make it the only selected track If necessary use the Bank key The target clip should now be the only red clip on the screen Red means ready to edit Press the fade h
331. o level then press Enter Note POST V5 0 systems provide full native processing on every channel including EQ Filters Dynamics and surround panning This means plug ins can be reserved for special applications The Clip FX Smart Pane The Clip FX Smart Pane shows a history of the plug ins that have been rendered into the current clip i e the clip under the cursor on the Current Track This pane is shown whenever the Wave menu is current and can be displayed at any time by clicking View gt Smart Pane Clip FX After a plug in has been rendered into a clip it appears in the Clip FX display when that clip is current Effect Active FLOORFISH BLOCKFISH The Clip FX Smart Pane can be used as follows Active Determines whether the associated plug in will be used in the next render Add Click to add a plug in to the current clip The Plug in List is displayed allowing you to browse and select plug ins Remove Removes the currently selected plug in from the Clip FX list Click Apply to render the clip again Fairlight XYNERGI Page 291 PLUG INS REWIRE AND EXTERNAL PROCESSING November 7 2014 Edit Apply Copy Save Load without that plug in Opens the currently selected plug in from the Clip FX list You can edit the values using Preview as described above to hear the changes then click Apply to render the changes back into the clip Renders the clip again You can choose whether each plug in
332. o load a plug in for the current clip Fairlight XYNERGI Page 289 PLUG INS REWIRE AND EXTERNAL PROCESSING November 7 2014 Step 3 Use the Jog Wheel to search for a desired plug in to be used on this clip Step 4 Press the soft key to display the plug in controls Step 5 Park the timeline on the clip that you would like to process and press the softkey The clip will automatically start looping and you can now adjust all parameters in real time e s m 1 Music L Music R Whoash L Whoosh R Dialog 2 Step 6 When the clip sounds the way you want press the softkey This will directly render your plug in processing to the clip Note the original clip is still there on an underneath layer so that you can quickly go back to the original recording if required Fairlight XYNERGI Page 290 PLUG INS REWIRE AND EXTERNAL PROCESSING November 7 2014 Bm Load y _save save as Lells IlmiLo Ti Preview Render Exit ells m mil ass Pre Bass Pre_04 24 bit gt l 23 46 40 14 Spin Master sx20 Internal 49 4 e Top Layers D 178 15 17 23 52 43 10 For plug ins with tails to them such as delays and reverbs the system can extend the clip to capture the decay of the sound Use the Tai1 soft key to determine at what audio level the clip will be cut off Press Tail use the Jog Wheel to dial in an audi
333. o the top position To prevent a clip from changing its sync while dragging it to another layout hold down the key while dragging it Group Clips XYNERGI can create grouped clips that behave like individual clips To do this Step 1 Create a range containing the clips you want to group Step 2 Use the command gt A grouped clip appears in green when not selected If you have more than one track selected the group clip will look like a multi channel linked clip Editing of a grouped clip is the same as all other clips Double clicking a grouped clip shows it temporarily as separate clips allowing editing inside the group Double click again to restore the group Use gt to ungroup permanently Fairlight XYNERGI Page 160 EDITING November 7 2014 Clip Equalisation XYNERGI provides clip based four band parametric Equalisation plus shelving which can be applied to a single clip or range of clips within a Project EQ is performed by the system on a copy of the original media therefore applying an EQ change does not affect the audio data on disk The clip based EQ is independent of the track feed mixer EQ Note Clip EQ is a multi track operation Applying EQ Step 1 Click the clip EQ button in the Edit Toolbar or click view Smart Pane Clip EQ Clip EQ Button Step 2 Locate the cursor over the clip or define a Range of clips Step 3 To start editing drag one of the curve points in the EQ display see below Step 4 C
334. o three turns per second play speed at the current zoom setting While in Jog mode ctrl Jog Wheel go 5 times faster SHIFT Jog Wheel go 64 times faster SHIFT ctrl Jog Wheel go 512 times faster Shuttle BLUE Play Jog button gt enter Shuttle mode When Shuttle is active the transport moves forward or backward using the Jog Wheel as a speed dial Audio is heard with shuttle speeds up to about four times play speed depends on number of tracks playing and speed of disk system While Shuttle is active the Rew and rr buttons show which direction the transport is moving and can be pressed to change direction while maintaining constant speed When shuttle speed is equal to play speed the Play button lights up When shuttle speed is zero the stop button lights up Loop Jog Jogging has two types linear and loop Linear jogging is just like playing but with variable speed depending how fast you turn the Jog Wheel Loop jogging plays a tight loop repeating the same section over and over at normal speed The default loop length is one frame which means one frame of audio is repeated As you turn the Jog Wheel the transport moves forwards or backwards and so does the playback loop Loop jogging sounds quite harsh but it is a very useful analytic tool for editing It allows you to hear the tone or pitch changing in a piece of audio for example the onset of sibilant speech or a chord change in an orchestral pie
335. o tracks for VocAlign Processing The first selected track serves as the guide track VocAlign will attempt to match the second track to the guide track Note that VocAlign cannot process clips longer than 120 seconds Dream I vO0 0a35 Beta The_firm_48tk lt 48 tracks gt MFX Project File ll till een HUT HT WUUUUAUAUAUAUAUAUAT Boho it EE Step 3 Press the vocAlign soft key The VocAlign popup will appear Fairlight XYNERGI Page 177 TIME DOMAIN PROCESSING November 7 2014 1W VocALign Project o x Fie Edit View Options Play Help S EY aby x E GB NoimalFienbiny fimo ho hal mimo riri Render FL_7D4J2K8BQD Step 4 Adjust VocAlign parameters or use defaults see the VocAlign manual for details When you are ready press the Align button or the align soft key A new clip will be created on the Post V5 0 timeline and the original clip will be muted and preserved in the layer underneath Removing Clicks Clicks in audio media can be removed by rewriting waveform data using a simple linear smoothing algorithm Step 1 To enter the Wave Menu press the wave key Step 2 Select the track where the click is found Step 3 Identify the click by zooming in very close and position the click exactly under the cursor Step 4 Press the Remove Click soft key Step 5 The width soft key becomes active This should be set to match the number of samples occupied by the click To do this turn the Jog Whee
336. ode numbers at the start of the line 00 00 00 00 This line has one timecode number Fairlight XYNERGI Page 94 ADR November 7 2014 or 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 12This line has two timecode numbers The first timecode number becomes the cue in point and the second if present the cue out point Timecodes must contain 4 individual numbers separated by colons 01 00 23 12 or semicolons if the timecode is drop frame based 01 01 00 02 Here is an example of a text file in the correct syntax with timecode numbers at the start of each line 00 02 19 19 Her eyes shined bright and true 00 04 57 07 00 09 42 18 Do not look now but 23 58 39 03 00 02 58 19 Haven t seen you before Import from CSV File XYNERGI can also open ADR lists in comma separated variable CSV format In this case the Character should be included The format is as follows 2 columns of timecode Then next column is the character default is Then next column is the text Example 23 58 39 03 00 02 58 19 Andrew Haven t seen you before 00 02 19 19 00 03 19 19 Bill froggs are really cool 00 04 57 07 00 09 42 18 Do not look now Commas occuring in the text field will confuse the software unless the field is surrounded by quotation marks e g 00 02 19 19 00 03 19 19 Bill froggs are cool really cool Adding Cues Manually Step 0 Optionally create a range covering the cue you want to add This is probably the quickest way to set the In and Out times
337. oft key to display the seed name dialog Use the QWERTY keyboard to type the name then Tab or click the Starting Seed Number and use the keyboard to set it Using the Mouse The Seed Name dialog can be accessed at any time by selecting Tracks Set Record Seed Name Fairlight XYNERGI Page 84 RECORDING November 7 2014 The Seedname Dialog Enter the seed name you would like use for the selected tracks Starting Seed Number 1 _ Add Track name to head of dip name x cancel Use the QWERTY keyboard to type the name then Tab to or click the Starting Seed Number and use the keyboard to set it You can also choose the Add Track Name checkbox When this is selected the name of the track being recorded will be prepended to the clip name as well as the other items in the seed name Click ox or press Enter to finish You can do this while in Record Note If you give more than one track the same seed name at the same time their clips increment as a group preventing repeated names Clip Naming Each clip can be given a typed name For existing clips you select them and issue the clip name command You can also name clips while they are being recorded These facilities are available in the Editor Megamode and the Record Megamode We only show the latter here because it is more convenient especially to name whilst in Record Press the green Record Megamode button to access recording functions This includes na
338. ojects New Project2 Media FL_ Reccord Test 7_a2 GLTOSDLYDLO_F wav audio 00000000_00000000_E9640 ightAU Projects New Project2 Media FL_ Reccord Test 9_a4 GLTOSDLYDLO_H way audio O0000000_00000000_E9640 ightAU Projects New Project2 Media FL_ Reccord Test 8_a3 GLTOSDLYDLO_G way audio 00000000_00000000_E9640 ightAU Projects New Project2 Media FL_ Reccord Test 10_a5 GLTO9DLYDLO_J way audio O0000000_00000000_E9640 _ Select one file then click on the commands at the bottom of the dialog as follows Reveal File Opens Windows Explorer at the folder containing the selected file Locate Moves the transport to the start time of the original recording Paste Here Creates a clip using this media at the current timecode position on the current Edit Track Refresh The display is updated to include the latest recordings to have been erased or pasted not normally necessary as the display updates automatically Preview Plays the selected recording through the monitor system Press the same button again to stop playback ReSync Creates a clip using the selected media at the original recording timecode and on the original track Close Closes this dialog box The Escape button can also be used Importing Files XYNERGI has a number of features to allow the import and export of audio clips and Projects File Types POST V5 0 can import the following file types Individual sound files see section below Video Files these can be
339. olly inside the range will be affected by it Fairlight XYNERGI Page 127 EDITING November 7 2014 Fade Presets The system provides nine convenient fade shapes as presets These can be recalled instantly by clicking on the keypad at the left Having recalled a preset it can be applied to the Head and or Tail of the currently selected clips using the Apply button Presets A preset is a saved shape for head and tail Factory presets are provided for your use Custom presets are saved by you To load a factory preset press the Preset soft key then press keys 1 9 on the numeric keypad to choose one of the 9 factory fade presets The preset is loaded into the Shape graphs and can be applied to clips in the usual way Alternatively click a number in the preset pad at the left of the display 0 d z0 30 40 50 E Click to load a factory preset Fade Presets To load a custom preset Step 1 Press the preset soft key Step 2 Press custom preset Step 3 Turn the Jogger Wheel and as each custom preset is displayed it is also loaded Stop when you have loaded the one you want Alternatively use the custom presets pulldown menu in the Fades display z P t BE Click to load a custom preset Iration Capture Click to type a new name for a m Shape custom preset then click Save To save a custom preset Step 1 Set up the fade shapes you want to save Step 2 Press the preset soft key Step 3 Press save preset
340. omewhere else This leaves the first control unassigned Setting a Zoom Window Each page of the plug in layout may contain two built in zoom settings one for normal controls and one for ALT controls To create the built in zoom windows create a zoom window for normal and or one for ALT controls as described in the Plug in Zoom section above while the Plug in Editor is active When the Plug Editor is exited and saved these zoom windows are saved with it The built in Zoom windows are accessed whenever you toggle from non Zoom to Zoom using the upper 5th soft key They can be overridden at any time by the normal process of making a marquee but will re appear whenever Zoom is toggled on Saving the Fleximap The Fleximap is saved when you exit the editor using the same upper 4th soft key that you pressed to enter it Fleximap Files Fleximap files contain all the information about mapping of parameters to controls including the displayed names and control types There are some useful things you can do by editing with fleximap files directly e Delete a file containing errors so that the Plug in Editor can work You will see that a Fleximap file contains errors when the Plug in shows no parameter names in the Pad e Correct a file containing errors so that the Plug in Editor can work This requires some experience Most of the errors in Fleximap files are misnamed parameters See details below e Rename parameters en masse
341. onitoring commands see How To Monitors For details of the other modes and button hold down the xp1ain key and press the button for which you would like some Xplanation Project The Project Megamode is for file handling This is where you create load save and delete your work files For details of the main commands see page 338 For details of the other modes and button hold down the xp1ain key and press the button for which you would like some Xplanation Fairlight XYNERGI Page 25 THE NUMPAD November 7 2014 The Numpad The Numpad or Numeric Keypad is the center of a great deal of XYNERGI activity This section explains how to use it and gives more detail about its surrounding keys Parameter Entry Often you need to enter a numerical value This is normally terminated by pressing the Enter key The Jog Wheel and the and keys can often be used to raise or lower a value In the picture they are swapped Sorry Loc and Set The system maintains three Locators They are very useful for quick marking of positions and returning to them They are not saved with projects nor remembered between sessions The set and Loc buttons are used to store and retrieve these locators They can be used in both momentary hold down or latched press and release mode To store the current timecode into a location momentary mode Step 1 Hold down the set button Step 2 Press the 1 2 or 3 button Step 3 Release the set
342. or the set button But if you wish to use the Numeric Keypad for typing numbers you must turn Loc off Using Marks Overview XYNERGI allows you to create up to 100 timecode Marks which are stored in the Project file Marks can be edited and named They can also be used in Jump and Go To commands as target locations Fairlight XYNERGI Page 72 TRANSPORT November 7 2014 Create New Mark To create a mark press the Mark button at any time Editor Megamode This will put a Mark at the current timecode position Placing of Marks can be undone using the Undo button or the Undo command in the Edit Menu It is also possible to remove the undoability of marks This is done by clicking setup General Preferences gt projects and unselecting Marks are undoable Edit Marks You can display all the Marks you have made and change their names and timecodes remove them and more To display the list of Marks e Press the Go To button to display the Go To menu Then press the mark soft key e Choose view gt Marks The list of marks appears over the Edit screen Name Index Time My new mark 1 00 53 12 21 Another new mark 00 53 13 10 No name needed mark 00 53 14 07 Set Time Remove Remove All To select a Mark use the Jog Wheel the and buttons click with the mouse or type the index number on the Numpad To change the timecode stored in the mark press the Set Time soft key or click the set Time screen bu
343. oring the tracks Start playing your mix just before the beginning and put the transport into record before the sound starts Fairlight XYNERGI Page 275 PLUG INS REWIRE AND EXTERNAL PROCESSING November 7 2014 Plug ins ReWire and External Processing Introduction XYNERGI provides powerful support for 3 party hardware and software plug ins via the industry standard VST VSTi and ReWire protocols General Capabilities Plug ins can be instantiated placed in Track Feeds and Live Feeds This is done as an Insert to the feed See Inserting a Plug in below You can instantiate up to 6 plug ins per feed A total of 96 channels of plug ins can be instantiated These are mono equivalents e g a stereo plug ins uses two of these channels Control of plug ins can be graphical using the mouse or fader based using fleximaps The graphical controls are supplied by each third party manufacturer of plug ins Fleximaps allow physical control of plug in parameters and this how they are automated Access to control of Plug ins is via the Plug in button in the Channel Panel or via mouse clicking on the Fat Channel in the Mixer Screen Details below VST and VSTi var a Di o About VST VST Virtual Studio Technology is an audio plug in standard created by Steinberg The VST standard allows third party developers to create VST plug ins for use within VST host applications or to create VST host applications themselves Th
344. ort Zoom the audio scrollers by floating the mouse above it and turning the mouse wheel Alternatively hold down the shift and zoom keys then turn the Jog Wheel or press and buttons Other scroller preferences e Scrollers as outline you can display the scroller waveform in solid or outline format e Scrollers on full screen video you can choose to have the scroller display present when full screen video has been chosen This is useful for moving the timeline e Scrollers follows current track the scroller automatically chooses the most recently selected track for display You can also select tracks for scrollers by holding down shift and pressing zoom you can now release Shift and select scrollers on the track keys No more than two tracks may be selected Solo and Mute XYNERGI has a number of ways to solo and mute Briefly here they are XYNERGI Tactile Surface Press the solo button in the Editor or Mixer Megamode to toggle solo on the current path Fairlight XYNERGI Page 51 CHANNELS November 7 2014 Hold down the solo button in the Editor or Mixer Megamode for a couple of seconds It will display 24 paths that you can choose while the button is held down then released to go back to your current menu While it is held down you can bank up and down to access other paths Release solo without choosing a path to display the Solo Menu with 48 signal paths that you can select after releasing Solo Press
345. ose a Ea z A m im i i D 59 M Click here to define the current Defne lt 7 meter set ALIK Click here to display auxes Meter set instead of meter sets Metering History The Master Screen Meters keep a history of the ten loudest peaks for each meter with the timecode where each peak occurred The peaks camn be displayed in order of loudness Overshoots of up to 8 6 dB are shown although the audio is actually clamped to 0 dB at the channel output To display history click in the Peak or RMS level display for a meter Fairlight XYNERGI Page 305 METERS November 7 2014 Click here to delete 100 9 100 100 100 Clear Max aa ieee ledi da again Also clears Bim Sin 100 j 100 peaks and displayed maximum values Click any one of these fields to display or hide Peak or RMS history Peak History Main F 00 09 02 14 2 4 dB 00 09 02 14 2 1 dB 00 09 02 13 1 7 dB 00 09 02 43B aeaee Click on any timecode to locate 00 09 02 12 gt 2 5 dB mnere O0 08 59 13 gt 3 2 dB 0008 53 07 gt 3 4 dB 00 08 54 20 gt 3 5 dB 00 09 01 11 gt 3 6 dB 00 08 49 22 gt 3 6 dB Meter Sets A meter set contains eight sources which cqn come from a combination of any signal paths in the system These can be displayed the Master Screen Meters There are 9 meter sets in the system There are two ways to choose sources for the Meter Sets Using the Master Screen Met
346. ou jogged Example 2 Press down the cut clip key With the same hand press down the track up down button With your other hand turn the jogger wheel to change the track selection Release the cut clip key the clip you cut is now pasted on a different track With practice two handed editing can substantially increase your efficiency at repetitive editing tasks Copy Copy works exactly the same way as cut except that the audio is not removed to place it on the clipboard only copied Pasting after copy is the same as after cut Erase Erase works exactly the same way as Cut except that the audio is not placed on the clipboard The clipboard remains unchanged so its previous contents are ready to paste at any time Edit Soft Key Commands The following soft keys are available when the cut copy or erase modes are current gohan shee Cuts the clip into two pieces at the cursor position mute clip Silences the clip cleave clip Removes the link between stereo linked clips Creates a reversed version of the audio in the selected clip s and replaces the original with this reversed version reverse ke On Toggles the ghost image on and off Some people prefer working without it Fairlight XYNERGI Page 117 EDITING November 7 2014 Range On Soft Key Functions The following additional commands are available when the cut copy or erase modes are current and a Range s present split range 111 b
347. ou there without closing the dialog This can be very useful Go To Clip A Clip is a piece of audio Clips are created by recording and editing They all have names Go To Clip allows you to display a list of clips in the project then choose one and locate to it Like this Step 1 Press the Go To button Step 2 Press the clip soft key Step 3 The Clip Search dialog appears on the Edit Screen Fairlight XYNERGI Page 76 TRANSPORT November 7 2014 Layer StartTime End Time Duration 01 05 14 06 01 05 14 19 00 00 00000000_00000000_65B908E4_7F346339 48000 Hz 01 06 14 08 01 06 14 21 00 00 00000000_00000000_65B908E4_7F346339 48000 Hz 01 07 14 09 01 07 14 22 00 00 00000000_00000000_65B908E4_7F346339 48000 Hz 01 08 14 11 01 08 14 23 00 00 00000000_00000000_658908E4_7F346339 48000 Hz 01 09 14 12 01 09 15 01 00 00 00000000_00000000_65B908E4_7F346339 48000 Hz 01 10 14 14 01 10 15 02 00 00 00000000_00000000_65B908E4_7F346339 48000 Hz O1 14 14 15 01 11 15 04 00 00 00000000_00000000_65B908E4_7F346339 i 48000 Hz 01 12 14 16 01 12 15 05 00000000_00000000_65B908E4_7F346339 i 48000 Hz 00 52 09 06 00 52 09 10 00 00 00 04 00000000_00000000_658908E4_7F35633E i 48000 Hz 00 52 10 00 00 52 10 12 00 00 00 12 00000000_00000000_65B908E4_7F35633F i 48000 Hz 00 52 12 10 00 52 13 10 00 00 01 00 00000000_00000000_658908E4_7F356340 i 48000 Hz 00 52 13 20 8 00 52 14 16 00 00 00 20 00000000_00000000_65B908E4_7F35633E i 48000 Hz 00 53 0
348. ouse to select one of the plug ins Click on the Move Up Or Move Down icon to change the processing order Click on the Insert Bypass icon of any plug in to bypass its processing Using the Library Saving a Plug in preset in the Library is a great way of managing plug ins You can save any plug in or chain of plug ins with their current values as a Library preset This makes it very easy to load plug ins into any track or live feed partly because the Library page shows an array of named presets at the same time For instructions on using the Library see page 244 Sending an Aux to a Plug in Patch an Aux Output to the Input of a Live Feed using the Patch I O screen Use a stereo Aux and two Live Feeds if the Plug in is stereo shown schematically below cae Aux 3R Multi Live 1 Live 2 Patch Add a Plug in to the Live Feed using the method described above Now all channels feeding the Aux will be routed through the VST Plug in to the output of the Live Feed Assign the Live Feed to the Bus where the Plug in output is required Fairlight XYNERGI Page 283 PLUG INS REWIRE AND EXTERNAL PROCESSING November 7 2014 Controlling Plug ins on the Pad When the Plug in button is pressed the Pad rotary controls are focused on the current Plug in Each rotary control has two functions one normal function and one ALT function which is executed by holding down the ALT button and operating the rotary
349. out display is highlighted if switched OFF the display is dimmed The direct out level is shown with a horizontal bar If the direct out is switched ON the bar is yellow if switched OFF the bar is violet The section of the bar above OdB of gain is shown in red Fairlight XYNERGI Page 219 MIXING November 7 2014 e The Auxiliary bus display shows the status of each aux send The send level is shown with a horizontal bar If the send is switched ON the bar is yellow if switched OFF the bar is violet The section of the bar above OdB of gain is shown in red e The pan display offers a sophisticated representation of the signal path panner The display always shows a 5 1 sound field as the panning information for any path can be applied to any format bus to which it is assigned The red circle indicates the current pan position If a link group has been called the pan display shows a red circle for the pan position of each member and a yellow circle for the position of the virtual link group master When diverge is applied a white circle represents the perceived image size e When a bus is called the output box displays the output patching showing each bus element and the user and system names of the physical outputs to which they are connected Additional Mixer Screens Mouse Control Every switch and control in the Mixer Screen may be changed using mouse clicks For switches this is simply a case of clicking on them to toggle their
350. ow displays one row of macros on the picture keys with three buttons that switch the range from 1 10 11 20 and 21 30 3 rows displays all 30 macros on the picture keys Use keypad displays macros on the Numpad 9 at a time with three button that switch the range from 1 9 11 19 or 21 29 Note that macros 10 20 and 30 are not accessible via the numpad Step 3 Press either of the macro buttons twice The first time is to exit the Edit Macro layout and the second time is to display macro trigger buttons From now on simply press either macro button once to toggle macro trigger buttons on and off in your preferred location Note the system remembers your preferred location between sessions When the macro trigger buttons are displayed on the Numpad the keys flash a low Blue colour Macro trigger buttons 1 to 9 are accessed by Numpad 1 tO Numpad 9 Banks 1 to 3 are accesssed by pressing the 0 00 and subf Clear buttons respectively Momentary Access to Macros To gain momentary access to macros hold down either of the macro buttons After a short delay three rows of macros will be shown on the picture keys regardless of where your current macro location is You can fire off any number of macros while holding down the macro button then release it to return to your previous layout Fairlight XYNERGI Page 167 EDITING November 7 2014 Recording Macros To record a macro do the following Step 1 Hold d
351. own the BLUE key and press either of the macro buttons The Edit Macro layout is displayed on the Picture Keys Step 2 Select the macro you want to record by pressing its macro trigger button Step 3 Press the learn soft key The Edit Macro layout disappears and the macro fixed button starts flashing It will continue to flash while you record the macro Step 4 Record your keystrokes You can record as slowly as you like but the macro will play as fast as possible You may change modes and megamodes as often as you like You may press an existing macro trigger button to record its keystrokes into your new macro see Macro in Macro below Step 5 To stop recording press the macro fixed button It will stop flashing Context Macros are faithful but dumb They do not know where you started recording they only know which keys you pressed If you decide to run a macro from a completely different situation it may do something you didn t expect So try to remember the starting point of your macros or better still begin by establishing a starting point e g by selecting a megamode Adding Delay Sometimes macros run so fast that we create a race condition This happens when different parts of the XYNERGI system get their timing wrong and events happen in the wrong order If you play back a macro from the correct starting point and it does not repeat the desired commands try recording it again but this time insert
352. p gt General Preferences Media Libraries Enter the Server Name in the field provided for QTube When making your first QTube search for the session you will be asked to log in to your QTube account Searching Step 1 Display the QTube interface by clicking View Smart Pane gt Tube Gateway The interface is displayed Fairlight XYNERGI Page 188 AUDIOBASE CLIP SEARCH CLIPSTORES QTUBE November 7 2014 x e EINSEXTRA anon gt PD SPORTS 2 Clip ID Created Duration Owner Category 17008 EINSEXTRA AKTUELL 06 00 2014 10 29 04 00 58 00 00 QUANTEL GER QTUBE 17013 EINSEXTRA AKTUELL 09 00 i EINSEXTRA AKTUELL 10 00 EINSEXTRA AKTUELL 11 00 17016 EINSEXTRA AKTUELL 12 00 Bae 17017 EINSEXTRA AKTUELL 13 00 2014 10 29 12 17018 EINSEXTRA AKTUELL 14 00 2014 10 29 13 00 58 00 00 QUANTEL GER QTUBE 17019 EINSEXTRA AKTUELL 15 00 2014 10 29 14 00 58 00 00 QUANTEL GER QTUBE 17023 EINSEXTRA AKTUELL 16 00 2014 10 29 15 00 58 00 00 QUANTEL GER QTUBE Step 2 Enter text in the Search field You may click on Title Owner Category or Clip ID shown above the Search field to choose the database field you are searching Please consult the QTube website for information on the use of strings and wildcards If there are search results you may click on them to display a thumbnail in the Smart Pane and also some database data for that record Placing Video Clips To place
353. part of the video capture system Fairlight XYNERGI Page 317 PYXIS TRACK November 7 2014 General Preferences REG Projects Scrollers Watermark Audio Plugins Options Audiobase Playback Video Capture Device Decklink Video Capture x m Capture Settings Standard bs 720 x 576 8 bit 25 00 fps Capture Size Input Source Record Format DY25 MEDIASUBTYPE_UYVY Capture Format Frame Offset jo 25 FPS Presets z Save Delete Cancel Apply Capture Size is a default value based on whether Post V5 0 is launched in Standard or High Definition mode and the current project sync settings See View gt Smart Pane gt Sync If this setting is not the format you are wishing to capture it is recommended you consider exactly what format you wish your project to be and configure it in consequence The Device value tells Post V5 0 which video hardware capture unit will provide the incoming video signal Under normal conditions this will be Decklink Video Capture Input Source is currently not activated Setting the correct Video Input must be performed within the Decklink Control Panel See above Record Format is the video file and codec format for capturing the incoming video signal The options available are e DV25 DV Codec 3 5Mb sec SD NTSC or PAL ONLY e MPJEG e Uncompressed Fairlight XYNERGI Page 318 PY
354. phic representation click the cate button press Enter to process your settings All pink areas in the clip will be removed retaining the grey areas NOTE After gating with the audio broken up into multiple clips As with many other editing functions in Post V5 0 the original audio is not affected by clip gating only the clips that reference it Any audio removed by gating can be recovered using the Trim function see Trim Function under the chapter on Editing You have the choice to use the profile or the audio to calculate the levels used by the gate function Using the audio is absolutely accurate but takes a little longer to scan Replacing Audio Media As mentioned elsewhere in this manual a clip is a reference to a piece of media on disk Editing the clips is non destructive to the media it simply changes the portion of the media being played by the clip Sometimes it is also valuable to change the media played by a clip This can be done in two ways Step 1 Step 2 Replace the media of the selected clips Replace the media of all project clips using a particular piece of media at the moment Select one or more clips by the usual methods You can use All Layers to affect the clips on all layers and you can use a Range to select multiple clips horizontally in this case only clips lying entirely inside the range will be affected Issue the command Process Change Media Selected Clips Fai
355. quires this parameter to be set to Play only to work correctly Some equipment e g SoundMaster requires this parameter to be set to Play and Varispeed to work correctly LTC Chase When a machine M1 or M2 with this setting is placed on line it means that XYNERGI will chase Longitudinal Time Code entering the SMPTE In port on the SX 20 Play Tracking Determines how many incorrect frames the system must see before it jumps to be in sync with the incoming timecode or stops if no timecode is coming in This allows the system to keep playing over timecode that has gaps Record Tracking As with Play Tracking but recording uses a different number This is because recording sometimes needs to be more tolerant Note that if timecode sync is lost during recording then re established the transport will go back into Play but not into Record Fairlight XYNERGI Page 367 SYNC AND MACHINE CONTROL November 7 2014 Run Lock If the Play Run Lock checkbox is ticked the system will continue to play after first achieving lock to timecode no matter what the timecode does The lower Run Lock checkbox provides the same option when recording MTC Chase When a machine M1 or M2 with this setting is placed on line it means that XYNERGI will chase MIDI Time Code entering the MIDI In port on the SX 20 The settings are identical to those for LTC Chase Machine Control Indicators Name Name of the 9 Pin Device Servo LEDs
356. r you can place your projects elsewhere as long as you select a designated Media Device If you enter a comment this text will appear in the Title Bar of the Edit screen whenever the project is loaded Give your project a name and select the appropriate options You are ready to begin Fairlight XYNERGI Page 348 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT November 7 2014 Backup Project to Folder Both MT files and DR2 files can be backed up using File Backup Project to Folder option This feature copies the project file and all the associated media files audio and video to the designated folders Backup Project to Folder places all files associated with a project in a single place making it easy to restore them later Many facilities use inexpensive USB drives for backup Restoring files is simply a matter of dragging and dropping files from the backup folder to the appropriate Audio and Video Media Devices Media Scanning Normally the system scans all available media to ensure that it is up to date with available files This takes some system bandwidth and memory in particular If you do not need this function i e if your storage contents are not being changed by other computers you may turn off background scanning in Setup gt General Preferences Projects If you open a project whose media is not online and then you bring the media online it will not be found if background scanning is switched off You can however force
357. r the Numeric Keypad it must be available for parameter entry i e not used by Loc Set Fader Sets etc Press the Enter button It is also possible to trim the clip level i e move it up and down rather than set an absolute value Use the Trim Clip command for this When using a range all the clips that are wholly inside the range can be affected Jog Level and Jog Display A quick way to change clip level or display amplitude is to use the Jog Level and Jog Display buttons These appear next to the Jog Wheel whenever the Clip Level menu is active To quickly change clip level Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Start with the cursor touching a clip whose level you wish to trim Press and hold the Jog Level button Turn the Jog Wheel to adjust the level trim displayed in the dialog box Fairlight XYNERGI Page 134 EDITING November 7 2014 Step 4 At the same time the clip waveform will change amplitude When ready release the Jog Level button to apply the level change Note Clips on multiple tracks can be level adjusted at the same time If a range is present all clips wholly inside the range will be affected To quickly change clip display amplitude Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Start with the cursor touching a clip whose amplitude you wish to trim Press and hold the Jog Disp button Turn the Jog Wheel to adjust the amplitude trim displayed in the dialog box At the same time the clip waveform will change
358. rack i 818 aC Delete Pyxis Track Convert To or From Midi Tracks Set Audio Track Count Rename Track Set Record Seed Name Add Clip Set Display Level Set Track Colour gt Arm Tracks Solo Tracks Mute Tracks Safe Tracks Select All Viewed Tracks Fairlight XYNERGI Page 311 PYXIS TRACK November 7 2014 Alternatively use the Add Pyxis command in the Setup Megamode Once created the Video track appears at the top of the Edit Screen Adding a Second Pyxis Track Note This feature is licensed if you wish to purchase a licence please contact your Fairlight distributor It is possible to add a second Pyxis Track using the same command Tracks Add Pyxis Track Adding a second track puts more demand on system resources particularly memory and CPU bandwidth If you plan to use a second video track particularly with HD formats we recommend upgrading your host PC to Windows 7 64 bit and bringing the amount of RAM up to 6 GBytes The second video track can be used to play out 2 video streams when used in conjunction with Black Magic Design 3D Extreme HD card This enables Post V5 0 to play 3D footage NOTE BMD 7 8 drivers rc27 or later required Capturing importing and editing the second video track is done the same way as for the first see sections below To select one or both video tracks for these activities use the mouse to click the V1 or V2 button at the left of the tracks Startup with Dual
359. rack s Step 3 Press the var var 1 fror 1 fr softkeys to slip the clip s by the selected amount When there is no Range only the top layer of clips highlighted under the cursor is nudged The var and var keys move selected clips by an amount controlled by the variable soft key It is usually set to a small amount e g a few subframes for very fine control of clip position Setting the Variable Nudge To set the amount that var and var will nudge the clips Step 1 Press the variable soft key Step 2 Turn the Jog Wheel or type a number on the Numpad Step 3 Press Enter Nudge with A Range Follow these steps to perform a Nudge with a range selected Step 1 Press the nudge key to select Nudge mode Step 2 Use the from and to keys to select a Range that includes all clips to be nudged Step 3 Press the var var 1 fror 1 fr softkeys to slip the clip s by the selected amount When a Range is selected all layers of clips within the Range are nudged including those which are completely buried Fairlight XYNERGI Page 122 EDITING November 7 2014 NOTES Nudging is possible while the transport is in play When nudging a Range clips not wholly within the Range are not affected However the Range itself is also nudged so it is possible to keep nudging the Range without resetting the From and To points This can be used for example to phase the audio with a guide track using Variable nudge with a
360. racks are described earlier in this chapter on page 79 Fairlight XYNERGI Page 86 RECORDING November 7 2014 Auto Recording Overview XYNERGI allows you to record sections of track automatically with the transport doing the pre roll punch in and punch out This is done by making a range using the From and To keys then using the Record Range command on the Record menu Press the green Record Megamode button to access recording functions Patch inputs to one or more tracks and arm them Auto Rec uses a Pre Roll The Pre Roll time can be set e Inthe ADR menu press the green Record Megamode button then ADR then use the on screen dialog e Inthe Sync Setup menu press the green Setup Megamode button then syne Setup then use the Prero11 soft key The rec range button is displayed to the left of the Jog Wheel Press the rec range button to do an automatic recording of the range Note You can also access rec range by holding down the Record button This shows a menu of options in the Pad Recording and Editing Multiple Takes Introduction In many situations we need to record multiple takes of the same audio in sync to picture or existing audio Examples are Post Sync dialog ADR Foley and music recording XYNERGI allows you to record multiple takes on a single track then easily audition and edit them into shape Recording Multiple Takes When recording a section of audio in sync with picture you can punc
361. re than one format simultaneously Every channel that goes to the Main Bus can also be assigned manually or automatically to the Sub Bus that will be used for Reduction for details see Bus Assign later in this section In addition you can offset the level of a channel going to the Reduction Bus compared with its level going to the Main Bus To use Bus reduction Step 1 Select a Sub Bus with non zero format Step 2 Press Reduct n Mode Step 3 Use the soft keys to set the Reduction Mode Normal gt no reduction Sub Bus level Main level Reduce gt reduction is on Path is assigned to the Reduction bus automatically when assigned to Main Free reduction is on Path assignment is independent Fairlight XYNERGI Page 202 MIXING November 7 2014 Step 4 Press end to exit In Reduction Mode a Sub Bus has an independent fader on each channel These are controlled using Faders To see Faders To later in this chapter Sub Bus faders may be set pre or post the Main channel fader using Bus Params See Bus Params later in this chapter All reduction faders default to OdB in post fader mode they offset Reduction fader levels from Main fader levels Custom Bus Formats You can create new Bus Formats as follows Step 1 Exit from the XYNERGI software Step 2 Open the Fairlight Setup Utility by clicking Start and then typing setup into the edit box then select Fairlight Setup Utility from the list of match
362. rent values into the range This is very useful for working with scenes or sections with different sound requirements Glide Range A range must be on This command takes the data at the beginning of the range and glides smoothly to the current control value fader or pot by the end of the range Preview Trim This command can raise or lower fader levels within a range by a constant amount It can only be used with physical faders It requires Preview to be on and a range to be present To use Preview Trim Step 1 Ensure Mix is On Preview is On and a range is present Step 2 Enable fader level automation and put the channels to be trimmed into Preview using the faders Auto buttons Step 3 Enter the Mix Menu and press Preview Menu Step 4 Press the Preview Trim soft key The faders of the selected channels will snap to 10 dB Step 5 Move the faders playing if desired to establish the amount of trim you want Step 6 Press the Commit P Trim soft key To escape with no change press the cancel P Trim Soft key Live Preview This is a quick way of getting signal paths in and out of Preview status When Preview is toggled ON and this Live Preview is toggled ON selecting any signal path puts it into Preview Read to Preview Pressing this soft key while signal paths are in Preview status will load the current Read value of enabled parameters into the control fader or pot It can then be used to fill range glide range or a
363. riting automation data Press the path button to access them Enable Parameter s Press the Enable Params button In the enable layout you choose parameters for writing automation data When a path enters Write or Trim only enabled parameters will have their values stored You can choose them individually like EQ In in groups like EQ ALL or choose everything with All Params A second press of All Params will turn everything off For this How To enable only Fader and Pan If you are making a baseline pass for all paths press A11 Chans but not for this How To Press Exit to return to the Mix menu for the next item Note that the Fader and Pan controls have blue triangles next to them showing that they are enabled for automation On Stop Setting The on stop soft key controls what happens to automation values after you stop writing e g when you press STOP during an automation pass Press the soft key repeatedly to cycle through the options Return gt the last value you wrote is ramped to the previous value of the parameter using the Glide Out Time see Utils menu Fairlight XYNERGI Page 274 AUTOMATION November 7 2014 Hold gt the last value you wrote is held until the end of the Project erasing all following changes Event the last value is held until the next event i e change in value that you wrote previously using the Glide Out Time see Utils menu Set the value you want Working With the Pad
364. rlight XYNERGI Page 146 EDITING November 7 2014 The system displays a dialog where you can browse for a media file Choose new media file Look in jo Media gt e Fe A FL_ _al 4PHS6NYZ4X71M wav A FL_ _al 4PHS6NYZ5B73F wav A FL P A FL_ _a1 4PHS6NYZ4 71N wav A FL_ _al 4PHS6NYZ5B73G wav A FL E A FL_ _al 4PHS6NYZ4X71P way A FL_ _a1 4PH56NYZ5B73H wav A FL DE 73 FL_ _al 4PHS6NYZ4X710 way A FL_ _al 4PHS6NYZ5B73J way A FL E FL_ _al 4PHS6NYZ4X71R way FL_ _al 4PHS6N Z5272B wav A FL A FL_ _al 4PHS6NY24X715 way FL_ _a1 4PHS6N 25272C wav A FL Desktop A FL_ _al 4PHS6NYZ4X71T way A FL_ _al 4PHS6NY25272D wav A FL A FL_ _al 4PHS6NYZ4X71 wav A FL_ _al 4PHS6NYZ5272F wav A FL amp A FL_ _al 4PHS6NYZ4X7 1W way A FL_ _al 4PHS6NYZ5272G wav A FL A FL_ _al 4PHS6NYZ42Z71_ way A FL_ _al 4PHS6NYZ5272H wav A FL UES 1A FL _91 4PHS6NYZ4Z71X way A FL_ _al 4PHS6NYZ5472 way A FL e A FL_ _al 4PHS6NYZ4Z71Y way FL_ _a1 4PH56NYZ5472K wav A FL Wr A FL_ _al 4PHS6NYZ4271Z wav A FL_ _al 4PHS6NYZ5472L wav A FL A FL_ _al 4PHS6NYZ4Z720 wav A FL_ _al 4PHS6NYZ5472M wav A FL My Computer fm A FL_ _a1 4PHS6NYZ5673D wav A FL_ _a1 4PHS6NYZ5472N wav A FL A lt a Oech ae File name gt Places Files of type v Cancel Step 3 Browse to find the media you want and click the Open button The system replac
365. rn is selected the parameter ramps to the previously recorded value at the end of the Glide Out time see page 256 If On Stop Event is selected the last written value remains in force until a previously recorded event is encountered To set the On Stop value e Press the on Stop button in the Mixer Megamode until it displays the value you want e Click one of the On Stop values in the Automation panel of the Mixer Screen On Stop buttons Automation Playback The NAME automation system ensures that your mix will always play back exactly as recorded There are two main forms of automation data recorded in a project The first is the static snapshot of all parameters which is recorded whenever a mix is saved The second type of data are the dynamic auto Fairlight XYNERGI Page 256 AUTOMATION November 7 2014 mation events that are recorded every time a parameter is modified while the system is writing or trimming mautomation Once a dynamic event has been recorded on a feed or bus that parameter will be in READ whenever Mix ON is engaged and the transport is in PLAY When the system detects that a parameter control has changed while in Write or Trim a dynamic event is recorded that stores the previous value and the new value FROM value and TO value of that specific parameter at a specific timecode location When mix on is engaged and the transport is located to any position on the time line the automation syste
366. roll the tracks up and down right click and drag vertically anywhere inside the track area of the Edit Screen Fairlight XYNERGI Page 150 EDITING November 7 2014 d Lamaihiadad dedi deh ok aiala gt Maltsdedbb ila tide dih and drag Kalimba fi vertically to scroll the Kalimba tracks sr sr Right click and drag horizontally to move the transport The tracks can also be scrolled using their scroll bar at the right If the Play Head is unlocked you can locate the transport just by right clicking anywhere in the track area or the timeline above it Note Unlocked Play Head means that the clips are stationary while the Play Head moves left to right To unlock the Play Head click setup gt Locked Playhead until the tick is removed Mouse Jogging When the Jog button is toggled on you may move the transport as usual with the Jog Wheel or right click and drag it with the mouse in order to hear audio Zooming To Zoom the tracks horizontally turn the Mouse Wheel To Zoom the tracks vertically hold the ctr1 button down and turn the Mouse Wheel Track Selection There are two ways to select tracks with the mouse e Click anywhere in a track This will select that track and deselect all others e Click any track number to toggle its selection This does not affect the selection of other tracks Double click a track number to make it the sole selection There are also short cuts for selecting multiple trac
367. rs 1 to 24 appear on the track keys The selected number corresponds to the number of faders in your Mixer Set Fairlight XYNERGI Page 240 MIXING November 7 2014 Step 3 Choose a number from 1 to 24 If you choose a number that greater than the number of faders in your system Mixer Set will not work correctly Step 4 If desired press the Fader Sets button to unlatch it if you prefer you can keep the Fader Sets layout handy for more changes Mixer Set Modes Mixer Set has three modes Variable Fixed and Off The procedure above turns Mixer Set on and puts it in Variable mode That means any change to channel selection will add or remove a fader from the surface If Mixer Set is in Variable mode toggling the 0 in Fader Sets OFF will put it in Fixed mode This means it keeps the current selection of channels but does not respond to any further changes in selection This can be very useful for putting channels next to each other but only selecting the ones you want to edit Choosing a Fader Set even re asserting the one that is illuminated on the Numpad puts Mixer set in the Off state Call button For each fader the Call button puts that channel into the Pad It does not select the channel for editing or mass channel mixing operations Its action is NOT equivalent to pressing the channel s selection button on the XYNERGI surface because e The selection button selects the channel as well as calling it e The select
368. rt with the Cut or Copy menu active press the cut or Copy button in the Editor Megamode Step 2 Hold down the suirt button and press the green Editor Megamode button The Quick Edit layout is shown The Record Megamode button can also be used allowing you to perform edits easily while recording Step 3 To remove the Quick Editor from the surface repeat Step 2 nudge nudge mute This layout contains only 13 buttons though it may be increased in the future Nudge Left Right These keys move the currently targeted clips one frame earlier or later Their action is exactly the same as the corresponding commands in the Nudge Menu but it is not necessary to go there Trim Left Right These keys combine the Jog Wheel and the Trim function To use the Trim Left button Step 1 Start with the cursor touching a clip whose head you wish to trim Fairlight XYNERGI Page 141 EDITING November 7 2014 Step 2 Press and hold the Trim Left button This will cause the head of the selected clip to extend fully Step 3 Use the Jog Wheel or any transport control to locate to the point where you want to trim the head Step 4 Release the Trim Left button to make the edit Note Clips on multiple tracks can be trimmed at the same time These keys combine the Jog Wheel and the Fade function To use the Fade Head Curve button om Fade Head Curve Fade Tail Curve Step 1 Start with the cursor touching a clip where
369. s a kind of all purpose mixing environment where any path can be selected and any mix parameters can be accessed EQ Details There are four pages for EQ To switch use ALT lower soft keys Page 1 Bands 1 to 4 are shown with Gain controls at the right and Frequency at the left Page 2 Bands 1 and 2 are shown in more detail In the detailed mode SHAPE refers to the type of filter being used for that band with a choice of Notch Bell Hi Shelf or Lo Shelf Range refers to the frequency range in which the band operates with a choice of low frequency LF low mid LM high mid HM or High Frequency HF Page 3 Bands 3 and 4 are shown in the detailed mode Page 4 Hi and lo pass filters are shown Filter bands In Out at left Hi Lo selector at right Hold down the aut key for more functions EQ ALT EQ In Out is toggled by an upper soft key When EQ is in circuit its graph line changes from grey to heavy yellow and the o In button has a bright LED above it The four EQ modes are selected on the lower soft keys Path Details Level is the main channel fader Shown as OFF if below 99dB BLUE Touch Level knob or Fader gt set level to 0 dB Pan values gt percentage left right or front back of center BLUE Touch Pan 1R knob gt set Pan LR to center Spread applies only to Link Groups It is a measure of how wide the elements are panned into the Surround field Divergence measures how tightly signal is panned
370. s if used SX 20 and one or more SX 48s In most installations they can be left powered on all the time and will wake up when the PC starts up and the CC 1 or CC 2 board initialises Step 3 Power on the XYNERGI tactile surface Step 4 Start the XYNERGI application by e double clicking its desktop icon or e by selecting it in the Start Menu under the Fairlight group System Shutdown Step 1 Exit XYNERGI by selecting Exit from the File Menu or by clicking the Edit Screen close box or by the keystroke combination Alt F4 when the edit screen is in focus click anywhere on that screen to bring it into focus if necessary Step 2 If a project is open the system will prompt you to save any changes that have occurred since it was opened x Would you like to save it now The current project has been modified Fairlight XYNERGI Page 10 XYNERGI OVERVIEW November 7 2014 Click Yes if you want to save the changes in the project This may take a minute or so during which a progress bar will grow in size Step 3 You may now power down the XYNERGI surface and shut down your PC if desired It is recommended that the audio interface boxes remain powered up unless you are dismantling the installation Graphic Themes XYNERGI allows a choice of colour schemes which are called themes Three themes are provided To change theme Step 1 Click the setup menu item above the Edit Screen Step 2 Click General Preferences
371. s then start playing It allows you to play over editing work that you have just completed When the system starts up Review is set to 4 seconds You can change that using the Numpad as follows Step 1 Hold down Review Step 2 Press a button from 1 to 9 Step 3 Press more numpad buttons if you like Step 4 Release Review The review time is set to the number you pressed and the review command is issued each time you press a number Play Jog toggles between playing and jogging If the transport is in any mode except Jog this key initiates Jog mode When Jog is active the key is illuminated in blue Fairlight XYNERGI Page 30 THE NUMPAD November 7 2014 If the transport is already in Jog this key initiates Play mode When Play is active the button is bright yellow If the BLUE key is held down when Play Jog is pressed the transport goes into Shuttle mode constant speed forward or reverse controlled by the Jog Wheel When Shuttle is active the key flashes blue When Jog mode is active the transport moves as you turn the Jog Wheel Audio is heard on all tracks up to about four times play speed depends on number of tracks playing and speed of disk system Jog Speed Jog Speed depends on Zoom setting the wider you zoom the faster you jog This can be changed in two other ways Hold down Jog and select Jog Gear on the soft keys e Hold down zoom and press and release Jog this sets the jog gear ratio t
372. s Track if enabled the timecode generator if enabled and any machines that are being controlled by the system Transport commands include Play Stop Record Jog Rewind Shuttle and FF The timeline is shown at the top of the Edit Screen 132 133 134135 138 137 1 S139 140 141 142 143 144 140 141 143 143 144145 146 147 145 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 04 00 00 16 See D000 1 04 00 07 00 Play Head The line in the center of the Edit Screen is called the Play Head This is the current point where the system plays audio and video It is also the point where most edits occur The timecode display shows the position of the Play Head Project The file created by Fairlight software containing the stored audio and its editing and mixing instructions Physical Input Output An analog or digital audio input or output Track Feed A signal path channel feeding to or from the disk recorder which can be processed and routed to mix buses and monitoring COND CC1 Systems equipped with CC 2 have two types of track Playback Tracks and Full Tracks e A Playback Track is not able to record or take a physical input It cannot have insert sends and returns that exit the physical system nor Direct Outputs e A Full Track can record and can also take a physical input and if desired deliver it directly to mix buses and monitoring this is called Thru mode Fairlight XYNERGI Page 2 INTRODUCTION November 7 2014
373. s that the Reduction Bus fader is an offset to the Main bus fader In both instances post is the more common setting except where Aux buses are being used for headphone cue mixes in which case they are usually independent of the main mix To use Bus Params Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Press the green Setup button Press the Bus Params button Select the destination bus Note that all Aux buses are shown but Sub Buses are only shown if they are Reduction Buses Select some Tracks or Live Feeds Use the pre post soft key to toggle pre post The gt symbol shows which is selected If the setting is not the same for all the selected paths the gt is displayed twice and the soft key flashes Pressing the soft key will make them the same Use Bank and Tracks Or Lives to reach more paths Press Exit to finish Signal Processing Using the Pad Overview The Pad can be used to set signal processing parameters In this guide you will see its general workings using the EQ control as an example Note Extensive mouse based control of signal processing is also available For details please see Screen Mix Controls on page 211 The Pad rotary controls are always available To choose what type of controls are active Choose the Mix Megamode by pressing the green mixer button We will use the EQ display to show how the Pad works Press the o button Operation The rotary knobs control t
374. s the basis for starting an automation pass Fairlight XYNERGI Page 264 AUTOMATION November 7 2014 Clipboard to Preview This is a way of copying automation data from any point to any other The clipboard is loaded in the Path Copy menu by pressing the copy soft key Then in the Preview menu pressing the Clipboard to Preview softkey loads the copied value of enabled parameters into their controls fader pot or switch for all signal paths in Preview status From there it can be used to fill range glide range or as the basis for starting an automation pass Flood range This command is also in the Path Copy menu and is connected to the above After copying a channel s parameters to the clipboard you can flood fill them directly into the automation range for another path To use make a range and select the source path Copy the mix parameters from the selected path by pressing the copy soft key Now select the destination path and press the flood range soft key All the enabled parameters will be pasted to fill the range with automation values from the source to the destination The Utils Menu The Utils menu contains some options that are relevant to automation It is found in the Setup Megamode Glide Out When a parameter transitions from one RECORD value to a new READ value discontinuously as when dropping out of RECORD or when merging one mix into another this value is used to define a ramp from the previous data to t
375. s the sync button in the Setup Megamode Alternative Transport Set For users more accustomed to earlier Fairlight products an alternative transport layout can be chosen To do this press the play jog button on the Setup Megamode When play jog is toggled on the keys are coloured violet and work as shown below This is always a play key This key toggles between Jog and Stop Jumping Overview The Jump keys locate the transport instantly to your choice of Jump Targets such as clip heads and tails fades and marks Fairlight XYNERGI Page 70 TRANSPORT November 7 2014 To set the current Jump Target hold down either Jump Key and use the soft keys to choose one or more targets To jump by a number of seconds hold down either Jump Key and use the Numeric Keypad to select the length of jump from one to nine seconds 0 jumps 10 seconds 00 jumps 1 frame The Jump Menu While you hold down a Jump Key the soft keys offer the following Jump Targets Select one or two and release to jump there Next time you use a Jump key it will use the same target unless you change it Variable jumps by the number of frames shown next to the word Variable To set the Variable parameter press its soft key and type in a number on the Numeric keypad or use the Jog Wheel Release the J ump Key when ready to accept the value Bar Jumps by the length of one music bar To set bars and tempo use the menu Setup Bars and Beats Setup
376. s ticked the system will continue to play after first achieving lock to timecode no matter what the timecode does The lower Run Lock checkbox provides the same option when recording Locate Method Cue Only Lace Window 00 00 29 29 Tracking Algorithm jog Power 2 5 Tracking Algorithm play chase Power 12 5 As for TC Master but there is an individual choice of tracking algorithm for Play and Jog Remote Slave Mode When a machine M1 or M2 with this setting is placed on line it means that XYNERGI emulates a 9 pin machine and will obey commands sent to it It is the master for timecode At the same time its transport controls are active Fairlight XYNERGI Page 366 SYNC AND MACHINE CONTROL November 7 2014 Select 9 pin ID Allows you to choose the type of machine being emulated by XYNERGI This allows for slight variations in the 9 pin protocol Status Sense Play Tally Controls an aspect of 9 pin performance This parameter controls the value of bitO 0 Byte 1 in the Sony Protocol command Ox7X 0x20 Status Data sent from XYNERGI system to the Sony master device in response to the 0x61 0x20 Status sense command If Play Only is set the value of this bit is 1 only when XYNERGI is in Play or Record modes If Play and varispeed is set the value of this bit is 1 when XYNERGI is in Play Record or varispeed modes Some equipment e g DspMedia postation re
377. second part is the Post V5 0 soft key This will cause the HUI stop key to work on Post V5 0 There are some HUI keys not mentioned in this remap file They are listed below CID_SW_MACKIE_BANK_DOWN CID_SW_MACKIE_BANK_UP CID_SW_MACKIE_CHANNEL_DOWN CID_SW_MACKIE_CHANNEL_UP CID_SW_MACKIE_UP CID_SW_MACKIE_DOWN CID_SW_MACKIE_ SHIFT CID_SW_MACKIE_CONTROL CID_SW_MACKIE_F1 CID_SW_MACKIE_F2 CID_SW_MACKIE_F3 CID_SW_MACKIE_F4 CID_SW_MACKIE_F5 CID_SW_MACKIE_F6 CID_SW_MACKIE_F7 CID_SW_MACKIE_F8 CID_SW_MACKIE_MIDI_TRACKS CID_SW_MACKIE_INPUTS CID_SW_MACKIE_AUDIO_TRACKS CID_SW_MACKIE_AUDIO_INSTRUMENT Fairlight XYNERGI Page 376 HUI SLAVE MODE November 7 2014 CID_SW_MACKIE_AUX CID_SW_MACKIE_BUSES CID_SW_MACKIE_OUTPUTS CID_SW_MACKIE_USER CID_SW_MACKIE_OPTION CID_SW_MACKIE_SAVE CID_SW_MACKIE_UNDO CID_SW_MACKIE_CANCEL CID_SW_MACKIE_SOLO CID_SW_MACKIE_DROP CID_SW_MACKIE_CYCLE CID_SW_MACKIE_DISPLAY_SMPTE You may add any of these to your remap file and assign them to any Post V5 0 key For help with Post V5 0 key assignment please consult your Fairlight customer support organization Remap to Macros One easy way to get more power from HUI keys is to map them to your macros An example of a mapping line that does this CID_SW_MACKIE_F1 CID_SW_M_1 CID_SW_MACKIE_INPUTS CID_SW_BANK_1 Using macro and bank assignments you can get access to 27 macro keys Identifying Keys On some HUI controllers the key labelling may not match the
378. segment of the performance uses the best take for that part of the audio and the segments crossfade alternately from one level to the next The takes editing process uses system scripts This makes it necessary to follow the process order very carefully Here is how we do it Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Locate to the beginning left of the stack and press the new stack button You won t see any change but this is very important as it sets the audition start timecode and the interleaving order for clip crossfades Start auditioning your takes to determine the best one for the first segment Press next aud repeatedly to listen to your takes This command will pop the clip on the bottom of the stack and start playing again from the audition point Keep doing this until you have identified the best take for the first segment Find the end of the segment This will be the point where the chosen take goes bad or you think there might be a better performance on another take Press new split This will split all the clips and establish a new audition point Audition to find the best take for the second segment Crossfade optional When you ve decided which one it is you ve made the first edit But you may want to crossfade at this point If so you MUST do it NOW or fix it by hand later Press x fade 2 fr Of x fade 4 fr This will create an overlap and crossfade centred on the edit point The
379. sert b f fill overlap insert space Paste Special The filled audio is inserted into the track not layered over the original audio in the range The backwards forwards filled audio is inserted into the track not written over the original audio in the range Controls the length of overlap between pieces of audio used in the i11 command Silence will be inserted from the start of a Range for the duration of the Range Instead of pasting the clipboard contents at the cursor position it is possible to paste characteristics of a clip into other clips Step 1 Copy some clips to the clipboard using the Copy menu the mouse or the keyboard shortcut Fairlight XYNERGI Page 118 EDITING November 7 2014 Step 2 Step 3 Step 3a Notes Trim ctrl c Select the destination clips for the paste They can be on multiple tracks and may use a range You may select All Layers or only the top layer On the Cut Menu Copy Menu or Erase Menu press the Paste Special Soft key Now choose from the alternatives shown on the other soft keys Pressing one of these executes the Paste immediately Alternatively click and hold the screen command Edit Paste Special The system displays this dialog Paste Special Source Media Erase Delete Gain Erase Head Erase Tail Restore Head Restore Tail Now choose which characteristic to paste The clip whose characteristics are copied is the earliest in timecode on the
380. ses by 1dB then a transient is detected So low values will detect more transients than high values Rendering ClipBender Effects You may render clips with ClipBender effects This will create new media into which the sound of those effects is permanently recorded To do this Step 1 Select the clip s to be rendered Step 2 Press the Render Soft key Alternatively Step 1 Select the clip s to be rendered Step 2 Click the Render button in the ClipBender Smart Pane If the Clip Bender Smart Pane is not visible click view gt Smart Pane gt Clip Bender Fairlight XYNERGI Page 176 TIME DOMAIN PROCESSING November 7 2014 Rendering produces new media and places a clip referencing that media on top of the original clip which is automatically muted You can delete the new rendered clip to gain access to the original one though you will need to unmute it You have a choice of performing the renders in the background or foreground If you do it in the foreground it will block any other action in the user interface but will go faster To toggle this choice Step 1 Click Setup gt General Preferences gt Audio Plugins Step 2 Click Render ClipFX in Background Using VocAlign Processing Note Vocalign Project can be purchased at http www synchroarts co uk Post V5 0 will recognize Vocalign Project after it has been installed and run at least once Step 1 To enter the Wave Menu press the wave key Step 2 Select tw
381. sing Touch Auto Enable In this mode you enable parameters but not signal paths Touching the control of any enabled parameter will do it automatically Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 t Step 5 Select Touch Snap Or Latch as detailed above Enable parameter s see Enable Parameters below Press the Mix Menu button to open the Mix menu and toggle the Touch AutoEn button on Press Play to move transport Touch the control of any enabled parameter on any signal path selected or not It enters record and starts writing automation You can touch a control and put it into record before or after pressing Play The rest is the same as the normal Touch modes Enabling Mix Items Typically mix items are recorded a few at a time often only one To put a mix item into automation record we must first enable it then put it into write or trim this is just like arming tracks before recording audio on to them Enabling mix items requires enabling their parameters and their signal paths as outlined below Enable Parameters Using the XCS Param Enable Layout Press the Param Enable button in the upper left of the Automation Megamode Parameters can be enabled by pressing the blue Param Enable key and selecting one or more parameters Some of the parameters have a red triangle in the button That means they control more than one parameter For example the EQ 1 button controls the following Band 1 Gain Band 1 Frequency F
382. sing the Jog Wheel is provided as follows Step 1 Hold down the ctrl or BLUE key and the zoom key Step 2 Turn the Jog Wheel The number of tracks will change always keeping the most recently selected track visible Fairlight XYNERGI Page 34 CHANNELS November 7 2014 Using Jog Wheel Hold down the ctr1 key and turn the Jog Wheel to change the number of tracks on the Edit Screen Using Mouse Wheel Hold down the ctr1 key and turn the Mouse Wheel to change the number of tracks on the Edit Screen Inclusion of Pyxis Track The Video Track known as Pyxis Track appears at the top of the track display It is not counted when choosing how many tracks to display There are two options for its appearance e t may be permanently placed above the audio tracks regardless of which numbered tracks are displayed To select this option select view gt Show Pyxis Track Lock e t may be placed above the audio tracks only when Track 1 is displayed To select this option deselect view gt Show Pyxis Track Lock Centered Track Display A further option for track display automatically places the current track most recently selected in the vertical center of the Edit screen with the chosen number of tracks distributed above and below To adopt this option select the checkbox at Setup General Preferences Display Display Centers on current track User Selection of Tracks In addition to the track selections described
383. sions to documentation fairlightau com Table of Contents h See cece Fee Pia nal ce aS 44 INTRODUCTION cccccccsssccsscsscssssssscssssssesee 4 Serene Channels ree Solo Mute and Arm ccccccceseseseseseseserererees 45 About the Software Fairlight Post V5 1 Zoomin 47 About This Manual 1 EE Te a ae 48 What Else You Need to KNOW ccecce 1 Saes PAY eaa aaa aa 49 Some imponan TETE gta sarge Solo and Mute c ccc cececsssecssseseeseessaneueees 51 Anything MiSSiNg c cceeccessteeeeseeeeeneeeeees 3 NAMING eisenai iw Alii dean 57 The Xplain System 3 PATCHIN IGNAL PATHG 05 61 XYNERGI OVERVIEW 0 ccccccsssseesessenes 5 fa tie 23G 61 Pia ies ar SE otis The Patch 1 0 Page sscsssssssscssseessesseessseeee 61 a ae ale aa ra oaiae i The Multi BUON assii 65 rap T E ERE A A cae ineectts PRG A T O aientostann 65 Starting the System s 10 Reverse Patching 66 System Shutdown cccccccceeceeeeeeeseeeeteees AQ SRE soe ee Ee ee a ee Graphic Themes cccccesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeteees 11 TRANSPORT cccccccesecceeeccseececesscceees 68 j E E EAEAN SELECTION AND CALLING qa PASIE An pon Conros o Jog Commands s esseeoseeosee eseese nesr nesnnesn nees 68 Selection Types cccccccceessceeeeeeesseeeteneeeeees 12 Shuttlea a a a aa a 69 How a Oke gt 2 0 nna 12 LOOPING ansiar e AE RS 69 HOW tO Call cccccccccccsccccececcuascessivau
384. sks Sometimes the same function appears on more than one megamode because it is needed in both In these cases the function always appears on the same button See more about megamodes on page 24 Modes Mode keys are always teal in colour A mode is a specific group of functions Each mode has a soft menu of commands that are displayed on the Soft Keys Other Picture keys may change when a mode is selected For example the cut mode causes display of the cut clip cut head and cut tail keys at the left of the Jog Wheel Modes are also known as menus because of their soft keys e g cut menu or mix menu To find out what a mode does hold down the xpiain button while pressing the mode button Toggles razor A toggle chooses between a pair of options usually On or Off Some toggles are actually triggles i e they choose amongst three options Toggles are always blue in colour Fairlight XYNERGI Page 21 THE XYNERGI TACTILE CONTROLLER November 7 2014 Path Keys Path keys are used to select or deselect signal paths Their colour changes depending on the mode being displayed and the status of the path For example they show dark or light brown in Mute mode dark or light green in Solo mode and red or dark blue in Arm mode Paths include Tracks Lives and Buses Main Sub Aux and MT Naming Paths Path keys show the name of the path note Track 5a in the illustration You can set your own name for pat
385. small value Nudge Sync It is possible to nudge the audio inside a clip without moving the clip itself This is called Nudge Sync The Nudge function is normally in Clip mode i e clips are nudged To toggle it into Sync mode press the Nudge Sync soft key so that its label reads ON Fade and Crossfade The fade button allows fades to be applied non destructively to the heads and tails of clips The fades are performed by the system in real time as the audio is output from the machine Fades can be created on the fly relative to the playhead or they can be created and or modified on multiple clips at once Fades are applied from the picture keys soft keys and from the PC screen O10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 30 100 e Eee 2 Delet rom IV Length IV Shape 10 15 20 Duration The Editing screen displays fade information in the Smart Pane at the top of the monitor This is used to issue commands as well as illustrate fade shapes curves Using Picture Keys Fade Head One of the simplest fades can be achieved as follows Step 1 Select a track and move a clip under the cursor Step 2 Press the fade button if not already on Step 3 Press the fade head button This creates a fade from the start of the clip to the cursor position The shape of the fade can be seen above this will be described later but the Duration is not used Instead the duration is set by the cursor position If yo
386. speaker sets There is always a MAIN set usually your large Control Room monitors You may also create many other sets and choose them whenever you like This guide will show you how to set up the formats outputs and names of your speaker sets Step 1 Press the green Mon button Step 2 Press the Mon Set up button if it s not already lit Step 3 To configure speaker sets press the Config Monitors soft key and work on the Mixer Screen Fairlight XYNERGI Page 298 MONITORING AND TALKBACK November 7 2014 cRMonL cRMonc MM CRMonR E CRMonLs J CRMonRs MM CRMonB Boon aon Boxeo a02 Ber Mona G Ece Monts I Ec mon as f Ecer mon e oeno a0 ac Snes BEES Sheds SEES STMON IL STMON LR 5X20 Sx20 sx20 CR Mon L CR Mon C saline one BO Control Studio a Analog Digital MADI Room Monitor Monitor 1 Increase Outputs Outputs Outputs Format MAIN SpkSet2 SpkSet3 SpkSet4 SpkSet5 SpkSet6 SpkSet7 SpkSet8 Configuring Speaker Sets Step 1 Choose a Speaker set atthe lower left Step 2 Click the Increase Format button until you see the desired format for this speaker set Step 3 Select all its Elements Left Center Right etc at the top left Step 4 Click Analog or Digital outputs at lower right Step 5 Choose the right number of free outputs to match the number of speakers Click Patch Step 6 Click Name if you want to name the Speaker set Step 7 Press the end soft key to leave the Config Monitors screen Choose Monitor Speaker Outputs Overv
387. splay Modulation parameters press the Mod softkey This toggles the layout between its normal AHDSR display and the Modulation parameter display The Modulation controls include Vibrato On off depth speed attack and delay Tremolo On off depth speed attack and delay Saving SDS The SDS samples and settings are saved with the current project Media Considerations SDS samples can be located anywhere in your disk system To bring them all together into the current Project folder use the Localise Audio command in the Process Menu Select the Consolidate Sampler checkbox to ensure that your SDS samples are included in the consolidation Backup to Folder operations also take SDS samples into consideration This is done automatically Fairlight XYNERGI Page 337 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT November 7 2014 Project and File Management Introduction File handling in XYNERGI supports legacy formats from previous products but also introduces powerful modern Project and File management capabilities This chapter details the way the system looks after files Basic File Commands New Project Step 1 Proj Megamode Step 2 New softkey Alternatively click File gt New The New File dialog box is shown This is described in detail below Open Project Step 1 Proj Megamode Step 2 Open softkey Alternatively click File open The Open File dialog box is shown Browse select a project and click OK Save Project Step 1 Proj mega
388. ssed video e Thomson Grass valley dv25 files vid e Bitmap files single still image omp useful for a clapper board e LongGop requires mxf licence option mpeg licence option plus MXFReader2 1 beta or later e Final Cut Pro XML project note that nested sequences are not imported also any Post V5 0 native files which are e uncompressed vmu e dv25 dif e mjpeg vmj e lossless Huffman compression vmh MXF files require an MXF licence dongle IMX Mpeg requires an IMX Mpeg licence Dv50 dv100 require a DVCPro Licence dongle Playing a QuickTime or AVI file requires that the latest available codec for that file type has been installed Fairlight recommends that automatic update be switched on to ensure that the version remains current In some cases a specific codec must be installed e g QuickTime files from Avid require the Avid codec to play them Fairlight XYNERGI Page 316 PYXIS TRACK November 7 2014 For a good indication of playability double click a file in Windows Explorer If the operating system plays the file immediately it will almost certainly play in Pyxis Track Capturing Video into Pyxis Track The following assumes your system is equipped with a Decklink Video capture card For the purposes of the example we will be operating in Standard Definition mode Pyxis Track allows an incoming video signal to be captured directly onto the timeline This requires correct configuratio
389. stination Bus See Stem Assign on page 207 If you are using a link group to control a premixed stem which is delivered in a different channel order it may be necessary to edit the track order on the disk recorder or to change the input patching of the feeds if the stem is played in off an external device Relative Link Groups Group control can be relative or absolute To select this option Step 1 Open the System Variables dialog by typing SHIFT CTRL u Step 2 Select or deselect the Relative Link Groups checkbox Automation Desk Functions Enable automation J Allow PFL reserve stereo buss 10 Glide in time Frames C Single channel Solo InterLock 10 Glide out time Fr 0 5 Talkback latch seconds Allow Edit function on LCD 0 Mix Edit Handles Frames V Mix Follows Edit v Faders Trim from 0dB V Enable automation optimisation Save automation with project Target Both as Default 5 GPIO Oscillator Cor V Enable PC parallel port for GPIO use LPT1 0x378 6 0 Oscillator level dB use LPT2 0x278 default 999 Oscillator frequency user defined address White Pink Calibration Step 3 Close the System Variables dialog by typing Esc escape or by clicking the Close Box at upper right Relative If linking is relative moves made by the Master fader and knobs are reflected by relative moves in the slave members For example if the Master fader moves from 10 dB to 5 dB and a slave is set
390. struments b disk bandwidth is used which may impact normal high track count recordings Of course you are using disk capacity as well so it s a good idea to remain aware when the recorder is on or at least to check on the holding tank now and then But by and large the recorder is self cleaning because it throws away old recordings when you click the Go button COND Fairlight XYNERGI Page 93 ADR November 7 2014 ADR Introduction XYNERGI provides the ability to automate recording using a list of In and Out points with a simple interface The ADR menu includes functions for setting pre and post roll and features for automatic dialogue replacement The ADR List The ADR List allows you to set up a list of recordings cues that you want to take Each one has a controlled In and Out point and text that can be displayed on the screen To open the ADR List Press the green Record Megamode button then apr The ADR List can also be displayed using the command ADR gt ADR List Dialogue There are no items to show in this view When it is first opened the list is empty of cues Import Cue List from a Text File You may import an entire script through the use of the Import button in the ADR List This can import a short script that has been written in a word processor Each line of text in the file is treated as a separate line of ADR cue text Each line of text can optionally have one or more timec
391. sult in loss of resources Please follow the instructions carefully The naming file is called l O Config txt and can be found in the following folder C ProgramData Fairlight F MC Data It contains information other than names and this should not be disturbed The instructions for naming are contained in the file itself which can be opened and edited with any text editing application System Ports System output ports can only be accessed from the Monitor Setup Patch Outputs menu Using system ports for control room monitors prevents the operator from inadvertently patching signals direct to the power amplifier inputs To define a system port enter an attribute value of 1 as described in the I O Config file Naming Paths The Name Path command allows you to name Tracks Live Feeds Buses and VCA Masters When you are choosing a name it is advisable to use no more than two words of five characters each including numbers Fairlight XYNERGI Page 57 CHANNELS November 7 2014 If you do the complete name will be displayed on the XYNERGI picture keys making it easier for you to choose signal paths If you use more than one space character the first one becomes a breaking space and the others are put on the second line Choose Path to Name Select the first signal path you want to name This could be visible in the top row of the picture keys or you may be able to access it using the Bank up and down keys Otherwise it can
392. systems Inc has contractually obligated Fairlight AU s Software Suppliers to make this disclaimer e No Liability for Certain Damages EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW Fairlight AU S SOFT WARE SUPPLIERS SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT SPECIAL CONSE QUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE THIS LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE IN NO EVENT SHALL Fairlight AU S SOFTWARE SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNT IN EXCESS OF U S TWO HUNDRED FIFTY DOLLARS U S 250 00 e Limitations on Reverse Engineering Decompilation and Disassembly You may not reverse engineer decompile or disassemble the SOFTWARE except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation e SOFTWARE TRANSFER ALLOWED BUT WITH RESTRICTIONS You may permanently transfer rights under this EULA only as part of a permanent sale or transfer of the Device and only if the recipient agrees to this EULA If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade any transfer must also include all prior versions of the SOFTWARE Obtaining Technical Support Users requiring technical support should contact their local distributor Information can also be found at http www fairlightau com Manual Errors and Omission To help ensure that Fairlight provides the most accurate and comprehensive documentation please report any errors or omis
393. t press redo This can be done as many times as you like right back to the first edit that was undone Fairlight XYNERGI Page 260 AUTOMATION November 7 2014 To work with a list of the undo steps available do the following Step 1 Hold down the BLUE key and press the undo button OR hold down the undo button A dialog box is shown with a list of the undo and redo events in the project The red items are those which have been undone already Step 2 Use the Jog Wheel to move the highlight up and down the list Step 3 You may press the undo or Redo button at any time Step 4 You may press the Enter button at any time to execute the undo or redo step that is highlighted This will also close the Undo dialog box For the purposes of automation an undo step is recorded each time the system enters or leaves write or trim or when undo data is changed by graphical curve editing System Mix Save function The System Mix function is available from the FILE menu When switched on the current mix pass will automatically be saved when the project is closed and will likewise automatically be loaded when the project is opened Step 1 Press the File button in the Mixer Megamode Step 2 Press the sysTEM MIX on soft key in the LCD menu The Mix Menu Press the Mix Menu key in the Mixer Megamode to display the Mix menu When the mix menu is active the feed and bus selection keys are used to enable specific paths for automation
394. t Automation from Another Project on page 267 Force Solo During Import You can force the audio to be audible only on selected tracks of your Library project as follows Step 1 Select the Editor Megamode Step 2 Hold down the solo button Step 3 Press the Follow Lib soft key until the label goes to ON Step 4 Release the solo button Step 5 Press exit Gating Clips The Gate Clips function is a rough but quick and useful way to remove unwanted silence or near silence from clips Using the Gate Clips Function First you will need to select the track s using the track feed keys and select the clip s either by selecting a range or by parking the playback head over the desired clips You are now ready to perform the Gate Clips function To do this Step 1 Press the gate button The gate preview window is displayed automatically Step 2 Move any of the sliders or select the Threshold Hold Or Handle soft keys and turn the Jog Wheel See below The threshold controls the level below which audio will be removed The grey areas show that will be erased by the gate Fairlight XYNERGI Page 145 EDITING November 7 2014 The Tail Handle adds extra audio of the length you choose AFTER the level has dropped below threshold Step 3 The head handle adds extra audio of the length you choose BEFORE the level drops below threshold When you are happy with the amount retained versus the amount removed from the gra
395. t button jumps the transport to the next edit boundary on selected tracks A Few Rules Xfade can work on multiple tracks It will try to create crossfades of equal length on all selected tracks Xfade can work on clips that are not touching as long as there is sufficient media to extend across the gap Fairlight XYNERGI Page 131 EDITING November 7 2014 Xfade preserves clip coverage In the above example the selected r d clip remains underneath the unselected clip IMG_0419 The yellow highlighter will not expand beyond the available media for the clip The two clips below therefore have different widths of yellow highlighting In this case the resulting crossfades would also be different p IMG_0F 19 IMG_06419 Fairlight XYNERGI Page 132 EDITING November 7 2014 Xfade can shorten clips as well as lengthening them as shown below Good name IMG _0419 Good name IMG_h419 Fade Options Layers On all layers is not supported in Fade Mode Razor razor is not supported in Fade Mode Soft Edit Every clip has a small fade at the head or tail to make it sound smoother This is called a Soft Edit and you can control its length To do this click the setup Menu on the Track screen and select General Preferences In the dialog that is displayed click the Playback tab Step 1 Click the Setup Menu on the Track screen Step 2 Select General Preferences Step 3 Click the Playback tab
396. t that it also puts the recorded material into clips on the clipboard one clip for each recording You will see the ghosts of the recorded clips hovering over the selected tracks Clipboard is available for MT and DR2 projects This places a copy of the clipboard at the current cursor position It s exactly the same as pressing the Enter button when you are in the Cut or Copy menu Go Stop button Go Starts the background recording This button is only available when the background recorder is stopped Fairlight XYNERGI Page 92 RECORDING November 7 2014 If there is a recording already in the destination holding tank it will be discarded This could happen if you are recording then click Stop then click Go without using Harvest or Clipboard in between Stop Stops the background recording This button is only available when the background recorder is recording Apply Allows you to change the number of armed tracks to the recording while it is in motion or change the size of the recording cache This button is only available when the background recorder is recording and after you have changed the number of armed tracks using the Armed Tracks Slider or changed the size of the cache using the cache Length Slider Notes about the Background Recorder It uses system resources a the audio channels are sent to the disk via AudioBridge channels so those channels are not available to plug ins or virtual in
397. tained inside it in the Projects window Select a project in the right hand list then click List Media in Project to display a new window containing all media in the Media folder of the project Click Delete Project to remove the project from the hard disk You will be prompted to remove all the media in the Media folder Discarding Unused Media It is possible to create a number of recordings which end up not being used To remove these from your hard disk automatically select a project and use the command Setup gt Media and Project Management Discard Unused Media NLY Diana frango Pyxis NLY 2 0rc2 24000 clip project DR2 Dream II v1 50 3 2 Dream II v2 0 0b3 rcii Testing Dream II 1 60 0b29 Dream II v2 1 0b5 XXXXX xxx File D FairlightAU Projects Plugin builder DR2 Dream II v2 0 1 Ne Project9 MT MT Project Vgty large MT MT MT Project Hubble Briefcase Javanese Lazy Days Localise test 4 ETE erer okie Selected Project Discard command This command moves the unused media into a recycle bin of which there is one for each media device Specifically it removes media in the selected projects media directory that is not used by any project in the selected project s current directory t will only remove native recorded or localized media not files that have been imported from other systems The device list has a column reporting how much space a device s recycle bin is
398. tches the sources to the selected meters and saves the Meter Set Whole Bus Patching Expandable If you patch a whole bus to the meters in one gesture it becomes resizable One gesture means that you selected all the bus elements and the same number of consecutive meters and clicked Patch Resizable means that if you change the bus format it will grab as many meters as it needs pushing the next signals to the right when it expands potentially off the end and pulling them to the left when it contracts Fairlight XYNERGI Page 307 METERS November 7 2014 If you leave blanks to the right of a resizable bus it will consume the blanks before starting to push other channels to the right Using the Meters Menu Step 1 Press the Meters button in the Setup Megamode Step 2 Press the assign meters Soft key This displays the Patch I O page Step 3 Use the Patch I O page as described in the previous section Peaks The numeric peak levels displayed on the mixer display bus meters have a variable threshold The level at which these values are displayed can be set in the C Program Files Fairlight FMC Data System_Variables txt file Edit the following line in the file PEAK_DISPLAY_LIMIT 950 The value is from 0 to 1000 in 0 1dB steps where 1000 full scale level In the example above the value of 950 will cause the numeric display to first be shown when the signal level reaches 5dB below full scale 970 will set
399. te the patch Click on Patch to complete Select instrument p Select live inputs in EEE You should now be able to hear a stereo signal generated by your Rewire application on Live feeds 1 and 2 Alternatively you can patch instrument inputs to track feeds but make sure the track is record enabled in order to hear your Rewire device see the chapter Recording on page 78 External Processing Individual clips can be sent to other programs that provide specific kinds of processing This can happen while XYNERGI is running with the export and re import journeys handled smoothly in the software Registering an External Process Audio programs installed on your PC must be registered in the XYNERGI software before being used To do this Step 2 Click add A dialog box appears showing any external processes programs already registered Step 2 Click add Fairlight XYNERGI Page 295 PLUG INS REWIRE AND EXTERNAL PROCESSING November 7 2014 Step 3 Browse to find the executable file exe that is invoked when you start the program If you are not sure what that is you can find out from the Properties of the icon that launches your external program Step 4 Select the executable file and click open Launching External Process from Within XYNERGI Software While XYNERGI is running you can select a clip and send it to your external process as follows Step 1 Select a clip by selecting its tra
400. tep 1 Press the Record NEW Tape soft key in the Arm menu Step 2 Use the From and To keys to make a range that represents the length of the Tape you want to make Step 3 Arm the tracks where you want to put a Tape Mode clip Step 4 Press the Setup Tape soft key Now you have two choices Step 5 Blank Tape will make a blank zero waveform Tape Mode clip on each armed track filling the range Step 5A Render Tape will make a single Tape Mode clip on each armed track copying all the audio that is already in the range on the armed tracks Afterwards you can replace any parts that are not correct by recording over them Both Blank Tape and Render Tape run quite fast about 10 seconds for each hour of track time depending on computer and hard disk speed The advantage of using them is that you do not need to Fairlight XYNERGI Page 83 RECORDING November 7 2014 record sequentially you can move around anywhere in the Tape and replace the parts you are ready to work on Add Recording Handle Overview A Handle is an extra piece of audio at the beginning of a recording The system automatically adds this piece just as if you entered recording earlier This can be very useful when trying to capture performances as it gives you extra time to react Press the green Record Megamode button to access recording functions The Arm menu will be automatically selected Press the Handle soft key then change the displayed number
401. ter Type Choices are P Band pass filter gt High pass filter lt Low pass filter Each band can be set to any filter type Mouse click on the button to cycle amongst the choices Frequency The centre frequency of each band Gain The gain of the band Range 99 to 20aB Fairlight XYNERGI Page 136 EDITING November 7 2014 Q This displays the Q of the band or indicates the type of shelf Range 0 99 Enables Used with the Apply command Only the Enabled bands are applied to the selected clips Value Grid The Value Grid shows all the current parameters of the EQ being changed Choosing a Parameter There are two ways to choose a parameter in the grid Click with the mouse in the cell you would like to change Use the Numeric Keypad on your console the rectangle formed by the 7 8 9 keys at the top and the 0 00 Clear keys at the bottom corresponds with the cells in the Value Grid m 5 6 3500 0 0 10 gt meer BE s oo 0 0 20 0 0 Clear Changing a Parameter Value There are several ways to change the value of a parameter once chosen e Use the Jogger Wheel make sure the transport is not in Jog mode at that time e Use the and buttons in the Numeric Keypad e Press the NUMBER soft key and use the numeric keypad not recommended e The Frequency and Gain values can directly be chosen and changed with the mouse by dragging the red dots in the graph area e While you are changing param
402. ter the edit Tail Before After Cursor Same as slip head but the tail is slipped to the cursor position Range Ranges cannot be used with slip Multiple Tracks Works as expected All the red clips will be slipped by the same amount Fairlight XYNERGI Page 121 EDITING November 7 2014 Soft Keys in Slip Mode sync point Pressing the Slip Sync soft key allows the audio within the clip to be slipped without changing the positions of the head and tail To do this press the Slip Sync soft key move the transport and press ENTER The audio within the clip will move by the amount you just moved the transport There are limits to slipping sync Eventually the end of the recorded audio reaches the end of the clip and after that it can go no further Slip Edit Options Trim is usually applied to a single clip or selections across tracks therefore no options are available range is not supported in Slip Mode all layers is not supported in Slip Mode razor is not supported in Slip Mode Nudge The nudge function slips clips by a predetermined amount of time nudge can operate on one or many tracks affecting clips that lie under the cursor or within a Range nudge can operate in fixed steps of plus or minus one frame or in variable steps from 1 to 99 sub frames a sub frame is 1 80th of a frame Using Nudge Step 1 Press the nudge button Step 2 Locate the cursor over the clips and select the appropriate t
403. th Can be changed at any time All subsequent recordings will have this depth Video Resolution This is the format of the external video reference applied to the SX 12V or SX 20 It must be set to match the incoming video signal for correct sync Pull Up Down Allows setting of Pull Up and Pull Down often used in NTSC video setups Detailed explanation below Sync Source The system sample rate is synchronised to its clock source There are many choices but normally you will use the SX20 as a sync source and lock it to whichever sync signal your studio is running Synchronization Indicators True Rate True Sample Rate shows the speed at which XYNERGI is running It also shows the real frame rate after adjusting for Pull Up Down setting Video Detect The Video Clock Detected indicator is green when a valid Video Clock reference is detected and red when Video Clock is missing or invalid Seeking Lock The Seeking Lock indicator is green when seeking lock and red when not in use Fairlight XYNERGI Page 370 SYNC AND MACHINE CONTROL November 7 2014 Sync The Sync indicator is green when a valid Clock Sync Source reference is detected and red when the Clock Sync Source is missing or invalid Progressive Detect SX 20 supports both Progressive and Interlaced clocks If the Progressive Clock Detect indicator is green a Progressive Clock reference has been detected and is being used as the primary sync referenc
404. th the most recently pasted or recorded clips sitting on top of the others During playback and record only the top layer is heard or a crossfade between the top and second layers In the above example the sections that are played are indicated in red and orange this is just indicative not part of the user interface The orange sections form a crossfade between the top and second clip in the stack This layered view can be toggled on and off by double pressing the Takes button or by the command View Display Layering Many editing functions target only the top layer and some can target all the layers To perform an edit on all layers toggle the A11 Layers button on To access a particular clip below the top layer we use the Takes Menu Takes menu To display the Takes menu press BLUE Takes The system displays a Smart Panel showing the individual layers on the current editing track For the configuration shown above the Takes display looks like this when the cursor runs through the middle of all the clips Start Time End Time 00 00 12 02 Duration Track l Layer Color Recorded Audio 5 Recorded Audio 2 Track 2 3 00 00 12 20 00 00 15 11 00 00 02 20 Recorded Audio Track 2 2 00 00 10 29 00 00 14 02 00 00 03 03 Recorded Audio 3 Track 2 1 00 00 12 02 00 00 14 11 00 00 02 09 As the transport moves to different places or as you select different tracks the Takes disp
405. the cursor Step 2 Press the cut key if not already selected Step 3 Press the cut head key Only the head goes on to the clipboard Fairlight XYNERGI Page 113 EDITING November 7 2014 Step 4 Select another track and or move to another location The ghost shows a head shaped clipboard ready to be pasted The original tail is now Blue because its track is not selected Step 5 Press the Enter key to paste the clipboard The clipboard former head is pasted Range You can make a range that specifies exactly which part of the clip is affected The easiest way is like this more about ranges later Step 1 Move the transport where you d like to start the range Step 2 Press the from key Step 3 Move the transport where you d like to end the range Step 4 Press the to key The range is marked in red Now we ll cut and paste the audio in the range Step 1 Choose the track and set the range we ve just done this Step 2 Press the cut key if not already selected Step 3 Press the cut range key Fairlight XYNERGI Page 114 EDITING November 7 2014 The audio in the range is moved to the clipboard We see the ghost Step 4 Select another track and or move to another location The ghost moves to the new track Step 5 Press the Enter key to paste the clipboard The clipboard former range is pasted The range persists after the edit Notes about Cut and Paste
406. the amount by which the track is advanced is decided by a priority system Main Bus is highest then Sub Buses in numerical order then Aux buses With a track feeding more than one bus the timing will only be correct for the highest priority bus and others which happen to have the same latency Bus Balancing There is one exception to the preceding statement If a track is feeding the Main Bus and one other bus and the other bus is also routed to the Main Bus the system will correctly compensate for the latency See diagram below pe Latency ti Track Main Bus Aux Bus LeLatency 24 Fairlight XYNERGI Page 278 PLUG INS REWIRE AND EXTERNAL PROCESSING November 7 2014 In this instance special channels are used to create the necessary timing changes to correctly compensate for latencies Notes Bus Balancing is enabled in the Audio Plugins General Preference Tab by selecting the Bus Balancing Enabled option Since this new mechanism uses system resources it is Disabled by default The new mechanism only works for Main Assign If a track is not assigned to the Main bus this mechanism is not invoked For this to work a track can only be assigned to one bus plus Main e g If Track1 is simultaneously assigned to Sub1 gt Main and Aux1 gt Main then the old priority mechanism is invoked and only the Sub1 correctly compensated If a bus feed is not also assigned to the Main bus then the mechanism is not
407. the list Step 3 Press the Load soft key in the LCD menu to load the selected mix Step 4 Confirm or cancel by pressing the ves or No soft key Deleting a Mix Step 1 Press the File button Step 2 Turn the jog wheel to scroll through the previously saved mixes Step 3 Press the Delete soft key in the LCD menu to delete the selected mix Creating a New Mix Follow these steps to create new empty mix with no automation data Step 1 Press the File button Step 2 Press the New Mix soft key in the LCD menu This new mix must be named and saved once new data has been written Copy a Mix Between Projects Mix Carry Over allows the static snapshot and dynamic mix data from a single mix to be copied from one project to another Step 1 Enter the File menu and use the Save or Load Soft key to save your current mix or load a previously saved mix Step 2 Press the carry over soft key in the File menu The Carry over key flashes when carry over is active Step 3 Close the current project Step 4 Open the destination project Step 5 Enter the File menu again and use the Save soft key to save the mix in the new project Mix Undo The automation system supports multiple levels of mix undo These are interleaved with audio edits making a single undo list for the whole project To undo the last edit press Undo This can be done as many times as you like right back to the first edit since the project was opened To redo the last undone edi
408. the system to find the relevant media for the current project using Process Relink Media Detailed Media Management To work on media and project management select Setup gt Media and Project Management from the XYNERGI main menu Controlling Scanned Folders You may wish to save time when the system starts by omitting the scan of some folders in your system This is particularly useful when the system is connected to a network In the Media and Project Management dialog you can display all storage devices folders and files Devices hame _ ssaton_I pesernton _ mesia piw Free space me _ Recycle Bin Space FairlightAU For Networked Rec Priority Audio _D Dream II Audio R W TET MB 0MB Yes 2500 Local Up Video_E a Dream II Video R W 165770 MB OMB Yes 2500 Local Local Disk Git Windows Forma Both RW 28722 MB OMB No 2500 Local Vault TA Windows Forma Both RiW 334316 MB OMB No 2500 Shared gt Find SubFolders Convert to Media device Set Device Info I view CD Drives Default Project Device Audio_D ins Rescan Devices Empty Recycle Bins Scanned Folders Subfolders D paranoia D Fair ightAU M ia NLY Diana frango Pye ALY 24000 clip project DR2 Dream II 24048 DiiFair ight AU Pr vectsiNew Project2 D FairlightAU Projects New Project2 Media D FairlightAU ML3_AVT40a50 ML4_audio D FairlightAU Medial videoImportedaudioMedi D FairlightAU Projects New Project9 Med
409. the threshold to 3dB 990 will set the threshold to 1dB and so on Clear Peak Signal levels in excess of OdB full scale are indicated by a fixed orange peak hold display To reset the peak hold display Step 1 Press the Meters button in the Setup Megamode Step 2 Press the Clear Peak soft key You can also clear peaks using the Clear Max button on the Master Screen Meters 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 Peak Hold Time Peak hold time can be set in the Meters Menu as follows Step 1 Press the Meters button in the Setup Megamode Step 2 Press the Peak Hola soft key repeatedly to choose Off Short Long or Permanent peak hold Overload Hold Time Overload hold time can be set in the Meters Menu as follows Step 1 Press the Meters button in the Setup Megamode Step 2 Press the over Hold soft key Step 3 Use the Jog Wheel to change the overload hold time Fairlight XYNERGI Page 308 METERS November 7 2014 Step 4 Press the Enter key or the Exit soft key Meter Point The Meter Point is the place in a channel where level is extracted for metering To move the meter point for all signal paths Step 1 Press the Meters button in the Setup Megamode Step 2 Press the mtr Pnt soft key repeatedly to move the meter point Stereo Compound Meters The system offers a new compound stereo meter including PPM and Loudness metering as well as Phase indication To enable it click Setup Meters gt
410. ther by jumping or by locating to Marks They can also be named To see a list of Marks rename or locate to them click view gt Marks Jump to Mark Moves the transport to the next or previous timecode Mark Jump to Point Moves the transport to the next or previous head or tail of clips on selected tracks Display Layering When clips are placed on top of each other only the uppermost is heard or at most a crossfade between the top and second layers The software allows you to see all the layers as follows e Select Display Layering from the View menu Display Layering Smart Pane gt Pyxis Locators Tracks gt Video Track Clip Search Statistics Performance Background Tasks e Click the Display Layering button in the Toolbar Display layering e Double press the takes button in the Editor Megamode The layers of clips are shown on all tracks with the clips becoming thinner as needed to fit the available space Fairlight XYNERGI Page 159 EDITING November 7 2014 00 05 00 00 IMG_0418 meone IMG_0418 The mouse can be used to change the order of clips To do this simply click and drag a clip from one level to a higher or lower level Changing levels in this way can be combined with dragging a clip to a different track or timecode Note that there is always a space at the top of each track equal to the width of one clip This is to allow room for you to drag a clip int
411. thm Bi Directional Control When switched on allows either the Master or the Slave to instigate transport commands e g Play Stop etc Fairlight XYNERGI Page 365 SYNC AND MACHINE CONTROL November 7 2014 Edit Delay frames Each VTR has a built in delay between receiving the Edit command equivalent to a pre programmed Record command and actually entering the Edit mode If you the Edit Delay to match the machine s behaviour XYNERGI will issue the Edit command early so that the VTR enters Edit at the right time Confidence Head Switches the video machine s Confidence Head on or off Stop Command Allows the option of keeping the VTR tape on the heads when the machine stops This will allow it to start playing much quicker but it does increase head wear Head Protect Specifies a time after which the tape is removed from the heads automatically to prevent wear Play Tracking Determines how many incorrect frames the system must see before it jumps to be in sync with the incoming timecode or stops if no timecode is coming in This allows the system to keep playing over timecode that has gaps Record Tracking As with Play Tracking but recording uses a different number This is because recording sometimes needs to be more tolerant Note that if timecode sync is lost during recording then re established the transport will go back into Play but not into Record Run Lock If the Play Run Lock checkbox i
412. tions and patch them all with one command For example select Analog Inputs 1 to 8 and Track Inputs 9 16 then click the Patch command once Any source can be patched to any destination For example a Bus Element can be patched to a Track Input for recording purposes To illustrate select the Category Sub Bus Out the outputs of all the Sub Buses The expanded view will show the Sub Bus elements separately and they can be selected and patched to track inputs for recording Fairlight XYNERGI Page 64 PATCHING SIGNAL PATHS November 7 2014 To deselect all the signal paths you have selected touch the Clear button The Multi Button Clicking the Multi button allows you to patch the same sources multiple times Normally after a patch both sources and destinations are deselected but if Multi is ON the sources remain selected through as many patchings as you like View Buttons iv yi The View buttons control which names appear on the tiles If you choose View System the names shown are the functional system names like Track 5 Live 3 etc If you choose View User the names will be the ones you have given to these signal paths For signal paths where you have not given a name the system name is used The Info Button Track 1 S420 AIL Track 1 Input Pressing the Info button allows you to see more detail about specific tiles To do this press Info then click on any tile The system will show a box with informatio
413. to be sorted according to the EDL event numbers Clicking the C button in the Sort group causes the EDL events to be sorted according to source reel Fairlight XYNERGI Page 362 SYNC AND MACHINE CONTROL November 7 2014 Sync and Machine Control Introduction XYNERGI can communicate with industry standard Sony 9 pin serial controlled machines with a timecode reader installed providing control over external video or audio machines directly from the XYNERGI XYNERGI can control up to three machines M1 M2 and M3 Of these two can be physical VTRs and the third can be Linear Timecode or MIDI Timecode Setting up Machines To choose a machine type for M1 M2 or M3 Step 1 In the Setup Megamode press M1 Setup Or M2 Setup or click View gt Smart Pane Machine Control Step 2 The following Smart Pane is displayed cana Name Online Servo Timecode Offset Capture Status Arm Y Analog Digital Asm Inh Ref LTC MTC F E DEE eject fl Type Config Name Online Servo Timecode Offset Capture Status Mi ee 0 0 B 00 00 00 00 ND J 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 f capt FETIME OUT j pe Me IMC Remote sje emi 0 0 00 05 49 19 00 00 00 00 i Pyxis Track 00 05 49 19 Status Arm Y Analog Digital Asm Inh Ref LTC MTC RETIE TFF TIME OUT g amp eject 00 00 00 00 Shanna iirc Generator E In Stop Wc enerator E Video Arming Step 3 Use the type soft key or Type list box to select one of the following machine t
414. to the solo bus Soloed link groups are automatically downmixed to allow all their members to be monitored in the stereo monitor bus normal monitor down mixing occurs between the monitor bus and the selected speaker set The AFL solo signal is derived after the feed fader and mute PFL solo is derived before the feed fader and mute Fairlight XYNERGI Page 56 CHANNELS November 7 2014 Setup AFL PFL bus By default there is no AFL PFL bus set up in the system this saves you from using up 2 bus elements that you might not need To create a bus for AFL PFL Step 1 Type ctrl SHIFT U The System Variables display is shown m Desk Functions Allow PFL reserve stereo buss ingle Ctra oto erLock 0 5 Talkback latch seconds Allow Edit function on LCD Step 2 Select the checkbox Allow PFL reserve stereo bus Step3 Click OK Select Solo Mode Hold down a BLUE key and press the utils key to enter the Utils menu Press the Solo soft key to select the solo system to be used Unless an ALF PFL bus has been created you will not be able to selected these solo modes Soloed feeds are shown with a green indicator on the mixer screen display Naming Naming Inputs and Outputs Inputs and outputs are named outside the XYNERGI application This is because they are a permanent fixture in the studio and it s best to have their names in a separate file WARNING what follows is a technical operation which can re
415. to toggle the EQ on or off at any time This action will affect the clip under the cursor or all clips in the Range if any The on off position of this switch is stored in the clip along with the settings of the EQ parameters Saving EQ Presets The system allows you to save the current EQ settings and later retrieve and apply them To save an EQ setting do the following Step 1 Type a new name into the Presets field or use an old name if you want to change its settings Step 2 Set the EQ values to the ones you want to save by editing or simply by picking up the values by touching an existing clip Click the save button To retrieve an EQ setting select it from the Preset drop list It can then be applied immediately to the currently selected clip or range of clips A saved EQ setting can be deleted by first selecting it from the drop list then clicking the Delete button A special preset can be created called default Whenever the Clip EQ display is opened for a clip with no EQ this preset will automatically be loaded into the display Mouse Edit Menus The screen Edit Menus provide many commands that are available elsewhere in the system and some that are not The mouse can be used to access these commands Fairlight XYNERGI Page 164 EDITING November 7 2014 Edit Menu Edit Undo Ctrl4z Undoes the last edit Redo Ctrl Y Redoes the last edit that was undone Undo List Shows a list of the edits that can be u
416. tomatic File Saving allows you to save your project automatically at regular time intervals To set this up issue the command setup General Preferences and go to the Projects tab Fairlight XYNERGI Page 345 PROJECT AND FILE MANAGEMENT November 7 2014 General Preferences x Options Audiobase Playback Video Capture Projects Audio Plugins Number of Backups 5 Autosave ad Load Last Project on Startup D Set the desired interval for Auto Save or turn it off Note When the time for an Auto Save arrives it will wait until the transport is stationary then take control of the system While saving it will prevent the transport from starting and mute all audio at the outputs This is necessary to prevent unwanted interaction with the automation system Undo Files XYNERGI allows unlimited UNDOs for audio editing It does this by storing a copy of the Edit list each time an edit is made The undo files are stored in the folder C Program Files Fairlight Dream II Undo Each time a project is opened the system starts writing undo files for it starting with a file called UndoFile_00 1 This file name does not contain the project for which it was created because the system is designed only to work with the currently open project file Immediately after reopening any file the UNDO command cannot be issued it only works on edits made in the current sessions If there is an UndoFile_00 1 already in the fo
417. ts left side Do the same thing to expand them In XYNERGI Track Link Groups are displayed with lines through the buttons as follows Track ack Track Track Unselected ay yE Link Groups Selected Link Groups Link Group Destroying a Link Group sy i Link groups are destroyed from the Link Group menu Step 1 Press the Setup Megamode button Step 2 Press the Link Gp button Fairlight XYNERGI Page 193 GROUPING November 7 2014 The feeds that currently belong to link groups are shown in yellow or brown Feeds available for selection are shown in dark blue Step 3 Select a Link Group Step 4 Select unlink Suspending a Track Link Group Track Link groups can be temporarily suspended while you work on one of the member tracks Step 1 Hold down the BLUE button Step 2 Press a track button that is inside a Link Group The Link Group is suspended and the track you pressed becomes the Current Path Reinstating a Suspended Link Group Suspended groups can be reinstated at any time until the project is closed or until one of the members is used in another Link Group Step 1 Hold down the BLUE button Step 2 Press a track button that was inside a Link Group before it was suspended The Link Group is reinstated and becomes the Current Path Panning Link Groups When a Link Group is the Current Path the pan controls act on each Link Group member at the same time The system maintains a Spread Box for each Link Group
418. tton Close Edit PlayHead Time Automation Pass 00 00 57 15 13 13 54 Paste 00 00 47 02 13 13 12 Automation Pass 00 00 43 09 13 12 38 Automation Pass 00 00 35 12 13 12 28 Paste 00 00 34 20 13 04 47 Paste 00 00 31 19 13 04 35 00 00 25 07 RecordClips 00 00 27 08 13 03 22 RecordClips 00 00 24 03 13 03 19 RecordClips 00 00 03 01 13 02 49 The Undo List shows a mixture of audio events automation data events and combined audio data events The Undo menu shows a list of undoable events with some detail about the type of event This will help you choose which event s you want to undo Red events are ones that you have already undone and can be redone The Time column shows the time of day that the event occurred You can undo to any point in the list in the following ways Step 1 Double click the event with the mouse OR Step 1 Jog down to the event using the Jog Wheel Step 2 Press the ENTER button this also closes the Undo List You can locate to the PlayHead timecode of any event by selecting it and pressing the Locate softkey Undo Follow When you undo or redo an event the system can help by restoring the conditions under which you first made the change This may include optionally the transport location Zoom level track selection and track display which tracks are displayed Fairlight XYNERGI Page 148 EDITING November 7 2014 Each of these options is avai
419. tton and type in a timecode then press Enter To rename the mark press the Rename soft key or click the Rename screen button and type in a name then press Enter To change the mark index click the Set Index screen button and type in a Index number then press Enter You can also press Enter to locate to the selected Mark or click the sump To button if you want to keep the dialog open Normally marks are displayed at the top of the Edit Screen To display the mark as a vertical yellow line check the Line Marker box The middle mark below is a line marker while the other two are normal Fairlight XYNERGI Page 73 TRANSPORT November 7 2014 00 53 15 00 Jump to Mark Hold down one of the Jump keys Press the Mark soft key if it s not already on Just for now turn the others off Marks are now your Jump Target Release the Jump button to locate to the next or previous mark in the project Press the Jump button a few more times to keep moving through the marks Go To The Go To command is used to quickly locate to either a Timecode position a specific clip name or a stored Mark General Go To Usage Step 1 Press the Go To button Step 2 Select an option from the Soft keys note Timecode is selected by default Step 3 Press the Go To button again or ENTER to locate to the displayed timecode or Play to locate and go into play immediately or press Esc upper left key to close the dialog without locating anywh
420. ttons and loops around it Note you can set the range while the Loop Menu is active Last Record Uses the start and end of the last transport recording to set the loop start and end points and loops around it Fairlight XYNERGI Page 69 TRANSPORT November 7 2014 Enter Starts looping with the current loop start and end points and exits the menu Picture Key Commands The picture key options give you a set of ready made loop sizes in the upper row of buttons loop 2 3 Sets the loop start point 2 seconds back from the current transport position and the loop end point 3 seconds forward from it And starts looping etc The other picture key commands work similarly With the Mouse Click the Loop icon in the toolbar to start looping the current range Changing the range points while looping does not change the loop Special Transport Commands The Play Menu Play Menu displays special play commands on adjacent buttons and on the Soft keys Play Head gt Plays from one second before clip head on current track Play Tail gt Plays from one second before clip tail on current track Play Fade gt Plays from one second before clip fade out on current track Play Again gt Plays from the same point as last time Note Play Again appears on the same key so you can just press Play Menu twice for Play Again Play Menu Play gt Prerolls the current position then goes into play Note Preroll is set in the Sync menu Pres
421. ttons are extinguished The mix items that will be recorded are those for the enabled parameters signal paths Notes You can press Auto before or after pressing Play You can also take a signal path out of record by pressing Auto again while play continues or take everything out of record by pressing the a11 read button See Leaving Automation Record below for other ways to exit record Using Screen Auto Buttons Step 1 Step 2 Enable parameter s see Enable Parameters below Click Auto on one or more Faders this puts them into WRITE or TRIM see below There are Auto buttons in the Edit Screen and the Mixer Screen See pictures below Auto Buttons Fairlight XYNERGI Page 249 AUTOMATION November 7 2014 Step 3 Step 4 Auto Buttons Click Play to move the transport automation data starts writing Click stop automation stops writing and Auto buttons are extinguished Using the In Button This works on all selected signal paths The In and out buttons are available in the Punch sub menu To access this press the Punch Menu button in the Mixer Megamode Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Enable parameter s see Enable Parameters below Select signal paths see Select Signal Paths below Press Play to move transport Press In automation enters record and starts writing Press out automation stops writing The mix items that will be recorded are those for the
422. u are happy with your current fade shape using fade head is a fast and simple way to get a lot of work done NOTES e f you do not want to apply the Smart Panel shape shown above to the Head turn off the shape soft key e Ifyou ONLY want to apply the shape and not to change the length of the head fade turn off the length soft key Fairlight XYNERGI Page 123 EDITING November 7 2014 Fade Tail Same as fade head but it fades from the cursor to the end of the clip Fade Clip Applies the numbers in the Head Duration and Tail Duration fields shown in the Smart Pane 10 00 00 00 20 Duration Using Multiple Tracks If multiple tracks are selected the simple Fade Head and Fade Tail commands will apply to all clips touching the cursor on selected tracks Using a Range If a range is present the fade head command applies the Head Duration field value and the fade tail command applies the Tail Duration field value to all red clips those wholly inside the range on selected tracks Using Soft Keys Advanced fade editing can easily be performed using the soft keys Setting Fade Duration Fade duration can be set numerically as follows Step 1 Press the set dur soft key Turn off the shape soft key if you do not wish to apply the Smart Panel fade shape to the selected clips Step 2 Press the fade head fade tail Of fade clip key This determines whether the duration you set will apply to the head
423. uct of a project Cannot be turned off Fairlight XYNERGI Page 200 MIXING November 7 2014 Sub Buses 1 to 8 Sub Buses are extra buses to which channels can be assigned In turn they can be assigned to feed into the Main bus Fader send the same levels to all Subs and Main at the same time When preparing mixes in multiple formats simultaneously e g Stereo and 5 1 Sub Buses can be configured as Reduction Buses which allow different levels and panning to different formats For details see Setting Bus Format Auxes 1 to 12 Aux buses are typically used to create independent mixes for effect sends and for headphone mixes The sends to these buses are controlled from each channel and can be sent pre post fader also pre post mute Auxes can take any available bus format For details see Setting Bus Format below Multi Track MT MT buses were created to allow traditional multi track tape busing There can be up to 24 of them and their format is either mono or off This guide shows you how to set formats for your buses Note The total number of bus elements is finite Setting Bus Format The following procedure is used to set Bus Formats using the tactile surface Step 1 Press the green Setup button Step 2 Press the Bus Format button Step 3 Main Subs and Auxes can be selected on the Picture keys To access MT buses press the Bus MT toggle deselect everything first Select one or more buses Th
424. using a USB driver installer that comes with your MIDI keyboard Once you start the Post V5 0 software click setup Instruments Identify your keyboard and set it to play MIDI Channel 1 Patching The Sampler has a pair of stereo outputs which must be patched to Live Inputs or Track Inputs You should patch to Tracks if you wish to record the Sampler output otherwise to Lives To do this Step 1 Select the Patch I O page by pressing the patch button in the Setup Megamode Step 2 Click Instrument Inputs in the lower left of the page Step 3 Select cMIGenerator 1 and cMIGenerator 2 in the upper left of the page Step 4 Select Track Inputs Of Live Inputs in the lower right of the page Step 5 Select any pair of the Track or Lives and click the Patch button Step 6 Exit the Page I O page by pressing the Patch button again or by right clicking anywhere in the Patch page on screen Fairlight XYNERGI Page 332 SAMPLING November 7 2014 Step 7 If you chose Tracks as your destination make sure to arm them so you can hear the Sampler This can be done by pressing the corresponding Track buttons in the Record Megamode The SDS is accessed via the SDS picture key in the Editor MegaMode Accessing SDS SDS is accessed via the SDS picture key in the Editor MegaMode This will cause display of the SDS Menu in the Pad The rotary encoders will become available when you load some sounds Previewing and Loading Sounds into SDS When t
425. utomation Basics Write Trim and Read In Automation we use the terms Write Trim and Read e Write means to record absolute values of parameters e Trim means to record changes to stored values of parameters e Read means to play back the parameter values that have been written The word record is used in this chapter to mean Write or Trim The Mix Item A mix item is one parameter for one signal path Examples are Track 47 Main Bus Fader Level Live 11 EQ Band 1 Q factor Sub Bus 2 Mute There are literally thousands of mix items in the XYNERGI system The automation system can write the changing values or states of every mix item over the duration of your project and read it starting at any position These written values and states are called mix automation data Mix ON When the mix on key is OFF all mixing and routing functions are manually operated and the mixer will not write or read automation When the mix on key is ON all mix items for which automation data is written will read that data and the user has no manual control of them Mix items with no written automation data can be manually controlled by the user In addition most automation functions are hidden until Mix On is turned ON To toggle Mix On you may do any of the following Fairlight XYNERGI Page 247 AUTOMATION November 7 2014 e Press the Mix On button in the Mixer Megamode e Click the Mix on button above the Mixer Scre
426. values For faders the knob must be clicked and dragged up or down While you are doing this the current value is displayed For rotary knobs as in the EQ Zoom panel shown below first click and hold near the center then drag the mouse in a ring around the knob A tooltip shows you the current value Click the up down buttons for fine change Box shows the current value Click here Then drag the mouse around the knob Hover over any knob and use the mouse wheel to change its setting Double clicking on any fader gain or aux send knob sets its value to 0 dB Mouse Wheel Control The mouse wheel can be used to control knob and fader settings This behaviour must be enabled first Step 1 Access the System Variables display by holding down shift and ct ri then typing vV Step 2 In the Mouse Control group right side of dialog box enable Use Mouse Wheel The Mixer Screen must be in focus if the Editor Screen is in focus the mouse wheel causes zooming of the tracks To get the Mixer Screen in focus simply click anywhere on the screen For mouse wheel control of any fader or rotary knob in any of the Mixer Screen displays hover the mouse pointer over the control and turn the wheel Fairlight XYNERGI Page 220 MIXING November 7 2014 For fine control hold down the SHIFT button while turning the mouse wheel Virtual Channel All other functions can be controlled using the POST V5 0 Virtual Channe
427. verview The record menu gives you some recording shortcuts which appear when the Record button is held down These include record head record clip record here and record again These are explained in the next step Preroll and Postroll Many record menu commands use a Pre Roll and Pre Roll The length of these can be set in the ADR List or the Sync Menu To do this in the ADR Menu press the green Record Megamode button then apr then use the on screen dialog The ADR List can also be displayed using the command ADR gt ADR List To do this in the Sync Menu press the green Setup Megamode button then sync Menu then use the soft keys Using the Record Menu Hold down the Record button to display the following soft keys head prerolls then punches in at the nearest clip head on the selected track clip prerolls then records the length of the nearest clip on the currently selected track here prerolls then punches in at the current position range prerolls punches in at From and out at To This command is shown only when there is a range again prerolls then repeats the last recording you made Punch Into Tracks Independently Overview Using the Play and Record button punches all armed tracks into and out of record What if you want to punch individual tracks in and out without affecting others Using the track arming buttons you can have individual control of which tracks are in record The methods for arming and disarming t
428. video clips become dissolves Audio tracks and Pyxis track can be selected and edited simultaneously Editing with the Mouse Video clips can be dragged left and right but not up and down across tracks Using Pyxis Track as a Machine Selecting Pyxis Track as one of your machines allows you to take it offline the same way as physical machines For information about setting Pyxis as a machine see Machine Control page 363 The Pan Theatre The Pan Theatre offers a combination of the 3D panner with the Pyxis window as shown below Fairlight XYNERGI Page 322 PYXIS TRACK November 7 2014 Z i l i i AC Wes i This allows you to adjust surround panning directly in front of the pictures You can use the mouse to move the yellow or red balls or use the regular panning controls and joystick To enable the Pan Theatre first enable the 3D panner using the System Variables dialog Step 1 Type The System Variables dialog box is displayed Fairlight XYNERGI Page 323 PYXIS TRACK November 7 2014 Call Modes E Allow Call by Solo E Allow Call by In Line Panel Allow Call by Fader Touch Allow Call by Fader and Pan Touch No Call by Touch Softpanels Allow channel keyboard softpanels E Allow softpanels on touch E Enable joystick zoom 3 Softpanel active seconds 5 0 Peak display limit dB 10 0 Seconds to retain overload Clear Peak on Record F Pla
429. w gt Clip Search In the Clip Search dialog there is a checkbox for Bins When this is checked the dialog shows all the clips in the Bin which can be auditioned previewed and pasted in the normal way Note the Bin can only be seen by the project from which it was created Dragging Directly from Windows Sometimes it is useful to place audio in bins before it has been used in the project This can be done by dragging files from a Windows Explorer Folder window directly into a open Bin in the Clip Search Window or you can drag them to the Bin Tab which will also display the Bin ClipStores ClipStores work in a similar way to Bins but can be located anywhere on your network and are accessible to all users ClipStores can be created at any time using File gt New Clipstore Clipstore files have the extension CLIPS To open a ClipStore use File Open Clipstore and browse to the file you want The project remembers which ClipStores have been used recently these can be accessed via the File Menu also Multiple ClipStores can be opened at the same time and by multiple users To place clips in a ClipStore select them then use Clip Publish Clips to Clipstore While this dialog is open you can choose which of the open ClipStores to target If you have selected multiple clips you can save them as a Grouped Clip and give them a name Fairlight XYNERGI Page 186 AUDIOBASE CLIP SEARCH CLIPSTORES QTUBE November 7 2014
430. want to edit and others that you want to see e Select a fixed number of tracks using the methods described above in Number of Tracks on Edit Screen Pyxis Track Displaying Video Full details about Pyxis Track are given in the chapter Pyxis Track on page 311 Track Colours Background Colour Each track has a colour that you can choose Selected tracks are shown in a lighter version of their base colour as shown below for track 143 which would be the same colour as 142 if not selected Fairlight XYNERGI Page 36 CHANNELS November 7 2014 IMG_0412 IMG_0412 Track 143 IMG_0418 E ah anala fm ope IMG_0418 ood name IMG_0419 To select track colours Step 1 Select tracks you want to colour Step 2 Use the menu Tracks Set Track Background Colour Fairlight XYNERGI Page 37 CHANNELS November 7 2014 Tracks Add Pyxis Track Delete Pyxis Track Convert To or From Midi Tracks Set Audio Track Count Rename Track Set Record Seed Name Add Clip Set Display Level Set Track Clip Colour C Set Track Background Colour Click to choose a colour for all selected tracks an epic Click to display a mixer Solo Trac for special colours Mute Tracks j Safe Tracks Reset All Track Heights Hide Selected Tracks Unhide Between Selected Tracks Unhide All Tracks E Sal Reset all colours to Select All Viewed Tracks Custom Colour factory defaults Path Naming Reset Colour
431. will update the numerical readouts of the automation data faders will move up and down and the audio levels mutes pans etc will update If you jog too fast the system will get behind but it catches up when you slow down or stop With Jog Mix OFF automation can only be written in Play Mode But turning it on allows writing in any forwards transport mode To do this toggle the Jog Mix button ON in the Mix Menu Any forwards movement can be used including Jog Shuttle Play FF Jump GoTo Locate or right button drag with the mouse Any speed is OK though of course the data resolution will be very low if you go fast Even if you press Stop the system stays in write this allows you to adjust control values before moving forward again As soon as you move more than one frame backwards the system will switch to Read Preview The Preview state is system wide When it is on parameters cannot be in Write or Trim but only Preview or Read or Isolate Its purpose is to free the faders and other controls from motor control and let you move them while finding a new balance Normally moving controls implies writing that data but Preview removes that restriction so you can play with the controls as much as you like and only write data when you are ready To free a particular mix item from motor control means putting it in Preview mode as follows Step 1 Make sure Mix is ON and Preview is ON Step 2 Enable the parameter Step 3 Put the
432. wn the Mute button or pressing the sez button and then the Mute Menu button Select some channels to be muted Fairlight XYNERGI Page 55 CHANNELS November 7 2014 Step 3 Hold down the Mute Menu button Two new buttons appear beside it Step 4 Press the to sEL button The SEL layout appears and the channels that were muted are now also selected These channels are the ONLY channels selected if there were other channels selected before they no longer are SEL to Solo or Mute XYNERGI allows you to solo or mute your selected channels This is useful for listening purposes To solo your selected channels Step 1 Engage the SEL layout by pressing the sex button Step 2 Select some channels Step 3 Hold down the sex button Two new buttons appear beside it Step 4 Press the to Solo button The SEL layout remains but the selected channels are now soloed These channels are the ONLY channels soloed if there were other channels soloed before they no longer are To mute your selected channels is the same procedure but press to Mute in Step 4 Solo Modes There are three solo modes e _solo in place or SIP e after fader listen or AFL e pre fader listen or PFL SIP mutes all other feeds leaving only the soloed feeds feeding the bus being monitored SIP supports monitoring in any format AFL and PFL modes replace the current monitor source with a stereo solo bus whenever a feed is soloed All soloed feeds are routed
433. y V All Meters use same meter point Launch on screen meters at Bootup Mixer Requires Restart EQ On Busses Step 2 Check the 3D Panner checkbox Step 3 Close the System Variables dialog MADI Channels 56 64 Automation Enable automation 10 Glide in time Frames Ew Glide out time Frames 0 Mix Edit Handles Frames Enable automation optimisation Save automation with project E Target Both as Default Oscillator 20 0 Oscillator level dB 1000 Oscillator frequency rey gt Metron Noise White Pink 20 0 VU reference level dB 0 0 VU Trim left dB 0 0 VU Trimright dB V Digital VU meters Now open the 3D Panner by double clicking the Pan Graph in XYNERGI Mixer Screen right clicking the Pan graph in FMC or double pressing the Path button in XYNERGI XCS Fairlight XYNERGI Page 324 PYXIS TRACK November 7 2014 FX Stereo 1 and click the video button The Pyxis Window will now display the Pan Theatre Fairlight XYNERGI Page 325 MIDI TRACKS November 7 2014 MIDI Tracks Introduction A licence is required to access the MIDI features so what follows only applies if you have purchased it Any number of tracks on the Edit Screen can be made into MIDI tracks by default they are all audio tracks The software can e Create MIDI Tracks e Record MIDI events in realtime e Load MIDI song files e Cut and paste MIDI clips e
434. y use the Bank key Press and release trim head The head of the clip is trimmed back to the cursor location Jog backwards a bit and press Enter The head is extended to the new position You can do this as many times as you like This time press and hold trim head The system exposes the whole head of the original recording While holding down trim head Jog over the exposed audio and choose where to trim it Release trim head when ready The clip is trimmed to your current position Slipping clips Overview Slipping clips is an alternative to Cut and Paste It has the advantage of leaving the clipboard undisturbed but does not allow moving clips to other tracks We can also slip the sync of a clip This means that the clip stays in the same place but the audio inside the clip slips earlier or later This means exposing a different portion of the original recording Note another quick way to slip a clip is to drag and drop it with the mouse You can drag it to another track as well Holding down the SHIFT key holds sync while you drag to another track Get Ready Press the green Editor button Operation Press the trim slip button If the word trim is highlighted press it again so that slip is highlighted Locate the transport so that the cursor crosses the middle of at least one clip Identify the track containing that clip and double press its button to make it the only selected track If necessary use the Bank key
435. y tracks armed for recording in order to use PRIME It also allows you to use Record Again and other automated record functions as triggers for Automation Record Saving and Loading Mixes Up to 256 complete mixes may be saved in each project and recalled later MIXES MUST BE SAVED BEFORE CLOSING A PROJECT or any unsaved mix data will be lost It is not enough to simply save the project See System Mix below for a useful safety measure The available space left in the project file for new mixes or mix data is displayed in the Mix menu When the space left falls below 2 the save soft key becomes disabled Saving a Mix Step 1 Press the File button Step 2 Press the save soft key in the LCD menu Step 3 Type a unique name for the mix on the PC keyboard and press Enter Alternatively type a name with a numeric suffix e g Demo Mix 1 The next time you press Save anew name will automatically be generated with an incremented suffix e g Demo Mix 2 Press Enter to save the mix with the new name Fairlight XYNERGI Page 259 AUTOMATION November 7 2014 Loading a Mix Step 1 Press the File button Step 2 Turn the jog wheel to scroll through the previously saved mixes These appear on the screen and in the XCS Pad area Press the sort soft key to select TIME or ALPHA ALPHA sorts the saved mixes in alpha numeric order TIME sorts the saved mixes in the order in which they were saved with the most recently saved mix at the end of
436. you want the Fade In point 120 121 122 123 127 128 129 130 1 132 133 134135 1 138 139 1401 5X20 Internal Top Layers 00 08 36 18 00 03 10 00 Step 2 Press and hold the Fade Head Curve button This will cause the Fade display to show in the Smart Pane y IU gU UL u Woy su 1 S I N 1 Alco 1 3 7 6 a dB 10 00 00 01 00 i 15 15 Duration Top Layers 5X20 Internal 00 08 36 1 Step 3 Turn the Jog Wheel to adjust the displayed curve Fairlight XYNERGI Page 142 EDITING November 7 2014 y 1u gU 3U 3U SU bU ZU BU U 10u Vow U 3U 3U SU b 1 50 3 36 11 7 6 1 2 5 Top Layers dB Duration P10 00 00 01 00 415 15 0 0 5X20 Internal 00 08 36 1 Step 4 y 1u gU 3U gU SU bU sU gU JU 1UU When ready release the Fade Head Curve button to apply the fade uo JU U jU 4U bU b ail p 5 3 A 11 7 dB 10 00 00 01 00 15 15 Duration 20 50 Top Layers 5X20 Internal 00 08 36 1 00 08 10 00 Note Clips on multiple tracks can be faded at the same time If a range is present all clips wholly inside the range will be affected using the number in the Duration field as the length of their fade in E 00 00 01 00 i Curation Copy Head Tail These keys copy the head or tail of the currently selected clip s The method for copy tail is listed Start with the cursor touching a clip whose tail you wis
437. ypes e TC Master the selected machine is the 9 Pin timecode master e Chase slave the selected machine is in 9 Pin chase mode e Remote slave XYNERGI will respond to 9 Pin remote commands like a virtual VTR e LTC Master the selected machine is set to chase external Longitudinal Time Code e MTC Master the selected machine is set to chase external MIDI Time Code e MMC Remote Slave when this is selected XYNERGI responds to MIDI Machine Control commands Fairlight XYNERGI Page 363 SYNC AND MACHINE CONTROL November 7 2014 e MMC Remote Master when this is selected XYNERGI is the MIDI Machine Control master e Pyxis selecting Pyxis Track as one of your machines allows you to take it offline the same way as physical machines See Editing with Machine Control on page 369 to see how this works e VITC Chase will chase VITC Vertical Interval Timecode including at low speed e Rewire Mixer e No Port No port selected Note You can have only one Master machine at a time but you can have as many slave machines as you like limited only by available ports Master and Slave machines can be used concurrently Press M1 and or M2 keys or use the Online checkbox or click the m1 M2 M3 screen buttons to place machines online Enter an Offset if desired Use the red Video Analog and Digital LEDs to arm tracks on your remote device as required Note The master Video Arm Enabl
438. ys are repeats of the keys found in the transport row of the Picture keys Both rew and FF can be repeated many times to increase speed Pressing REW FF issues a STOP command jog REW gt jump left jog FF jump right REW 0 gt jump left one frame FF 0 jump right one frame REW 1 gt jump left one second FF 1 jump right one second REW 2 gt jump left two seconds FF 2 gt jump right two seconds etc Review Jumps back by a few seconds then starts playing You can control the number of seconds that it jumps back hold down Review and press a Numpad key Jump Keys These keys are used to quickly move the transport forward or backwards on the timeline to Jump Targets These may be the next previous clip head or tail point fade point and or mark or to a specific clip name While the Jump key is held down you may press a Numpad key 1 2 etc to jump by that many seconds See more about Jumping on page 70 Fairlight XYNERGI Page 18 THE XYNERGI TACTILE CONTROLLER November 7 2014 From and To These keys are used to define the start and end times of a Range A Range is a marked period of time in the project Ranges are used for e Editing the range can be cut copied erased nudged and more e Recording a range can be automatically recorded e Mix Automation a range can be filled with automation values or isolated for a Write pass e See more about Using Ranges on page 104 Undo Red

XYNERGI Post V5 Operator Manual_001 9570KB

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents